Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
General Info
-How to Use This Manual
T h i s s u p p l e m e n t c o n t a i n s i n f o r m a t i o n for t h e '98-01 A C C O R D V 6
S e d a n a n d '98-01 A C C O R D C O U P E V 6 . R e f e r t o t h e '98-01
A C C O R D a n d A C C O R D C o u p e S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 , f o r
service p r o c e d u r e s a n d data n o t i n c l u d e d in this s u p p l e m e n t .
T h e f i r s t p a g e o f e a c h s e c t i o n is m a r k e d w i t h a b l a c k t a b t h a t
lines u p w i t h o n e o f the t h u m b index tabs o n this page a n d the
back cover. Y o u can quickly find the first page of each section
w i t h o u t looking t h r o u g h a full table of contents. T h e s y m b o l s
p r i n t e d at t h e t o p c o r n e r o f each p a g e c a n also be u s e d as a
quick reference s y s t e m .
Specifications
Maintenance
Engine Electrical
Safety Messages
Y o u r s a f e t y , a n d t h e s a f e t y o f o t h e r s , is v e r y i m p o r t a n t . T o h e l p
y o u make i n f o r m e d decisions, w e have provided safety
messages a n d other safety information t h r o u g h o u t this m a n u a l .
O f c o u r s e , it is n o t p r a c t i c a l o r p o s s i b l e t o w a r n y o u a b o u t a l l t h e
hazards associated w i t h servicing this vehicle. Y o u m u s t use
your own good judgment.
Y o u w i l l f i n d i m p o r t a n t safety i n f o r m a t i o n in a v a r i e t y o f f o r m s
including:
Safety Labels
on the vehicle.
Safety Messages
preceded b y a safety alert s y m b o l ^
and
one of three signal w o r d s , DANGER, W A R N I N G , or CAUTION.
These signal w o r d s m e a n :
inHT^TTcTini
Y o u W I L L b e K I L L E D o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.
WMMzIMM
Y o u C A N b e K I L L E D o r S E R I O U S L Y H U R T if
you don't follow instructions.
firaOTJTItfll
Y o u C A N b e H U R T if y o u d o n ' t f o l l o w
instructions.
instructions
A l l i n f o r m a t i o n c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s m a n u a l is b a s e d o n t h e l a t e s t
p r o d u c t i n f o r m a t i o n available at t h e t i m e of printing. W e reserve
t h e r i g h t t o m a k e c h a n g e s at a n y t i m e w i t h o u t n o t i c e . N o part o f
t h i s p u b l i c a t i o n m a y be r e p r o d u c e d , s t o r e d in retrieval s y s t e m ,
or t r a n s m i t t e d , in a n y f o r m b y a n y m e a n s , electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures and tables.
A s y o u r e a d t h i s m a n u a l , y o u w i l l f i n d i n f o r m a t i o n t h a t is
p r e c e d e d b y a I NOTICE | s y m b o l . T h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s m e s s a g e is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
First E d i t i o n 9/2000
HONDA MOTOR C O . ,
All Rights Reserved
LTD.
S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a p p l y t o U.S.A. a n d C a n a d a S e r v i c e Publication
Office
A s sections with "include S R S components;
special p r e c a u t i o n s are required w h e n servicing.
m a r k e d sections are n o t included in this m a n u a l .
1998-01 A c c o r d V - 6
S u p p l e m e n t
Engine
*Brakes
(Including ABS )
Body
*Heatincj,Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
Body Electrical
^Restraints
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).
Do not b u m p the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the
steering column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-01 models) and around the floor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
-1998 Model
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-12
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes -1998 Model
Vehicle Identification Number
rrrrrm
Engine Number
J 3 0 A 1 - 1000001
g h
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 5000001
Transmission Type
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
P2A8:
5-speed Manual
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-80P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-592P
NH-612M
RP-25P
RP-29P
R-94
YR-508P
Color
Mystic Blue Pearl *
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Flamenco Black Pearl
Regent Silver Metallic
Black Currant Pearl
Raisin Pearl
San Marino Red
Heather Mist Metallic *
Note1
Note2
* Note 1: US m o d e l o n l y
* Note 2: Canada m o d e l only
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
V e h i c l e Identification
Number a n d C a n a d i a n
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPE E
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
K A S 8 4 AO A
1-2
Engine Number
J30A1 - 2000001
1 H G C G 1 6 4 * X A 000001
a
cdef g h
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 6 SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 000001
a. Transmission Type
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
G-87P
NH-578
NH-592P
NH-612M
NH-623M
RP-25P
R-94
YR-508M
Color
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Flamenco Black Pearl
Regent Silver Metallic
Satin Silver Metallic
B l a c k c u r r a n t Pearl *
San Marino Red *
Heather Mist Metallic
# N o t e 2
Note1
Note1
* Note 1: US m o d e l only
* Note 2: Canada m o d e l only
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
1-3
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes - 2000 Model
Vehicle identification Number
1HG C G 5 5 4 * Y A 000001
Engine Number
J30A1 - 3000001
cde f g h
a. Engine Type
J30A1: 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 7500001
a. Transmission Type
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic (Ohio)
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-92P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-623M
RP-31M
R-94
YR-524M
Color
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Dark Emerald Pearl
Taffeta White
Satin Silver Metallic
Signet Silver Metallic
San Marino Red
Naples Gold Metallic
#Note
#Note
* Note : US m o d e l only
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification.
V e h i c l e Identification
Number and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety
S t a n d a r d Certification.
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KA S84 AO A
Paint Code
1-4
J30A1 - 4000001
1HG C G 5 5 4 * 1 A 000001
Engine Number
cdef g h
a. Engine Type
J 3 0 A 1 : 3.0 fi SOHC VTEC Sequential Multiport
Fuel-injected engine
b. Serial Number
Transmission Number
B7XA - 000001
a. Transmission Type
B7XA: 4-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code
B-92P
B-96P
G-87P
NH-578
NH-623M
R-94
R-507P
RP-31M
YR-524M
Color
Nighthawk Black Pearl
Eternal Blue Pearl *
Dark Emerald Pearl *
Taffeta White
Satin Silver Metallic
San Marino Red *
Firepepper Pearl
Signet Silver Metallic *
Naples Gold Metallic
Note2
Note1
# N o t e 1
Note1
Note2
* Note 1: US m o d e l only
* Note 2: Canada m odel only
Vehicle Identification
Number and Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification.
Vehicle Identification
Number and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification.
COLOR LABEL
INT. C O L O R
TYPEE
EXT. COLOR
B-80P
KA S84 AO A
Paint Code
1-5
General Information
1-6
1 -
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label (1998 Model)
Emission Group Identification
Example:
Engine Family:
INFORMATION
CATALYST
30VHGXBG
HONDA
(5dD)
P8C-A00
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
TIER 1/LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 A N D
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 1998 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA L E V
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
CALIFORNIA U L E V
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA A N D STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1998
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
1-8
r r r
a. Model Year
W: 1998
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
a b
a. Model Year
W: 1998
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
Example:
Engine Family:
INFORMATION
TO CANISTER
-|
EWP
\ VALVE
X HNX V 03 0 FF1
a b
SPARK PLUG GAP
NO OTHER ADJUSTMENTS NEEDED.
CATALYST
HJ
30VHGXBG
G3)
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR
NEW MOTOR VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA TLEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA A N D STATE OF
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
NEW TLEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
TIER 1/LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 1 AND
STATE OF CALIFORNIA LEV REGULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 1999 MODEL YEAR NEW MOTOR
VEHICLES.
CALIFORNIA LEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S EPA AND STATE OF
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
CALIFORNIA ULEV
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA AND STATE
OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 1999
NEW ULEV PASSENGER CARS PROVIDED THAT THIS
VEHICLE IS ONLY INTRODUCED INTO COMMERCE
FOR SALE IN THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA.
c d
a. Model Year
X: 1999
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
X HNX Ft 0130 AAA
rr
a b
c d
a. Model Year
X:1999
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
General information
Under-hood Emission Control Label (2000 Model)
Emission Group Identification
Example:
Engine Family:
VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION
TO CANISTER
^
EVAP PURGE
\ VALVE
a b
cd
CATALYST
30VHGFFG
H O N D A MOTOR CO. , LTD
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, A N D CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2000 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
ab
c d
a. Model Year
Y: 2000
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
1-10
Example;
Engine Family:
VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL
1.0-1.1mm
INFORMATION
IAC VALVE
m^jmMmJ^
REGULATOR
EVAP
CANISTER CANISTER
'
PURGE
f
VALVE
E V A P
if\
,,l
1
vK/
ST
\ w
a b
cd
TWC/H02S (2)
EGR/SF1
OBO II
CERTIFIED
IA BYPASS CONTROL/
THERMAL VALVE
CATALYST
( T T 1
IHJ
HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD
/
J \
FRONT
30VAGFFG
O
P8C-AQ3
FEDERAL
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS, A N D CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2001 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV PASSENGER CARS.
CANADIAN TIER 1
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA NLEV
REGULATIONS A N D CANDIAN TIER 1 STANDARDS
FOR 2001 MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS.
a. Model Year
1:2001
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
V: LDV
T: LDT
d. Displacement
e. Sequence Characters
Evaporative Family:
a b
a. Model Year
1: 2001
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
E: EVAP
R: EVAP/ORVR
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
General Information
Parts Marking
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are marked w i t h the vehicle identification number (VIN). Original
parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement body parts w i l l have self-adhesive labels, and a replacement engine and
transmission will have the VIN plate attached w i t h a break-off bolt.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking labels during body repair. Mask the labels before repairing the part.
1-12
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits
Engine Electrical
Engine A s s e m b l y
Cylinder Head
Engine Block
Engine Lubrication
Cooling
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n and Differential
Steering
Suspension
Brakes
Air Conditioning
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-12
2-13
'2-13
2-13
Design Specifications
Dimensions
Weight (U.S.A.)
Weight (CANADA)
Engine
Starter
Automatic T r a n s m i s s i o n
Steering
Suspension
Wheel Alignment
Brakes
Tires
Air Conditioning
Electrical Ratings
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16
Body Specifications
Illustration
2-17
Measurement
Stem
Qualification
Primary w i n d i n g resistance
at 68F (20C)
Secondary w i n d i n g resistance
at 68F (20C)
Ignition wire
Resistance
Type
S e r v i c e Limit
0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 2 il
1.71 20.3 k i i
1 - 4 - 2 - 5 - 3 - 6
Firing order
Spark plug
S t a n d a r d or N e w
12 V
Rated voltage
at 68F (20C)
25 k Q m a x .
N G K : PZFR5F-11
DENSO; PKJ16CR-L11
1 . 0 - 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 0 3 9 - 0 . 0 4 3 in.)
Gap
A t idle (check
Ignition timing
A / T (in M o r B ) : 1 0 2 B T D C at 680 + 50 r p m
t h e red m a r k )
Alternator belt
Tension adjustment
Alternator
Output
A u t o adjuster type
A t 13.5 V a n d
100 A
normal engine
temperature
Starter
Output
1.6 k W
C o m m u t a t o r mica depth
0.4-0.5 mm
( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.)
Commutator runout
C o m m u t a t o r O.D.
2 8 . 0 - 2 8 . 1 m m ( 1 . 1 0 2 - 1 . 1 0 6 in.)
Brush length
1 5 . 8 - 1 6 . 2 m m ( 0 . 6 2 - 0 . 6 4 in.)
1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 0 - 1 . 8 0 kgf, 3 . 5 3 - 3 . 9 7 Ibs)
Engine Assembly
Measurement
Item
Compression
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Minimum
o p e n t h r o t t l e . (See D e s i g n S p e c s f o r
Maximum
ratio.)
2-2
Qualification
P r e s s u r e C h e c k at 2 0 0 r p m w i t h w i d e
variation
S e r v i c e Limit
specs
Cylinder Head
Item
Measurement
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
S e r v i c e Limit
Head
Warpage
Height
Camshaft
End play
0 . 0 5 - 0 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 8 in.)
C a m s h a f t - t o - h o l d e r oil c l e a r a n c e
0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 0 8 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 5 in.)
Total runout
Intake, p r i m a r y
Intake, m i d
Intake,
secondary
Exhaust
Valves
C l e a r a n c e (cold)
S t e m O.D.
Stem-to-guide clearance
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)
Exhaust
0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m ( 0 . 0 1 1 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
Intake
5 . 4 8 5 - 5 . 4 9 5 m m ( 0 . 2 1 5 9 - 0 . 2 1 6 3 in.)
Exhaust
5 . 4 5 0 - 5 . 4 6 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 4 6 - 0 . 2 1 5 0 in.)
0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 8 in.)
0.08 m m (0.003 in )
0 . 0 5 5 - 0 . 0 8 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 1 in.)
0.12 m m (0.005 in )
Intake
Exhaust
V a l v e seats
Width
Valve springs
Valve guides
Free l e n g t h
I.D.
Installed height
Rocker a r m s
Arm-to-shaft clearance
Intake
Intake
1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.)
Exhaust
1 . 2 5 - 1 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 - 0 . 0 6 1 in.)
2.00 m m (0.079 in )
Intake
4 6 . 7 5 - 4 7 . 5 5 m m (1.841 - 1 . 8 7 2 in.)
Exhaust
4 6 . 6 8 - 4 7 . 4 8 m m ( 1 . 8 3 8 - 1 . 8 6 9 in.)
Intake
Exhaust
Intake
5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m ( 0 . 2 1 7 1 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.)
Exhaust
5 . 5 1 5 - 5 . 5 3 0 m m (0.2171 - 0 . 2 1 7 7 in.)
Intake
2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 m m ( 0 . 8 3 5 - 0 . 8 7 4 in.)
_ _
Exhaust
2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 m m ( 0 . 8 1 2 - 0 . 8 5 2 in.)
Intake
0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 6 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 6 in.)
Exhaust
0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 7 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 0 in.)
2-3
Item
Block
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
0.07 m m (0.003 in.) m a x .
Bore diameter
86.000-86.015 m m
86.065 m m
( 3 . 3 8 5 8 - 3 . 3 8 6 4 in.)
(3.3884 in.)
0.05 m m (0.002 in )
Bore taper
Reboring limit
Piston
S e r v i c e Limit
W a r p a g e of deck
85.975-85.985 m m
b o t t o m of skirt
( 3 . 3 8 4 8 - 3 . 3 8 5 2 in.)
(3.3844 in.)
Clearance in c y l i n d e r
0.015-0.040 m m
85.965 m m
( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.)
Ring groove w i d t h
Piston rings
Ring-to-groove clearance
Top
1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.)
Second
1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 8 0 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.)
1.25 m m (0.049 in )
Oil
2 . 8 0 5 - 2 . 8 2 5 m m ( 0 . 1 1 0 4 - 0 . 1 1 1 2 in.)
2.85 m m (0.112 in )
0 . 0 3 5 - 0 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 4 in.)
0.13 m m (0.005 in )
0 . 0 3 0 - 0 . 0 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.)
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
0 . 0 4 0 - 0 . 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 2 in.)
0 . 2 0 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
21.962-21.965 m m
21.954 m m
Top
Second
Top
Second
Oil
Piston pin
O.D.
1.25 m m (0.049 in )
( 0 . 8 6 4 6 - 0 . 8 6 4 8 in.)
(0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance
-0.0050-+0.0010 mm
Pin-to-rod clearance
0.005-0.014 m m
( - 0 . 0 0 0 2 0 - + 0 . 0 0 0 0 4 in.)
Connecting rod
( 0 . 0 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 0 6 in.)
21.970-21.976 m m
( 0 . 8 6 5 0 - 0 . 8 6 5 2 in.)
Large-end bore diameter
Crankshaft
Nominal
0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
71.976-72.000 m m
52.976-53.000 m m
End play
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
0.45 m m (0.018 in )
( 2 . 8 3 3 7 - 2 . 8 3 4 6 in.)
( 2 . 0 8 5 7 - 2 . 0 8 6 6 in.)
Runout
Crankshaft
M a i n b e a r i n g - t o - j o u r n a l oil
0 . 0 2 0 - 0.044 m m (0.0008
bearings
clearance
Rod bearing
clearance
2-4
0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 4 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 7 in.)
Engine Lubrication
Item
Engine oil
Measurement
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Qualification
Service Limit
Capacity
0.20 m m (0.008in.)
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
0 . 1 4 - 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
P u m p h o u s i n g - t o - o u t e r r o t o r axial
0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 7 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.)
clearance
Oil p r e s s u r e w i t h oil t e m p e r a t u r e at
176F (80C)
at idle
at 3,000 r p m
7 0 k P a (0.7 k g f / c m , 1 0 psi)
2
Cooling
Item
Measurement
Radiator
Reservoir
Coolant capacity
Radiator cap
O p e n i n g pressure
Thermostat
Opening temperature
Qualification
Engine overhaul
Opening temperature
'01 m o d e l s
S e r v i c e Limit
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 18 psi)
Begins to open
169-176F(76-80C)
194F(90C)
10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n
Thermostat
Fully o p e n
'98-00 m o d e l s
S t a n d a r d or N e w
7.5 ft (7.9 U S q t , 6.6 I m p qt)
Begins t o open
Fully o p e n
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n
163~171F (73~77C)
190F(88C)
10.0 m m (0.39 in.) m i n .
Radiator fan
196~203F (91-95C)
switch
217-232F(103-111C)
Item
Fuel p r e s s u r e
Pressure w i t h regulator
regulator
v a c u u m hose disconnected
Fuel t a n k
Capacity
Engine idle
Idle s p e e d w i t h h e a d l i g h t s
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
2 8 0 - 3 3 0 kPa ( 2 . 9 - 3 . 4 k g f / c m , 4 1 - 4 8 psi)
IndorE
680 5 0 r p m
0.1 m a x .
2-5
Item
ATF (Automatic
Capacity
Qualification
Use Honda
ATF-Z1
Transmission
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Service Limit
Fluid)
ATF pressure
Line p r e s s u r e
A t 1,500 r p m i n
llorE
8 0 0 - 8 6 0 kPa
7 6 0 kPa
2
( 8 . 2 - 8 . 8 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 130 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
position
4th clutch pressure
A t 2,000 r p m in
H
position
A t 2,000 r p m in
H
position
A t 1,500 r p m in
1st c l u t c h p r e s s u r e
A t 1,500 r p m in
[U p o s i t i o n
CD p o s i t i o n
Torque converter
Stall s p e e d : C h e c k with v e h i c l e on
Clutches
C l u t c h e n d plate-to-top d i s c
(8.1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
2
(8.1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
2
( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
7 9 0 - 8 7 0 kPa
7 5 0 kPa
2
( 8 . 1 - 8 . 9 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 psi)
(7.6 k g f / c m , 1 1 0 psi)
2,250-2,550 rpm
level g r o u n d
1st
1.2-1.4 m m
( 0 . 0 4 7 - 0 . 0 5 5 in.)
clearance
2nd
0.85-1.05 m m
3rd
0.55-0.75 m m
4th
0.55-0.75 m m
( 0 . 0 3 3 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)
( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 3 0 in.)
Clutch return spring free length
1st
2nd
3rd, 4th
2-6
1st
W h e n discolored
2nd
W h e n discolored
3rd
W h e n discolored
4th
W h e n discolored
Markl
W h e n discolored
Mark 2
W h e n discolored
Mark 3
W h e n discolored
Mark 4
W h e n discolored
Mark 6
W h e n discolored
Mark 7
W h e n discolored
Mark 8
W h e n discolored
Mark 9
W h e n discolored
MarkO
W h e n discolored
Markl
W h e n discolored
Mark 2
W h e n discolored
Mark 3
W h e n discolored
Mark 4
W h e n discolored
Mark 5
W h e n discolored
Mark 6
W h e n discolored
Mark 7
W h e n discolored
Mark 8
W h e n discolored
Mark 9
W h e n discolored
specs
Item
Valve body
Measurement
Qualification
S t a t o r s h a f t n e e d l e b e a r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
Torque converter
A T F p u m p d r i v e g e a r I.D.
Reverse shift
S e r v i c e Limit
W h e n w o r n or
side
( 1 . 0 6 3 0 - 1 . 0 6 3 8 in.)
damaged
ATF p u m p side
29.000-29.021 m m
W h e n w o r n or
S t a n d a r d or N e w
27.000-27.021 m m
( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 6 in.)
damaged
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 0 5 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Drive gear
0 . 2 1 0 - 0.265 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 3 - 0 . 0 1 0 4 in.)
Driven gear
0 . 0 7 0 - 0 . 1 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 8 - 0 . 0 0 4 9 in.)
14.016-14.034 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 1 8 - 0 . 5 5 2 5 in.)
damaged
13.980-13.99 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 0 4 - 0 . 5 5 0 8 in.)
damaged
Fork f i n g e r t h i c k n e s s
5 . 6 0 - 6 . 0 0 m m ( 0 . 2 2 0 - 0 . 2 3 6 in.)
fork
W h e n w o r n or
Park g e a r a n d
damaged
pawl
Servo body
S h i f t f o r k s h a f t b o r e I.D.
14.000-14.010 m m
S h i f t f o r k s h a f t v a l v e b o r e I.D.
37.000-37.039 m m
( 0 . 5 5 1 2 - 0 . 5 5 1 6 in.)
Regulator valve
(1.4585 in.)
S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
32.000-32.025 m m
32.050 m m
( 1 . 2 5 9 8 - 1 . 2 6 0 8 in.)
(1.2618 in.)
S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
35.000-35.025 m m
35.05 m m
( 1 . 3 7 8 0 - 1 . 3 7 8 9 in.)
(1.3799 in.)
S e a l i n g r i n g c o n t a c t I.D.
29.000-29.013 m m
29.050 m m
( 1 . 1 4 1 7 - 1 . 1 4 2 2 in.)
(1.1437 in.)
body
Accumulator
body
Stator shaft
37.045 m m
( 1 . 4 5 6 7 - 1 . 4 5 8 2 in.)
2-7
Item
Mainshaft
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Service Limit
at s t a t o r s h a f t
22.984-23.000 m m
( 0 . 9 0 4 9 - 0 . 9 0 5 5 in.)
damaged
at 3 r d g e a r
52.975-52.991 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 2 . 0 8 5 6 - 2 . 0 8 6 3 in.)
damaged
at 4 t h g e a r c o l l a r
33.975-33.991 m m
W h e n w o r n or
area
I.D. o f 3 r d g e a r
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 3 3 7 6 - 1 . 3 3 8 2 in.)
damaged
59.000-59.019 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 2 . 3 2 2 8 - 2 . 3 2 3 6 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f 4th g e a r
40.000-40.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.)
damaged
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 1 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.)
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.)
No. 1
W h e n w o r n or
No. 2
W h e n w o r n or
No. 3
W h e n w o r n or
No. 4
W h e n w o r n or
No. 5
W h e n w o r n or
No. 6
W h e n w o r n or
27 x 47 x 5 m m
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
Thrust washer thickness
damaged
Length of 4th gear collar
5 8 . 5 - 5 8 . 6 m m ( 2 . 3 0 3 - 2 . 3 0 7 in.)
4 . 4 5 - 4 . 6 0 m m ( 0 . 1 7 5 - 0 . 1 8 1 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
32 m m sealing
1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
1 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 3 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
2.025 -
0.081 in.)
0.2354 in.)
ring
29 m m s e a l i n g
ring
W i d t h of sealing ring groove
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D.
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e b u s h i n g I.D.
5.97 -
4th clutch
11.47 -
11.48 m m (0.4516 -
0.4520 in.)
3rd clutch
6.018 -
6.030 m m (0.2369 -
0.2374 in.)
4th clutch
2-8
2.060 m m (0.079 -
3rd clutch
5.98 m m (0.2350 -
11.500 -
11.518mm
11.530 m m
(0.4528 -
0.4535 in.)
(0.4539 in.)
Item
Countershaft
Measurement
Diameter of needle bearing contact
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
S e r v i c e Limit
W h e n w o r n or
at 4 t h g e a r
34.975-34.991 m m
( 1 . 3 7 7 0 - 1 . 3 7 7 6 in.)
damaged
at 2 n d g e a r
39.979-40.000 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 0 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.)
damaged
at p a r k g e a r
41.964 - 4 1 . 9 8 0 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 6 5 2 1 - 1 . 6 5 2 8 in.)
damaged
at r i g h t e n d
3 8 . 5 0 5 - 38.515 m m
W h e n w o r n or
area
( 1 . 5 1 5 9 - 1 . 5 1 6 3 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f 4th g e a r
41.000-41.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 6 1 4 2 - 1 . 6 1 4 8 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f i d l e r g e a r
50.000-50.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 9 6 8 5 - 1 . 9 6 9 1 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f r e v e r s e g e a r
46.000-46.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 8 1 1 0 1 . 8 1 1 6 in.)
damaged
E n d p l a y o f 1st g e a r
0 . 0 0 - 0 . 3 3 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
E n d p l a y o f 4th g e a r
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 2 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 1 1 in.)
0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 8 in.)
0 . 1 0 - 0 . 2 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 0 in.)
5 3 . 9 2 - 5 3 . 9 6 m m ( 2 . 1 2 3 - 2 . 1 2 4 in.)
Cotter thickness
1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)
R e v e r s e s e l e c t o r h u b O.D.
5 5 . 8 7 - 5 5 . 9 0 m m ( 2 . 1 9 9 6 - 2 . 2 0 0 8 in.)
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
2-9
Item
Secondary shaft
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
S e r v i c e Limit
at 1st g e a r
37.978-37.993 mm
( 1 . 4 9 5 2 - 1 . 4 9 5 8 in.)
damaged
at 2 n d gear
33.986-33.999 mm
W h e n w o r n or
area
I.D. o f 1st g e a r
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 3 3 8 0 - 1 . 3 3 8 5 in.)
damaged
44.000-44.016 mm
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 7 3 2 3 - 1 . 7 3 2 9 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f 2 n d g e a r
40.000-40.016 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 1 . 5 7 4 8 - 1 . 5 7 5 4 in.)
damaged
E n d p l a y o f 1st g e a r
0 . 0 7 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
0 . 0 4 - 0 . 1 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
No. 1
W h e n w o r n or
No. 2
W h e n w o r n or
No. 3
W h e n w o r n or
No. 4
W h e n w o r n or
No. 5
W h e n w o r n or
No. 6
W h e n w o r n or
No. 1
W h e n w o r n or
No. 2
W h e n w o r n or
No. 3
W h e n w o r n or
No. 4
W h e n w o r n or
No. 5
W h e n w o r n or
No. 6
W h e n w o r n or
No. 7
W h e n w o r n or
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
37 x 55 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
damaged
1 . 9 9 - 2 . 0 2 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 - 0 . 0 8 0 in.)
Cotter thickness
Sealing ring thickness
1 . 8 9 0 - 1 . 9 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 4 - 0 . 0 7 7 in.)
2 . 0 2 5 - 2 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 0 8 1 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D.
7 . 9 7 - 7 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 3 1 3 8 - 0 . 3 1 4 2 in.)
C l u t c h f e e d p i p e b u s h i n g I.D.
8 . 0 0 0 - 8 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 1 5 0 - 0 . 3 1 5 6 in.)
13.990-14.000 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 0 8 - 0 . 5 5 1 2 in.)
damaged
Reverse idler
gear
area
at reverse idler
gear shaft
0 . 0 3 - 0 . 3 6 m m (0.001 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.)
End play
I.D.
Transmission
18.007-18.020 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 7 0 8 9 - 0 . 7 0 9 4 in.)
damaged
0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
h o u s i n g side
Reverse idler
0 . 9 7 - 1 . 0 3 m m ( 0 . 0 3 8 - 0 . 0 4 1 in.)
2-10
14.006-14.024 m m
W h e n w o r n or
( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)
damaged
I.D. o f t r a n s m i s s i o n h o u s i n g o f r e v e r s e
14.006-14.024 m m
( 0 . 5 5 1 4 - 0 . 5 5 2 1 in.)
specs
Item
Measurement
Standard or New
Qualification
Wire Diameter
(0.063 in.)
(0.409 in.)
(1.319 in.)
0.8 m m
6.6 m m
49.1 m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.933 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
35.7 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.406 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
32.2 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.268 in.)
1.1 m m
8.6 m m
30.1 m m
(0.043 in.)
(0.339 in.)
(1.185 in.)
0.9 m m
7.6 m m
63.0 m m
(0.035 in.)
(0.299 in.)
(2.480 in.)
0.6 m m
5.8 m m
14.5 m m
(0.024 in.)
(0.228 in.)
(0.571 in.)
T o r q u e converter check
1.2 m m
8.6 m m
35.1 m m
valve spring
(0.047 in.)
(0.339 in.)
(1.382 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
35.7 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.406 in.)
0.7 m m
6.1 m m
17.8 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.240 in.)
(0.701 in.)
5.5 m m
37.4 m m
30.3 m m
(0.217 in.)
(1.472 in.)
(1.193 in.)
Relief v a l v e s p r i n g
C o o l e r check v a l v e s p r i n g
R e v e r s e CPC v a l v e s p r i n g
body springs
(see p a g e 14-
164)
Regulator valve spring B
Servo body
s p r i n g s (see
p a g e 14-165)
CPC v a l v e A s p r i n g
CPC v a l v e B s p r i n g
4th a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g A
Accumulator
1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g B
body springs
(see p a g e 14-
Free L e n g t h
33.5 m m
1.6 m m
Regulator valve
10.4 m m
s p r i n g s (see
p a g e 14-161)
O.D.
1st a c c u m u l a t o r s p r i n g A
166)
2nd accumulator spring B
1.8 m m
14.7 m m
87.5 m m
(0.071 in.)
(0.579 in.)
(3.445 in.)
1.7 m m
9.4 m m
44.0 m m
(0.067 in.)
(0.370 in.)
(1.732 in.)
0.7 m m
6.6 m m
42.9 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.689 in.)
0.65 m m
6.6 m m
34.8 m m
(0.026 in.)
(0.260 in.)
(1.370 in.)
0.8 m m
7.1 m m
40.4 m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.280 in.)
(1.591 in.)
0.8 m m
7.1 m m
40.4 m m
(0.031 in.)
(0.280 in.)
(1.591 in.)
0.7 m m
6.1 m m
17.8 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.240 in.)
(0.701 in.)
0.7 m m
6.1 m m
17.8 m m
(0.028 in.)
(0.240 in.)
(0.701 in.)
2.6 m m
19.6 m m
66.4 m m
(0.102 in.)
(0.772 in.)
(2.614 in.)
2.4 m m
12.8 m m
51.5 m m
(0.094 in.)
(0.504 in.)
(2.028 in.)
2.6 m m
19.6 m m
66.4 m m
(0.102 in.)
(0.772 in.)
(2.614 in.)
2.4 m m
12.8 m m
51.5 m m
(0.094 in.)
(0.504 in.)
(2.028 in.)
2.7 m m
15.0 m m
52.5 m m
(0.106 in.)
(0.591 in.)
(2.067 in.)
2.5 m m
21.6 m m
87.5 m m
(0.098 in.)
(0.850 in.)
(3.445 in.)
2.4 m m
12.6 m m
53.5 m m
(0.094 in.)
(0.496 in.)
(2.106 in.)
2.7 m m
19.6 m m
66.3 m m
(0.106 in.)
(0.772 in.)
(2.610 in.)
N o . of Coils
9.8
21.7
17.2
13.4
10.7
22.4
6.8
14.3
17.2
7.9
2.12
16.5
13.4
14.2
15.6
16.9
16.9
7.9
7.9
9.7
11.5
9.7
11.5
10.3
11.8
12.9
9.9
2-11
Item
A/1
differential
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
P i n i o n s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D.
18.010-18.028 m m
0 . 0 2 3 - 0 . 0 5 7 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
D r i v e s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D.
3 0 . 0 2 5 - 3 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 1 8 2 - 1 . 1 8 3 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance
0 . 0 4 5 - 0 . 0 8 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.)
0 . 0 8 0 - 0 . 1 1 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 5 in.)
S e r v i c e Limit
( 0 . 7 0 9 1 - 0 . 7 0 9 8 in.)
carrier
For n e w b e a r i n g
2 . 7 - 3 . 9 N-m
Adjust
( 2 8 - 4 0 k g f - c m , 2 4 - 3 5 ibf-in.)
(preload)
For used bearing
2 . 5 - 3 . 6 N-m
Adjust
( 2 5 - 3 7 k g f - c m , 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)
A/T differential
Backlash
pinion gear
I.D.
0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
18.042-18.066 m m
( 0 . 7 1 0 3 - 0 . 7 1 1 3 in.)
0.055 - 0 . 0 9 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 7 in.)
Steering
Measurement
Item
Steering wheel
R o t a t i o n a l p l a y m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e
edge
S t a r t i n g l o a d m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e
edge
Gearbox
Qualification
With engine
S t a n d a r d or N e w
S e r v i c e Limit
0 - 1 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 3 9 in.)
running
With engine
running
60 5
A n g l e o f rack g u i d e s c r e w l o o s e n e d
f r o m locked position
Pump
7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kpa
closed
( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm ,
1 , 1 1 0 - 1 , 2 1 0 psi)
Power steering
Capacity
Use Genuine
Honda Power
fluid
Steering Fluid
Power steering
U s e d belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in.)
p u m p belt
N e w belt: 8 . 5 - 1 1 . 0 m m ( 0 . 3 4 - 0 . 4 3 in.)
NOTE: Adjust a
T e n s i o n ( m e a s u r e d w i t h belt t e n s i o n
n e w belt t o t h e
gauge)
n e w belt s p e c ,
run the engine
for 5 minutes,
t h e n r e a d j u s t it
to the used belt
spec.
2-12
specs
Suspension
Measurement
Item
Wheel alignment
Front
Caster
Front
2 4 8 ' + 1
Total Toe
Front
0 + 2 m m ( 0 + 1 / 1 6 in.)
Rear
Rear
Front w h e e l t u r n i n g angle
Inside w h e e l
Outside w h e e l
Aluminum wheel
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Qualification
Camber
Runout
Steel w h e e l
Runout
Wheel bearings
End play
Service Limit
000'1
-030'+1
IN 2 2 ( 1 / 1 6 + 1 / 1 6 in.)
3 8 3 2 ' 2
3103' (Reference)
Axial
0 - 0.7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.)
Radial
0 - 0 . 7 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 3 in.)
Axial
0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.)
Radial
0 - 1 . 0 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 4 in.)
Front
0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Rear
0 - 0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
Brakes
Measurement
Item
Parking brake
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Qualification
S e r v i c e Limit
6 - 9 clicks
Distance travelled w h e n
p u l l e d w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbs) o f
lever
force
Brake p e d a l
Pedal h e i g h t (carpet r e m o v e d )
Free p l a y
1 ---5 m m ( 1 / 1 6 - 3 / 1 6 in.)
Master cylinder
Piston-to-pushrod clearance
0 - 0 . 4 m m ( 0 - 0 . 0 2 in.)
Brake disc
Thickness
Front
Rear
Runout
2 2 . 9 - 2 3 . 1 m m ( 0 . 9 0 - 0 . 9 1 in.)
8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 3 6 in.)
Front
0.10 m m (0.004 in )
Rear
Parallelism
Brake p a d s
F r o n t a n d rear
Thickness
Front
1 0 . 5 - 1 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 4 1 - 0 . 4 5 in.)
Rear
8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 5 - 0 . 3 5 8 in.)
Air Conditioning
Measurement
Item
Qualification
S t a n d a r d or N e w
Refrigerant
Type
HFC-134a(R-134a)
Capacity or system
Refrigerant oil
Type
Capacity of c o m p o n e n t s
-1
S e r v i c e Limit
Evaporator
Each l i n e a n d
hose
Receiver
Compressor
Compressor
(DENSO)
at68F(20C)
clearance
2-13
Design Specifications
Qualification
Measurement
Item
DIMENSIONS
Overall length
Specification
4-door
2-door
4-door
Overall w i d t h
Overall height
Wheelbase
Track
2-door
4-door
2-door
Front
Rear
G r o u n d clearance
Seating capacity
Five
4-door
4,235 lbs
(GVWR)
2-door
4,190 lbs
WEIGHT
4-door
1,920 kg
(CANADA)
(GVWR)
2-door
ENGINE
Type
W E I G H T (U.S.A.)
1,900 kg
W a t e r - c o o l e d , 4 - s t r o k e S O H C VTEC V 6 g a s o l i n e
engine
Cylinder arrangement
60 V 6 - c y l i n d e r , t r a n s v e r s e
Displacement
C o m p r e s s i o n ratio
9.4
Valve train
Lubrication system
Forced, w e t s u m p , w i t h trochoid p u m p
Oil p u m p d i s p l a c e m e n t
at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m
Water p u m p displacement
at 6,000 e n g i n e r p m
Fuel r e q u i r e d
U N L E A D E D g a s o l i n e w i t h 86 p u m p o c t a n e n u m b e r o r
Type
Gear reduction
higher
STARTER
AUTOMATIC
Normal output
1.6 k W
Nominal voltage
12 V
Hour rating
30 s e c o n d s
Direction of rotation
C l o c k w i s e as v i e w e d f r o m g e a r e n d
Type
Primary reduction
D i r e c t 1:1
reverse
TRANSMISSION
Gear ratio
Final r e d u c t i o n
2-14
1st
2.534
2nd
1.502
3rd
0.947
4th
0.608
Reverse
1.846
Type
S i n g l e helical g e a r
Gear ratio
4.200
specs
Item
STEERING
Qualification
Measurement
Overall ratio
15.77
T u r n s , lock-to-lock
3.05
380 m m (15.0 in.)
WHEEL
Type
Front
I n d e p e n d e n t d o u b l e w i s h b o n e , c o i l s p r i n g w i t h stabilizer
Rear
Five-link d o u b l e w i s h b o n e
Shock absorber
F r o n t a n d rear
Camber
Front
ALIGNMENT
BRAKES
Rear
-030'
Caster
Front
248'
Total toe
Front
0 m m (0 in.)
Rear
In 2 m m (1/16 in.)
T y p e of service brake
Front
P o w e r - a s s i s t e d s e l f - a d j u s t i n g v e n t i l a t e d disc
Rear
Front
59 c m x 2 (9.0 sq i n . x 2)
T y p e of parking brake
Pad f r i c t i o n s u r f a c e area
Rear
TIRES
Specification
P o w e r - a s s i s t e d rack a n d p i n i o n
Type
28 c m x 2 (4.3 sq i n . x 2 )
Size of f r o n t a n d rear t i r e s
P 2 0 5 / 6 5 R 1 5 92V
Size o f s p a r e t i r e s
T135/90D15 100M
AIR
Cooling capacity
CONDITIONING
Compressor
5,240 K c a l / h (20,800 B T U / h )
Type/Manufacturer
Swash plate/DENSO
N u m b e r of cylinders
10
Capacity
177.7 m f i / r e v . (10.84 c u i n / r e v . )
M a x i m u m speed
7,600 r p m
Lubricant capacity
Lubricant type
ND-OIL8
Condenser
Type
Corrugated fin
Evaporator
Type
Corrugated fin
Blower
Type
Sirocco fan
M o t o r input
230W/12 V
Speed control
M a x i m u m capacity
520 m / h (18,300 c u f t / h )
Temperature control
Compressor clutch
Air-mix type
Type
D r y , s i n g l e p l a t e , Poly-V b e l t d r i v e
Electrical p o w e r
40 W m a x i m u m at 12 V
c o n s u m p t i o n at 68F (20C)
Refrigerant
Type
H F C - 1 3 4 a ( R - 1 3 4 a)
Quantity
4 5 0 - 5 0 0 g (15.2 - 1 6 . 9 f l oz)
2-15
Design Specifications
Measurement
Item
ELECTRICAL
RATINGS
Specification
Qualification
Battery
12 V - 5 5 A H / 5 h o u r s
Starter
12 V - 1 . 6 k W
12 V - 1 0 0 A
Alternator
Fuses
100A, 5 0 A , 4 0 A , 3 0 A , 2 0 A , 15A
relay box
Under-dash passenger's
3 0 A , 2 0 A , 10A, 7.5A
fuse/relay box
Light bulbs
12 V - 6 0 W
12 V - 5 1 W
12 V - 2 4 W / 2 . 2 CP ( c a n d l e p o w e r ) ( t w o f i l a m e n t s )
marker lights
2-16
12 V -
Rear t u r n s i g n a l l i g h t s
12 V - 2 1 W
3CP
Brake/Taillights
12 V - 2 1 / 5 W
Taillight
12 V -
12 V - 2 1 W
Back-up lights
12 V - 2 1 W
12 V - 3 C P
Ceiling light
12 V - 8 W
Trunk lights
12 V - 5 W
3CP
12 V - 2 C P
12 V - 1 . 1 W
12 V - 3 . 4 W
Spotlights
12 V - 4 C P
Gauge lights
12 V - 1 . 2 6 W , 3.78 W
Indicator lights
12 V - L E D , 1 4 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.7 W , 1.4 W
14 V - 0 . 5 6 W , 0.84 W
8 V - 1 . 2 W , 14 V - 1 . 1 2 W , 1.4W
Body Specifications
4-door sedan
U n i t ; m m (in.)
specs
(cont'd)
2-17
Body Specifications
(cont'd)
2-door coupe
2-18
Unit: m m
(in.)
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids
3-2
3-4
3-6
3-10
3-12
For details of lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various w o r k
procedure (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
LUBRICATION POINTS
Engine
Transmission
Brake line (includes ABS line)
Power steering gearbox
Throttle cable end (Dashboard lower panel hole)
Throttle cable end (Throttle link)
Brake master cylinder pushrod
Pedal linkage
Battery terminals
Fuel fill lid
Hood hinges and hood latch
Trunk hinges and latch
Door hinges, upper and lower
Door opening detent
Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots
Brake line joints (Front and rear wheelhouse)
Power steering system
Air conditioning compressor
LUBRICANT
API Service Grade: Use SJ "Energy Conserving" grade
oil. The oil container may also display the API
Certification seal shown below. Make sure it says "For
Gasoline Engines/' SAE Viscosity: See chart below.
Honda A T F - Z 1 *
Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid*"
Steering grease P/N 08733-B070E
Silicone grease
Multi-purpose grease
1
Silicone grease
Rust preventives
Genuine Honda Power Steering F l u i d *
Compressor oil: DENSO: ND-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
For Refrigerant: HFC-134 a (R-134 a)
30
-20
-10
10
20
30
40 C
* 1 : Always use Honda ATF-Z1. Using a non-Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
* 2 : Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease
the life of the system.
* 3 : Always use Genuine Honda Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power steering fluid or automatic
transmission fluid can cause increased wear and poor steering in cold weather.
NOTE:
Lubricate all hinges, latches, and locks once a year.
In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
We recommend Honda White Lithium Grease.
3-2
3-3
D o i t e m s in A .
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m /
D o i t e m s in A,
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
37,500 mi/ 60,000 km/
D o i t e m s in A .
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s
Replace b r a k e f l u i d . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3 B r a k e F l u i d . Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
52,500 m i / 8 4 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A .
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A .
75,000 m i / 1 2 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 y e a r s
D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do items in A.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Replace b r a k e f l u i d . U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3. Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
D o i t e m s in A , B, a n d C.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A .
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s
I n s p e c t v a l v e c l e a r a n c e ( c o l d ) (see p a g e 6-13).
Intake: 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 9 in.), E x h a u s t : 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 2 m m (0.011 - 0 . 0 1 3 in.)
3-4
D o i t e m s in A .
D o t h e i t e m s in A , B, a n d C.
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, a n d C as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l listed.
A
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt.
L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k b e l t d e f l e c t i o n b y p u s h i n g o n it ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e p u l l e y s .
- P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10).
R e p l a c e t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace it t w i c e as o f t e n (at 15,000 m i l e i n t e r v a l ) if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y in u r b a n areas t h a t h a v e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s of s o o t in t h e
air f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s .
Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l o w f r o m t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is less t h a n n o r m a l .
1
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
Do i t e m s in A.
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 y e a r s :
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s :
D o i t e m s in A.
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / 2 1/2 y e a r s :
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
Replace b r a k e f l u i d (see p a g e 1 9 - 7 ) * .
U s e G e n u i n e H o n d a D O T 3.
Fill t o b e t w e e n m a r k s o n r e s e r v o i r .
Do i t e m s in A a n d B.
48,750 m i / 78,000 k m /
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
5 2 , 5 0 0 m i / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 y e a r s :
D o i t e m s in A .
56,250 m i / 90,000 k m /
^
D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
;
^
63,750 m i / 1 0 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A .
^
71,250 m i / 1 1 4 , 0 0 0 k m
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
R e p l a c e c o o l a n t (see p a g e 10-10). U s e H o n d a A l l S e a s o n A n t i f r e e z e / c o o l a n t T y p e 2.
C a p a c i t y : 5.6 fl (5.9 U S q t , 4.9 I m p q t )
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
78,750 m i / 1 2 6 , 0 0 0 " k m /
Do i t e m s in A.
^
86,250 m i / 1 3 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
Replace b r a k e f l u i d (see p a g e 1 9 - 7 ) * .
Use G e n u i n e H o n d a DOT 3 brake f l u i d ; fill t o b e t w e e n marks o n reservoir.
D o i t e m s i n A , B a n d C.
93,750 m i / 1 5 0 , 0 0 0 k m /
R e p l a c e oil a n d filter.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 1/2 y e a r s :
Do i t e m s in A.
101,250 m i / 1 6 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
D o i t e m s in A .
112,500 m i / 1 8 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 1/2 y e a r s :
R e p l a c e oil a n d filter.
116,250 m i / 1 8 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s :
* : Refer t o '98-01 A C C O R D S e r v i c e M a n u a l (P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 8 )
1
3-6
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, a n d C as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l .
A
C h e c k p a r k i n g b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 c l i c k s .
L u b r i c a t e d o o r locks a n d h i n g e s w i t h H o n d a w h i t e l i t h i u m g r e a s e .
I n s p e c t brake h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e a n d
leakage (see p a g e 1 9 - 3 0 ) * .
C h e c k f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , b r a k e f l u i d , a n d
windshield washer fluid.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Check f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n .
Check f o r p r o p e r f a n o p e r a t i o n .
I n s p e c t e x h a u s t s y s t e m . * Check c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r h e a t s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
I n s p e c t f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s . * Check f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e
d a m a g e d parts (see p a g e 11-73).
C h e c k all l i g h t s . Check f u n c t i o n o f all i n t e r i o r a n d e x t e r i o r l i g h t s , a n d t h e p o s i t i o n s o f t h e h e a d l i g h t s (see p a g e 2 2 - 9 8 ) * .
I n s p e c t t h e v e h i c l e u n d e r b o d y . Check t h e p a i n t f o r d a m a g e , s c r a t c h e s , s t o n e c h i p p i n g , a n d d e n t s .
1
R e p l a c e air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e b e l t . L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k t e n s i o n b y p u s h i n g o n e a c h belt ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e
pulleys:
P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10)
Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r , e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d
d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s ; also r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use H o n d a A T F - Z 1 (ATF).
1
3-
S e r v i c e at t h e i n d i c a t e d d i s t a n c e o r t i m e , w h i c h e v e r
c o m e s first.
m i l e s x 1000
k m x 1000
years
3.75
7.5
11.25
15
18.75
22.5
26.25
30
33.75
37.5
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
1/2
1 1/2
21/2
Replace e n g i n e oil
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles
(6,000 km) or 6 months
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change Severe Conditions: Every oil change
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
R e p l a c e air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Inspect valve clearance
A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .
N 0 T E 1
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s
o
o
Replace b r a k e f l u i d
N 0 T E 2
Inspect s u s p e n s i o n c o m p o n e n t s
Inspect driveshaft b o o t s
I n s p e c t b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S )
I n s p e c t all f l u i d l e v e l s a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m hoses and c o n n e c t i o n s
Inspect exhaust s y s t e m *
m
m
o
o
m
m
m
m
o
o
o
NOTE:
1. If t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in v e r y h o t o r c o l d w e a t h e r , o v e r 110F (43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( - 29C), replace t h i s belt e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s ;
If n o t , r e p l a c e it at 105,000 m i l e s .
2. Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has a h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y
a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l .
* A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s
w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s be d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m r e l i a b i l i t y .
3-8
41.25
45
48.75
52.5
56.25
60
63.75
67.5
71.25
75
78.75
82.5
86.25
90
93.75
97.5
101.25
105
108.75
112.5
116.25'
120
66
72
78
84
90
96
102
108
114
120
126
132
138
144
150
156
162
168
175
181
187
193
41/2
61/2
71/2
31/2
51/2
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 7,500 m i l e s (12,000 k m ) o r 12 m o n t h s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 3,750 m i l e s (6,000 k m ) o r 6 m o n t h s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y o t h e r oil c h a n g e
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y oil c h a n g e
A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .
m
o
o
o
o
o
m
o
o
m
m
o
o
o
o
m
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
o
o
o
o
o
m
m
m
m
3-9
Do i t e m s in A.
7,500 m i / 12,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
15,000 m i / 24,000 k m / 1 y e a r
D o i t e m s in A .
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A .
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d D.
45,000 m i / 7 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 3 y e a r s
Do items in A .
52,500 m i / 84,000 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A .
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
75,000 m i / 1 2 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 y e a r s
Do i t e m s in A .
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s in A , B, C, a n d D.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
Do items in A.
97.500 m i / 1 5 6 . 0 0 0 k m /
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s
C h e c k i d l e s p e e d . S h o u l d b e 6 8 0 50 r p m i n M o r [ E p o s i t i o n (see p a g e 11-68).
D o i t e m s i n A a n d B.
Do items in A .
112,500 m i / 1 8 1 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o t h e i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s
120,000
120,000
3-10
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, C, a n d D as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l l i s t e d .
A
R e p l a c e air cleaner e l e m e n t .
I n s p e c t a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt.
L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k belt d e f l e c t i o n b y p u s h i n g o n it ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e p u l l e y s .
- P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m ( 0 . 5 1 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10).
Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace it t w i c e as o f t e n (at 15,000 m i l e i n t e r v a l ) if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y in u r b a n areas t h a t h a v e h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f s o o t in t h e
air f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s .
Replace it w h e n e v e r a i r f l o w f r o m t h e c l i m a t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m is less t h a n n o r m a l .
1
3-11
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
f l Do i t e m s i n A a n d B.
Do i t e m s in A .
22,500 m i / 36,000 k m / 1 1/2 y e a r s :
D o i t e m s i n A , B, a n d C
30,000 m i / 48,000 k m / 2 y e a r s :
Do items in A.
37,500 m i / 60,000 k m / 2 1/2 y e a r s :
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
41,250 m i / 66,000 k m /
45,000 m i / 72,000 k m / 3 y e a r s :
Do i t e m s in A.
5 2 , 5 0 0 m i / 84,000 k m 3 1/2 y e a r s :
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
56,250 m i / 90,000 k m /
60,000 m i / 96,000 k m / 4 y e a r s :
Do items in A.
67,500 m i / 1 0 8 , 0 0 0 k m 4 1/2 y e a r s :
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
71,250 m i / 1 1 4 , 0 0 0 k m 75,000mi/120,000 km/5 years:
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
D o i t e m s in A a n d B.
R e p l a c e oil a n d filter.
78,750 m i / 1 2 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do items in A.
82,500 m i / 1 3 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 5 1/2 y e a r s
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
86,250 m i / 1 3 8 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s i n A , B, C. a n d D.
90,000 m i / 1 4 4 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s :
Do items in A.
97,500 m i / 1 5 6 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 1/2 y e a r s :
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
101,250 m i / 1 6 2 , 0 0 0 k m /
105,000 m i / 1 6 8 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 y e a r s :
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t w i t h l o w p r e s s u r e air.
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
108,750 m i / 1 7 4 , 0 0 0 k m /
Do i t e m s in A.
112,500 m i / 1 8 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 7 1/2 y e a r s :
R e p l a c e oil a n d f i l t e r .
116,250 m i / 1 8 6 , 0 0 0 k m /
D o i t e m s A , B, a n d C.
120,000 m i / 1 9 2 , 0 0 0 k m / 8 y e a r s :
120,000 m i / 2 0 0 , 0 0 0 k m / 6 y e a r s
3-12
D o t h e i t e m s in parts A , B, C, a n d D as r e q u i r e d f o r m i l e a g e / t i m e i n t e r v a l ,
A
Check p a r k i n g b r a k e a d j u s t m e n t . S h o u l d be f u l l y a p p l i e d w i t h i n 6 t o 9 clicks.
L u b r i c a t e d o o r locks a n d h i n g e s w i t h H o n d a w h i t e l i t h i u m g r e a s e .
Inspect b r a k e h o s e s a n d lines ( i n c l u d i n g A B S ) . Check t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r , p r o p o r t i o n i n g c o n t r o l v a l v e , a n d A B S m o d u l a t o r f o r d a m a g e a n d
leakage (see p a g e 1 9 - 3 0 ) * .
Check f l u i d levels a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s ; c h e c k f o r leaks. If n e c e s s a r y , a d d A T F (see p a g e 14-112), e n g i n e c o o l a n t , brake f l u i d , a n d
windshield washer fluid.
Inspect c o o l i n g s y s t e m h o s e s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .
Check f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n .
Check f o r p r o p e r f a n o p e r a t i o n .
Inspect e x h a u s t s y s t e m . * C h e c k c a t a l y t i c c o n v e r t e r heat s h i e l d , e x h a u s t p i p e , a n d m u f f l e r f o r d a m a g e , leaks, a n d t i g h t n e s s (see p a g e 9-4).
Inspect f u e l lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s . * C h e c k f o r l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s , cracks a n d d e t e r i o r a t i o n ; r e t i g h t e n l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s a n d r e p l a c e
d a m a g e d p a r t s (see p a g e 11-73).
Check all l i g h t s . C h e c k f u n c t i o n o f all i n t e r i o r a n d e x t e r i o r l i g h t s , a n d t h e p o s i t i o n s o f t h e h e a d l i g h t s (see p a g e 2 2 - 9 8 ) * .
Inspect t h e v e h i c l e u n d e r b o d y . C h e c k t h e p a i n t f o r d a m a g e , s c r a t c h e s , s t o n e c h i p p i n g , a n d d e n t s .
1
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t .
Inspect a n d a d j u s t d r i v e belt. L o o k f o r cracks a n d d a m a g e , t h e n c h e c k t e n s i o n b y p u s h i n g o n e a c h belt ( a b o u t 22 lbs) m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e
pulleys:
P/S p u m p belt: 1 3 . 0 - 1 6 . 5 m m (0.51 - 0 . 6 5 in) (see p a g e 17-10)
Replace air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r , e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air has h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y a n d
d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e s ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l (see p a g e 2 1 - 2 6 ) * .
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d . Use G e n u i n e H o n d a A T F .
1
3-13
m i l e s x 1000
k m x 1000
years
Replace e n g i n e oil
Replace e n g i n e o i l f i l t e r
C l e a n air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Replace air c l e a n e r e l e m e n t
Inspect valve clearance
Replace s p a r k p l u g s
Replace t i m i n q b e l t ,
and inspect water p u m p
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Insoect idle s p e e d *
Replace e n g i n e c o o l a n t
For engine coolant: Normal and Severe Conditions: Every 120,000 miles
(192,000 km) or 10 years, thereafter every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years.
3.75
6
_
7.5
11.25
15
18.75
22.5
26.25
12
18
24
30
36
42
_
1/2
1
1 1/2
Normal Conditions: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
Severe Conditions: Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6
Normal Conditions: Every other oil change
Severe Conditions: Every oil change
o
A d j ust o n l y if n o i s y .
N 0 T E 1
30
33.75
54
48
2
12 months
months
37.5
60
2 1/2
Replace t r a n s m i s s i o n f l u i d
I n s p e c t f r o n t a n d rear b r a k e s
Replace brake f l u i d
Check parkinq brake a d j u s t m e n t
R e p l a c e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r
Lubricate locks a n d h i n g e s
R o t a t e t i r e s (Check t i r e i n f l a t i o n a n d c o n d i t i o n at least o n c e a m o n t h )
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering g e a r b o x , a n d boots
Inspect suspension c o m p o n e n t s
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses a n d lines (including A B S )
I n s p e c t all f l u i d l e v e l s a n d c o n d i t i o n o f f l u i d s
Inspect c o o l i n q s y s t e m hoses a n d c o n n e c t i o n s
Inspect exhaust s y s t e m *
Inspect fuel lines a n d c o n n e c t i o n s *
Check liqhts and controls
Inspect vehicle under b o d y
N 0 T E 2
O
o
o
m
m
E v e r y 3 y e a r s ( i n d e p e n d e n t of d i s t a n c e !
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
NOTE:
1. If t h e v e h i c l e is r e g u l a r l y d r i v e n in v e r y h o t o r c o l d w e a t h e r , o v e r 110F (43C) o r u n d e r - 2 0 F ( ~ 2 9 C ) , r e p l a c e t h i s b e l t e v e r y 60,000 m i l e s ;
If n o t , r e p l a c e it at 105,000 m i l e s .
2. Replace t h e air c o n d i t i o n i n g f i l t e r e v e r y 15,000 m i l e s if t h e v e h i c l e is d r i v e n m o s t l y w h e r e air h a s a h i g h c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f s o o t f r o m i n d u s t r y
a n d d i e s e l - p o w e r e d v e h i c l e ; a l s o r e p l a c e it a n y t i m e a i r f l o w is less t h a n u s u a l .
* A c c o r d i n g t o state a n d f e d e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s , f a i l u r e t o d o t h e m a i n t e n a n c e i t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n asterisk (*) w i l l n o t v o i d c u s t o m e r ' s e m i s s i o n s
w a r r a n t i e s . H o w e v e r , H o n d a r e c o m m e n d s t h a t all m a i n t e n a n c e s e r v i c e s b e d o n e at t h e r e c o m m e n d e d i n t e r v a l t o e n s u r e l o n g - t e r m r e l i a b i l i t y .
3-14
52.5
56.25
60
63.75
67.5
71.25
45
48.75
75
78.75
72
78
90
96
102
108
84
114
120
126
3
31/2
4
41/2
5
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 7,500 m i l e s (12,000 k m ) o r 12 m o n t h s
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y 3,750 m i l e s (6,000 k m ) or 6 m o n t h s
N o r m a l C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y o t h e r oil c h a n g e
S e v e r e C o n d i t i o n s : E v e r y oil c h a n g e
41.25
66
82.5
86.25
132 ~ 138
51/2
90
144
6
93.75
150
97.5
156
61/2
o
A d j u s t o n l y if n o i s y .
101.25
162
105
168
7
108.75
175
112.5
181
71/2
m
m
IOi
o
o
o
o
o
o
IO!
o
o
o
o
o
o
I O
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
120
193
8
::
187
116.25
L o
o
o
c
0
o
Q
0
0
o
o
o
3-15
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special T o o l s
4-2
Starting System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
Starter S o l e n o i d T e s t
Starter Performance T e s t
Starter Replacement
Starter Overhaul
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
Ignition System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Ignition Timing Inspection
Distributor Replacement
Distributor D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
ICM (Ignition Control Module) Input T e s t
Ignition Coil T e s t
Ignition Wire Inspection and Test
Ignition Coil Troubleshooting
Spark Plug Inspection/Replacement
4-14
4-16
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-24
Charging System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting
Alternator-Compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement
Alternator R e p l a c e m e n t
.
A u t o - T e n s i o n e r Inspection
Alternator Overhaul
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-31
4-31
4-33
4-35
Cruise Control
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Cruise Control C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
Control Unit Input T e s t
Main S w i t c h T e s t / R e p l a c e m e n t
Set/Resume/Cancel Switch Test/Replacement
Brake Pedal Position S w i t c h T e s t
Actuator S o l e n o i d T e s t
Actuator T e s t
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement
Actuator Cable Adjustment
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-45
4-46
4-48
4-49
4-50
4-50
4-51
4-52
4-54
4-55
4-56
4-57
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No.
Tool Number
A973X-041-XXXXX
07746-0010400
07749-0010000
4-2
Description
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m
Driver
Qty
1
1
1
(D
Starting System
Component Location Index
BATTERY
STARTER
S t a r t e r C i r c u i t T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 4-5
S o l e n o i d T e s t p a g e 4-6
P e r f o r m a n c e T e s t , p a g e 4-7
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 4-8
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-9
4^3
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION S W I T C H
BATTERY
No.41
BLK
(100A)
No.42 (50A)
^BAT"
WHT
ST,
BLK/WHT
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
No.13(7.5A)
BLK/RED
BLU/ORN
BLU/WHT
PCM
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY
SWITCH
/Closed:
\
I B and E l position/
BLK/WHT
BLK
JCL
G101
4-4
ENGINE
crank the
engine?
Y E S T h e starting system is O K . B
Recommended Procedure:
Use a starter system tester.
Connect and operate the equipment in accordance
w i t h the manufacturer's instructions.
Alternate Procedure
N O - G o to step 5.
5. Make sure the transmission is in neutral, then
disconnect the BLK/WHT w i r e (A) f r o m the starter
solenoid (B). Connect a jumper w i r e f r o m the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid terminal.
/I
A
v
o
engine?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
NO Remove the starter and diagnose its internal
problems.
2. Remove the No. 46 (15 A) fuse f r o m the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
3. With the shift lever in HQ or E, turn the ignition
switch to start (III).
Did the starter
normally?
(cont'd)
4-5
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
above
100 rpm?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
and
Y E S - G o to step 9.
NO Remove and disassemble the starter, and
check for the f o l l o w i n g until y o u find the cause.
Open circuit in starter armature c o m m u t a t o r
segments
Starter armature dragging
Shorted armature w i n d i n g
Excessive drag in engine
9. Remove the starter and inspect its drive gear and
the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
4-6
ENGINE
12 V
BATTERY
EL
12 V
BATTERY
4-7
Starting System
Starter Replacement
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
4-8
Starter Overhaul
Disassembly/Reassembly
END COVER
GEAR HOUSING
COVER
(cont'd)
4-9
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-8).
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
Armature Inspection and Test
4-10
Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B),
undercut the mica w i t h a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
the commutator segments. The undercut should
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
Commutator Mica Depth
Standard (New): 0 . 4 0 . 5 mm {0.016
Service Limit:
0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
ENGINE
0.020 in.)
(cont'd)
4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Starter Brush Inspection
Brush Length
Standard (New): 1 5 . 8 1 6 . 2 mm (0.62
Service Limit:
11.0 mm (0.43 in.)
0.64 in.)
13. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring
the brush into contact w i t h the commutator, then
attach a spring scale (B) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the m o m e n t the spring lifts off
the brush.
Spring Tension:
1 5 . 7 - 1 7 . 7 N ( 1 . 6 - 1 . 8 kgf, 3 . 5 3 3 . 9 7 ibf)
4-12
4-13
Ignition System
Component Location Index
'98-99 models:
IGNITION W I R E S
I n s p e c t i o n a n d T e s t p a g e 4-22
DISTRIBUTOR
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 4-19
O v e r h a u l , p a g e 4-20
Ignition C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( I C M ) Input T e s t , p a g e 4-21
Ignition T i m i n g I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 4-18
4-14
"00-01 models:
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
'98-99 models:
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
No. 41 (100 A)
IGNITION S W I T C H
No. 42 (50 A)
"
BLK/YEL
) No. 6
(15 A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION C O I L
BLU
Is
DISTRIBUTOR
BLK/YEL
YEL/GRN
I,
IGNITION C O N T R O L
M O D U L E (ICM)
[Has built-in
\
I noise condenser J
IGNITION W I R E S
4-16
I,
ENGINE
'00-01 models:
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42(50A)
BAT
K>
0 -
Of
IG1
BLK/YEL
DRIVER'S
No. 11
(15A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLK/YEL
BRN/WHT
BLK/RED
BRN
WHT/BLU
BLU/RED
I.
I.
I.
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
II
YEL/GRN
ICM
ICM
ICM
IGNITION
COILS
! 2
No.6
BLK
SPARK
PLUGS
SL
G101
ICM : Ignition Control Module
4-17
Ignition System
Ignition Tinning Inspection
1. Check the idle speed, and adjust it if necessary (see
page 11-86).
2. Connect the Honda PGM tester to the Data Link
Connector (DLC), and f o l l o w the tester's prompts in
the " S C S " menu (see the Honda PGM Tester
Operator's Manual).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h
no load, shift lever in M or GB, until the radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle.
4-18
No.
No. 1
B
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
Installation
1. Bring the No. 1 piston to compression stroke TDC.
2. Coat a new O-ring (D) w i t h engine oil, then install it.
3. Slip the distributor into position.
NOTE: The lug on the end of the distributor and its
mating grooves in the camshaft end (E) are both
offset to eliminate the possibility of installing the
distributor 180 out of time.
4. Tighten the mounting bolts (B).
4-19
ignition System
Distributor Disassembly/Reassembly - '98-99 modeis
4-20
; - 98-99 models
NOTE:
If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index; refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual.
Perform an input test for the ignition control module
(ICM) after finishing the fundamental tests for the
ignition system and the fuel and emissions systems.
W i r e side of
female terminals
4-21
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Test - '98-99 models
corroded, or bent
terminals.
4-22
IGP L S 3 ( W H T / B L U )
IGP L S I ( Y E L / G R N )
IGP L S 5
(BLK/RED)
23
Is there battery
IGP L S 6
(BRN/
WHT)
1G
(BLK/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
voltage?
30
2627
IGP L S 4
(BRN)
Is there
IGP LS2
(BLU/
RED)
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO - G o t o step 8.
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between ignition coil
and No. 1 1 (15A) fuse in the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay b o x . B
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
IGNITION C O I L 3P C O N N E C T O R
IGP
IGP
IGP
IGP
, IGP
IGP
GND
(BLK)
LSI
LS2
LS3
LS4
LS5
LS6
(YEL/GRN)
(BLU/RED)
(WHT/BLU)
(BRN)
(BLK/RED)
(BRN/WHT)
W i r e side of
female terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
continuity?
YES
Y E S - Go to step 6.
NO - Repair open in the wire between ignition coil
and body ground (G10D.B
4-23
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the electrodes and ceramic insulator.
Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
Advanced ignition t i m i n g
Loose spark plug
Plug heat range too hot
Insufficient cooling
0.043 in.)
Damaged
gasket
Cracked
insulator
Improper gap
Oil-fouling
> Carbon deposits
Cracked center
electrode insulator
4-24
Charging System
Component Location Index
CHARGING S Y S T E M INDICATOR
(In t h e g a u g e a s s e m b l y )
T e s t , page 22-29
[ H a s built-in E L E C T R I C A L L O A D
[ D E T E C T O R (ELD) UNIT
4-25
Charging System
Circuit Diagram
U N D E R - H O O D FUSE/RELAY B O X
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PCM
WHT/RED
'00-01 models
4-26
ENGINE
Wire side of
female terminals
L (WHT/BLU)
tightened?
Y E S - G o to step 2.
Does the charging
system
indicator
come on?
NOTighten or reconnect.
Y E S - G o to step 10.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Does the charging
system
indicator
come on?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
N O - G o to step 7.
3. Start the engine.
Does the charging
system
indicator
go
off?
ALTERNATOR
4P C O N N E C T O R
Go to step 4.
IG
(BLK/YEL)
Wire side of
female terminals
system
indicator
come on?
Is there battery
voltage?
N O - G o to step 10.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
4-27
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Test'98-99
models
1. Be sure the battery is sufficiently charged (see page
22-30).
FULL FIELD T E S T E R
LEAD (BLU)
^
. V O L T M E T E R
NEGATIVE
L E A D (BLK)
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
L E A D (RED)
FIELD
SELECTOR
NEGATIVE TESTER
C A B L E (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
C A B L E (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
B TERMINAL WIRE
NO
16.0 V?
4-28
75 A or
more?
Y E S T h e charging system is O K . B
N O - Replace the alternator
VOLT
SELECTOR
YES
NO - G o to step 10.
LOAD ADJUSTER
( C A R B O N PILE)
F U L L FIELD TESTER
LEAD (BLU)
t
^-VOLTMETER
NEGATIVE
L E A D (BLK)
VOLTMETER
POSITIVE
L E A D (RED)
VOLT
SELECTOR
Is the amperage
TEST SELECTOR
SWITCH
NEGATIVE TESTER
CABLE (BLK)
POSITIVE TESTER
C A B L E (RED)
INDUCTIVE
PICK-UP (GRN)
INDUCTIVE PICK-UP
75 A or
more?
FIELD
SELECTOR
B TERMINAL
WIRE
Go to step 11.
REGULATOR
(Located inside
the end cover)
NO - G o t o step 5.
5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
idle.
END
COVER
Is the alternator
F U L L FIELD
ACCESS HOLE
(cont'd)
4-29
Charging System
Charging Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Alternator Control System Test
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
12 13 14
23
25
26 27 28
10
16 17 18 19 20 21
29 30
/
/
BATTERY
Is there
continuity?
W i r e side of
female terminals
ALTERNATOR
4P C O N N E C T O R
Is there 1 V or
less?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
N O - G o to step 5.
ALTC (WHT/GRN)
C (WHT/GRN)
12 13 14
23
25
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
29 30
10
/
/
rf
3
Is there
continuity?
4-30
4J
ALTERNATOR
4P C O N N E C T O R
Alternator-compressor Belt
Inspection and Replacement
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damaged. If the belt
is cracked or damaged, replace it.
2. Check that the pointer (A) on the auto-tensioner
housing is not beyond the edge of the indicator rib
(B) on the tensioner base.
ENGINE
Alternator Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
disconnect the positive cable.
3. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension f r o m
the alternator belt (B), and remove the alternator
belt.
(cont'd)
4-31
Charging System
Alternator Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the condenser fan motor connector (A)
f r o m the condenser fan shroud.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
7.2 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
'98-99 m o d e l s
6 x 1.0 m m
7.8 N m (0.8 k g f - m , 5.8 I b f f t )
'00-01 m o d e l s
8 x 1.25 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
4-32
ENGINE
Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement
1. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's
pointer (A), start the engine, then check the position
of the pointer again. If the position changes, go to
step 5.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f . m , 8.7 Ibf ft)
(conf d)
4-33
Charging System
Auto-tensioner Inspection/Replacement (cont'd)
6. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using 2 bolts (6
m m diameter) (B) and vise (C) in a vise as s h o w n .
Do not clamp the auto-tensioner itself.
4-34
SPACER RING
END COVER
DUST SEAL
(cont'd)
4-35
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)
Special Tools Required
Driver 07749-0010000
Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
4-36
(cont'd)
4-37
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - "00-01 models (cont'd)
11. (If you are not replacing the f r o n t bearing and/or
rear bearing, go to step 18). Remove the rotor f r o m
the stator drive end housing.
12. Inspect the rotor shaft for galling, and inspect the
bearing journal surface in the stator housing for
seizure marks.
4-38
Rectifier Test
18. Check for continuity in each direction, between the
B terminal (A) and P terminals (B), and between the
E terminal (C) and P terminals (B) of each diode pair.
All diodes should have continuity in only one
direction. Because the rectifier diodes are designed
to allow current to pass in one direction, and the
rectifier is made up of 8 diodes (4 pairs), you must
test each diode in both directions for continuity
w i t h an ohmmeter that has diode checking
capability: a total of 16 checks.
If any diode failed, replace the rectifier assembly.
(Diodes are not available separately.)
If all the diodes are OK, go to step 19.
07749-0010000
B'i
07746-0010400
Ak
Ak
Ak
Bi
J
J
k
Ai
Ak
(cont'd)
4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul - '00-01 models (cont'd)
Alternator Brush Inspection
Stator Test
4-40
Cruise Control
Component Location Index
ACTUATOR
T e s t , p a g e 4-51
S o l e n o i d T e s t , p a g e 4-50
ACTUATOR CABLE
A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 4-54
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
T e s t , p a g e 14-140
4-41
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
: 01 model
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42 (50A)
G202
4-42
G101
G501
4.
5.
1.
2.
Diagnostic procedure
Check main switch (see page 4-48)
Check SET/RESUME/CANCEL switch (see page 4-49)
Check brake pedal position switch and mounting (see
page 4-50)
Check transmission range switch (see page 14-140)
Check control unit (see page 4-46)
Check d i m m i n g circuit in gauge (see page 22-33)
Check control unit (see page 4-46)
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
Check
Check
Check
Check
1.
2.
1.
1.
2.
3.
2.
(cont'd)
4-43
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Symptom
Set speed does not cancelled
w h e n main switch is pushed
OFF
Set speed does not cancelled
w h e n CANCEL button is
pushed
Set speed will not resume
w h e n RESUME button is
pushed (with main switch o n ,
set speed is temporarily
cancelled).
The transmission shifts d o w n
slower than normal w h e n
going up a hill w i t h the cruise
control on.
4-44
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
2.
1.
Diagnostic procedure
Check main switch (see page 4-48)
Check control unit (see page 4-46)
ENGINE
control
C R U I S E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R
operate?
10
/
11
12
13
14
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
BLU/GRN
Is there approx.
5. Check for continuity between the PCM connector
terminal A5 and body g r o u n d .
BLU/GRN
/
12
13
14
15
25
26
/
27
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
Y E S - G o to step 9.
NO Replace the cruise control u n i t . B
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
"
1 V?
21
10
23
24
32
BLU/GRN
/
12
W i r e side of female terminals
Is there
13
14
15
25
26
21
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
21
10
23
/
24
32
continuity?
Is there approx.
NO
1 V?
Go to step 8.
4-45
Cruise Control
Control Unit Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS c o m p o n e n t locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-25).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover.
2. Disconnect the 14P connector f r o m the control unit.
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, go to step 4.
4-46
Test condition
Under all
conditions
Cavity
9
Wire
BRN/WHT
BRN
Under all
conditions
11
BRN/BLK
Under all
conditions
Cavity
2
Wire
GRY
Test condition
Ignition switch ON
(II), main switch ON
and brake pedal
depressed, then
released
BLK
WHT/BLK
LT GRN/
RED
LTGRN/
BLK
10
BLU/BLK
Ignition switch ON
(II)
Attach to ground:
Cruise indicator light in the
gauge assembly should
comes on.
12
BLU/WHT
13
LTGRN
Ignition switch ON
(II) and main switch
ON; raise the front of
the vehicle, and
rotate 1 wheel slowly
while holding the
other wheel
Ignition switch ON
(II) and main switch
ON
14
LT BLU
BLU/GRN
Brake pedal
depressed, then
released
Resume button
pushed
5. If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system. If all the input tests prove OK,
the control unit must be faulty; replace it.
4-47
Cruise Control
Main Switch Test/Replacement
'01 model:
'98-00 models:
1. Carefully pry the switch (A) out of the instrument
panel.
Terminal
4
Terminal
1
OFF
o -
ON
o--- o
Position
4-48
o--@a
--
Position
\
OFF
ON
o-
o
o
o -
o
o
R E S U M E (ON)
o
o
C A N C E L (ON)
o
o
-o
o
4-49
Cruise Control
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the switch (A).
:
/
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
Terminal
\
1
Brake Switch
DEPRESSED
RELEASED
Terminal
4
Resistance ( Q )
\
O
I
J
i
VENT SOLENOID
4060 Q
r>
KJ
r~)
VACUUM SOLENOID
3050 Q
SAFETY SOLENOID
40-60 Q
KJ
4-50
Actuator Test
Special Tools Required
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 - 3 0 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
A973X-041-XXXXX
4-51
Cruise Control
Actuator/Solenoid/Cable Replacement
Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) f r o m the actuator.
4-52
SOLENOID VALVES
4-53
Cruise Control
Actuator Cable Adjustment
1. Check that the actuator cable (A) moves s m o o t h l y
w i t h no binding or sticking.
4-54
No.42 (50A)
or>oo
WHT
UNDER-DASH
DRIVER'S
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
GRN/WHT
BLK
G101
4-56
Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required
Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
A973X-041-XXXXX
NOTE: Check the v a c u u m hoses and lines for damage
and proper connections before troubleshooting.
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively
w h e n idling.
4. Shift to M or E position.
5. Disconnect the 2P connector f r o m the engine
m o u n t control solenoid valve.
6. Measure voltage between the No. 2 terminal and
body g r o u n d .
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
W i r e side of
female terminals
Y E S - G o to step 2.
NOAdjust the idle speed (see page 11-86).
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. W i t h the transmission in gear, have an assistant
disconnect and reconnect the 2P connector f r o m
the engine mount control solenoid valve.
Is there a noticeable change in idle
smoothness
when the 2P connector is
disconnected?
Y E S Reconnect the 2P connector to the solenoid
valve. The engine m o u n t control system is OK.
NO-
Go to step 4.
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO Repair open in BLK/YEL wire between the 2P
connector and No. 6 (15A) fuse in the under-dash
driver's fuse/relay box.
7. Measure voltage between the No. 1 and No. 2
terminals.
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
ire s i d e o f
nale terminals
BLK/YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
N O - R e p a i r open in GRN/WHT wire between PCM
(A2) and the 2P connector. If the wire is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck, refer
to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 11-3).
(cont'd)
4-57
smoothness
Y E S - G o to step 12.
N O - Isolate and replace the leaking engine
mount.
Wire side of
female terminals
BLK/YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
vacuum?
vacuum?
Y E S - G o to step 1 1 .
NO - Either the v a c u u m hose or one of the engine
mounts has a v a c u u m leak. Repair as needed.
4-58
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Engine Installation
5-2
5-11
Cylinder Head
6-1
Engine Block
7-1
Engine Lubrication
8-1
9-1
Engine Cooling
10-1
NOTE: Referto the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for items not shown in this section.
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Special Tool Required
Belt Tension Release A r m , YA 9317, commercially
available
NOTE:
Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
To avoid damage, unplug the w i r i n g connectors
carefully while holding the connector portion.
Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
1. Remove the support struts f r o m the hood, then fix
the hood in a vertical position.
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
C
'00-01 models:
(cont'd)
5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
14. Remove the engine wire harness clamps.
16. Remove the flange bolt (D), then remove the underhood fuse/relay box.
17. Remove the harness clamps (E).
5-4
(cont'd)
5-5
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
28. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-10).
29. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
Reinstall the drain plug using a new washer (see
page 14-112).
35. Remove the bolts (A) securing the shift cable holder
(B), then remove the shift cable cover (C). To
prevent damage to the control lever joint, be sure
to remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder
before removing the bolts securing the shift cable
cover.
30. Drain the engine oil. Reinstall the drain bolt using a
new washer (see page 8-5).
3 1 . Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (H02S)
connector (A), then remove exhaust pipe A (B).
36. Remove the lock bolt (D) securing the control lever
(E), then remove the shift cable (F) w i t h the control
lever. Take care not to bend the shift cable while
removing it.
37. Unplug the P/S hose clamps (A), and disconnect the
engine mount control vacuum hose (B).
32. Remove the damper fork, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 18-17).
33. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints;
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page
18-17).
34. Remove the driveshafts; refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 16-3). Coat ail precisionfinished surfaces w i t h clean engine oil. Tie plastic
bags over the driveshaft ends.
5-6
(cont'd)
5-7
Engine Assembly
5-8
(cont'd)
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
49. Remove the rear mount.
5-10
Engine Installation
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts and nuts to the specified torques.
P/S PUMP
8x
1.25
22
N-m
mm
(2.2 kgf-m, 16
Ibfft)
16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-11
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Position the engine under the vehicle. Attach t h e
chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine into
position in the vehicle.
mJOTICE
Reinstall the m o u n t i n g bolts/nuts in the
sequence given. Failure to f o l l o w this
sequence may cause excessive noise and
vibration, and reduce bushing life.
3. Install the transmission lower rear mount.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
u
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m {3.9 k g f - m ,
28 Ibfft)
1 4 x 1.5 m m
103 N m (10.5 k g f - m ,
76 Ibfft)
Replace.
5-12
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m ,
40 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-13
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
14. Raise the hoist to full height.
15. Install a new spring clip on the end of each
driveshaft, then install the driveshafts. Make sure
each clip " c l i c k s " into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
20. Install the lock bolt (B) w i t h a new lock washer (C),
then bend the lock tab of the lock washer.
2 1 . Install the shift cable cover (D), then install the shift
cable holder (E) on the shift cable cover.
22. Install the P/S hose into the clamps (A), and
connect the engine mount control vacuum hose (B).
C
10 x 1.25 m m
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
5-14
(cont'd)
5-15
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
27. Install the front tires/wheels.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m
8.7 I b f f t )
5-16
39. Install the fuel hose (A) and fuel return hose (B)
using new washers (C).
'98-99 models;
38. Install the brake booster vacuum hose (A) and the
cruise control vacuum hose (B).
22 N m (2.2 kgf-m,
16 Ibfft)
'00-01 models:
22 N m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
5-17
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
41. Install the cruise control cable, then adjust the
cable (see page 4-54).
45. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
vacuum hose (B) and breather pipe (C).
42. Install the throttle cable, then adjust the cable (see
page 11-98).
43. Install the battery base bracket (A), battery base (B),
then install the ground cable (C) and harness clamp
(D).
8x1.25
mm
5-18
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special T o o l s
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
D T C Troubleshooting
V T E C S o l e n o i d Valve T e s t
V T E C Rocker A r m s T e s t
Valve C l e a r a n c e Adjustment
Crankshaft Pulley R e m o v a l and
Installation
T i m i n g Belt Inspection
T i m i n g Belt R e m o v a l
T i m i n g Belt Installation
Cylinder Head R e m o v a l
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y Removal
Rocker A r m s and Shafts D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
Rocker A r m s and Shafts Inspection
V T E C Lost Motion A s s e m b l i e s
Inspection
C a m s h a f t Inspection
V a l v e s , S p r i n g s , and Valve S e a l s
Removal
V a l v e Inspection
Valve Stem-to-Guide C l e a r a n c e
Inspection
V a l v e Guide R e p l a c e m e n t
V a l v e Seat Reconditioning
V a l v e s , S p r i n g s , and Valve S e a l s
Installation
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft
S e a l , and Pulley Installation
Cylinder Head Installation
T D C S e n s o r Replacement
CKP Sensor Replacement
6-2
6-3
- 6-6
6-9
6-10
6-13
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-22
6-31
6-36
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-43
6-44
- 6-44
6-45
6-47
6-49
6-50
6-51
6-55
6-56
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No.
-i
-2
-3
Description
Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm
Socket, 19 mm
Holder Handle
Pulley Holder Attachment, 50 mm Offset
Pressure Gauge Adapter
VTEC Air Adapter
V T E C Air Stopper
A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 mm
Valve Spring Compressor Attachment
Tool Number
07HAH-PJ7010B
07JAA-001020A
07JAB-001020A
07MAB-PY30100
07NAJ-P07010A
07VAJ-P8A010A
07VAJ-P8A020A
07406-0070300
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07742-0010100
07757-PJ1010A
6-2
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-1,-2,-3
IDLER P U L L E Y
(cont'd)
6-3
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
HEAD C O V E R G A S K E T
OIL C O N T R O L ORIFICE
6-4
CAMSHAFT
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-40
VALVE KEEPERS
VALVE KEEPERS
SPRING RETAINER
SPRING RETAINER
EXHAUST VALVE SPRING
INTAKE V A L V E SPRING
INTAKE V A L V E S E A L
Installation, p a g e 6-49
INTAKE V A L V E
GUIDE
Inspection,
page 6-44
Replacement,
p a g e 6-45
CYLINDER HEAD
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-31
W a r p a g e , p a g e 6-36
Valve seat r e c o n d i t i o n i n g ,
p a g e 6-47
I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-51
INJECTOR BASE
OIL S E A L
EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE V A L V E
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-43
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-44
I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-49
6-5
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P1259: A problem in the V T E C Oil
P r e s s u r e S w i t c h circuit or V T E C S o l e n o i d
V a l v e circuit
T e r m i n a l side of male
terminals
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
NO Replace the VTEC oil pressure switch.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is DTC P1259
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO Intermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
VTEC solenoid valve and PCM.H
Is there approx.
12 V?
Y E S - G o to step 10.
NO Inspect for an open or short to ground in the
wire between the VTEC oil pressure switch and the
PCM (C10). If the wire is OK, substitute a knowngood PCM and recheck.B
6-6
V T E C OIL P R E S S U R E S W I T C H H A R N E S S
2P C O N N E C T O R
07NAJ-P07010A
07406-0070300
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 11.
VALVE
7 psi)?
Y E S - G o to step 19.
NO Inspect the VTEC solenoid valve (see page 69).B
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
20. Disconnect the VTEC solenoid valve 1P connector.
Terminal side of
male terminal
Is there 14-30
Q?
Y E S - G o to step 14.
Is pressure
Y E S - G o to step 23.
57
psi)?
6-7
Cylinder Head
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
23. W i t h the battery positive terminal still connected to
the VTEC solenoid valve, measure voltage between
C 1 0 and body g r o u n d .
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
VTM (BLU/BLK)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
' 1 6 17 18 19 20 21
12
25
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
Wire side of female
terminal
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there
Is there battery
Y E S - G o to step 24.
N O - R e p l a c e the VTEC oil pressure s w i t c h .
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
25. Disconnect the battery positive terminal f r o m the
VTEC solenoid valve terminal.
26. Check for continuity between the VTEC solenoid
valve harness 1P connector terminal and the PCM
connector terminal B 1 2 .
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE HARNESS
1P C O N N E C T O R
VTS (GRN/YEL)
1 2
4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
/ 20
21 22
23 24 25
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 27.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM
(B12) and VTEC solenoid valve connector
6-8
continuity?
rpm?
30 Q
CySinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required
VTEC Air Adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A
VTEC Air Stopper 07VAJ-P8A020A
6-10
10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC (see step 10 on page 614).
11. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (B) and
secondary rocker arm (C).
If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the m i d , primary, and secondary intake
rocker arms as an assembly, and check that the
pistons in the m i d and primary rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary, mid and secondary rocker
arms as an assembly, and retest.
If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 12.
B
(cont'd)
6-11
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker A r m Test (cont'd)
12. Repeat step 11 on the remaining intake mid rocker
arms w i t h each piston atTDC. W h e n all the m i d
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 13.
13. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa (7.0
kgf/cm , 100 psi).
2
18. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A)
and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are
mechanically connected by the piston and that the
m i d rocker arm (C) does not move w h e n pushed
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
independently of the primary and secondary rocker
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
A
07VAJ-P8A020A
07VAJ-P8A010A
6-12
(cont'd)
6-13
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
5. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A),
vacuum hoses (B) and positive crankcase
ventilation (PCV) hose (C).
A
6. Remove the vacuum hose (A) ('98-99 models),
breather hose (B) and water bypass hoses (C).
10. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. Align the pointer (A) on
the back cover with the No. 1 piston TDC mark (B)
on the front camshaft pulley.
6-14
0.009 in.)
0.013 in.)
13. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
A
7 x 0.75 m m
20 N m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)
No. 2
No. 3
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
REAR:
INTAKE
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
FRONT:
EXHAUST
(cont'd)
6-15
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
17. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the back cover w i t h the No. 2 piston TDC
mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
B
6-16
Removal
1. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder
attachment (B).
07JAB-001020A
B
07MAB-PY3010A
B
07MAB-PY30T0A
07JAA-001020A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
07JAA-001020A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
Installation
1. Remove any oil f r o m the pulleys (A), crankshaft (B),
bolt (C) and washer (D). Clean and lubricate the
points shown below.
O : Clean
X : R e m o v e a n y oil
# . Lubricate
6-17
Cylinder Head
Timing Beit Inspection
1. '98-99 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A),
ignition w i r e cover (B) and intake manifold cover
(C).
'00-01 models: Remove the throttle body cover (A)
and intake manifold cover (B).
'98-99 models:
6-18
(cont'd)
6-19
Cyfinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
6. Loosen the adjusting nut (A), locknut (B) and
mounting bolt (C), then remove the power steering
(P/S) pump belt (D).
9. Remove the dipstick and tube (A); discard the Oring (B).
A
B
07MAB-PY3010A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
6-20
12. Remove the front upper cover (A), rear upper cover
(B) and lower cover (C).
B
(cont'd)
6-21
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
New Belt
1. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.
2. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning
the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t i m i n g belt
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
B
6-22
7. Clamp the boss of the auto-tensioner in a softjawed vise. Do not grip the housing of the autotensioner.
8. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (C) into the
maintenance hole. Place the holder (D) (P/N 14540P8A-A01) on the auto-tensioner while turning the
screwdriver clockwise to compress the bottom.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the threads or the
gasket contact surface with the screwdriver.
9. Reinstall the maintenance bolt (A). Always use a
new gasket (B).
A
8 N m (0.8 k g f m , 6 Ibfft)
B
(cont'd)
6-23
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Make sure no oil is leaking around the maintenance
bolt, then install the auto-tensioner (A).
10x1.25 mm
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 I b f f t )
6-24
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 kgf
8.7 I b f f t )
MO x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 kgf-m, 3 3 Ibfft)
15. Install the lower cover (A), front upper cover (B)
and rear upper cover (C).
C
B
07MAB-PY3010A
07JAA-001020A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
6-25
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
20. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its w h i t e mark (A)
lines up w i t h the pointer (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m ( 1 . 2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
23. Install and adjust the P/S pump belt (see page 1710).
24. Install the alternator belt.
25. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten
the mounting bolts in the numbered sequence
shown.
0 10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6-26
Used Belt
Follow this procedure when installing a used t i m i n g
belt.
1. Clean the t i m i n g belt pulleys, and upper and lower
covers.
REAR:
(cont'd)
6-27
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
4. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the t i m i n g
belt cannot be installed, remove and compress the
auto-tensioner (refer to steps 6-23 of the N e w Belt
Installation Procedure).
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6-28
1 0 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N - m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
6x1.0 mm
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
B
07MAB-PY3010A
07JAA-001020A
(or C o m m e r c i a l l y available)
(cont'd)
6-29
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
15. Check the camshaft pulley marks (A).
17. Install and adjust the P/S p u m p belt (see page 1710).
18. Install the alternator belt.
REAR CAMSHAFT PULLEY:
6-30
'00-01 models:
(cont'd)
6-31
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
7. Remove the throttle cable (A) and cruise control
cable (B) by loosening the locknuts (C), then slip the
cable ends out of the accelerator linkage.Take care
not to bend the cables w h e n removing t h e m .
Always replace any kinked cable w i t h a new one.
9. Remove the fuel feed hose (A) and fuel return hose
(B).
'98-99 models:
6-32
D
13. Move the auto-tensioner (B) w i t h the belt tension
release arm (C) to remove tension f r o m the
alternator belt (D), then remove the alternator belt.
C
14. Support the engine w i t h a jack and w o o d block
under the oil pan.
(cont'd)
6-33
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
21. Remove the intake manifold.
24. Remove the vacuum hoses (A) from the intake air
bypass control thermal valve (B).
A
'00-01 models:
6-34
CD
CD
CD
CD
6-35
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
N O T E : If camshaft-to-holder oil clearances (see page 640) are not w i t h i n specifications, the cylinder head
cannot be resurfaced.
6-36
'
'
'
INTAKE R O C K E R S H A F T
Ql
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
TOO
lOOOl
SPRING
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM A
EXHAUST ROCKER
ARM B
L e t t e r B is s t a m p e d
on rocker a r m .
L e t t e r A is s t a m p e d
on rocker a r m .
6-37
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arms arid Shafts Inspection
Measure the intake rocker shaft and exhaust rocker
shaft.
1. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker
location.
Inspect rocker a r m
face for w e a r .
6-38
NOTE:
Apply oil to the pistons w h e n reassembling.
When reassembling the primary rocker arm (B),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
6-39
Cylinder Head
Camshaft inspection
3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
6-40
(cont'd)
6-41
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
10. Check total runout w i t h the camshaft supported on
V-blocks.
INTAKE
PRI
34.615 m m
(1.3628 in.)
MID
36.210 m m
(1.4256 in.)
SEC
31.188 m m
(1.2279 in.)
EXHAUST
36.076 m m
(1.4203 in.)
SEC
MID
PRI
FRONT BANK
Rotate camshaft
while measuring.
EX
IN
EX
T/B
PRI
MID
SEC
REAR BANK
EX
IN
EX
- T / B
6-42
6-43
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection
6-44
/
_ 87 m m
(3.43 in.]
5.3 m m
(0.21 in.)
57 m m
(2.24 in.)
10.8 m m
(0.42 in.)
(cont'd)
6-45
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
8. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside
of the new valve guide. Install the guide f r o m the
camshaft side of the head; use the special t o o l t o
drive the guide in to the specified installed height
(A) of the guide (B). If you have all 12 guides to d o ,
you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height:
Intake:
2 1 . 2 0 - 2 2 . 2 0 mm (0.835
Exhaust: 2 0 . 6 3 - 2 1 . 6 3 mm (0.812
0.874 in.)
0.852 in.)
07742-0010100
6-46
(confd)
6-47
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
4. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head and
measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height:
Standard (New): 46.75 47.55 mm
(1.841 1.872 in.)
Service Limit:
47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height:
Standard (New): 46.68 47.48 mm
(1.838-1.869 in.)
Service Limit:
47.73 mm (1.879 in.)
6-48
D
7. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem 2 or 3 times
w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper seating of
the valve and valve keepers. Tap the valve stem
only along its axis so you do not bend the stem.
A
6-49
Cylinder Head
Camshaft/Rocker Arms, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. A p p l y a light coat of oil around the camshaft oil
seal.
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the
cylinder head.
- 1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely.
- 2 Tap the oil seal into the cylinder head about 0.5
- 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 in.) f r o m the surface of
the cylinder head.
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then
install the camshaft thrust cover (C). A l w a y s use a
new O-ring (D).
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
(D
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6-50
12 x 1.25 m m
9 0 N - m (9.2 k g f - m , 6 7 I b f f t )
A p p l y engine oil to the bolt threads.
(cont'd)
6-51
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
4. Clean the t i m i n g belt drive pulley.
5. Set the t i m i n g belt drive pulley to TDC by aligning
the TDC mark (A) on the tooth of the t i m i n g belt
drive pulley w i t h the pointer (B) on the oil p u m p .
B
6-52
(D
(cont'd)
6-53
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
14. Tighten the nuts in 2 or 3 steps. In the final step,
tighten all nuts, in sequence, t o 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m,
8.7 Ibfft).
Specified torque:
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
15. Install the water passage (A). Always use a n e w CDring (B) and new gaskets (C).
17. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and
connectors are installed correctly.
18. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
the customer's radio station presets.
8 x 1.25 mm
2 2 N-m(2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
6-54
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
6-55
Cylinder Head
CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the alternator belt, then remove the alternator belt
(see step 5 on page 6-19).
2. Loosen the adjusting bolt, locknut and mounting
bolt, then remove the power steering (P/S) pump
belt (see step 6 on page 6-20).
3 . Remove the dipstick and tube (see step 9 on page
6-20).
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see step 10 on page
6-20).
5. Remove the upper and lower covers (see step 12
on page 6-21).
6. Remove the CKP sensor from the oil pump.
8-5S
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special T o o l s
7-2
7-3
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-10
7-12
7-14
7-15
7-17
7-18
7-21
7-22
7-24
7-29
.7-29
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No.
(D
Tool Number
07LAD-PT3010A
07VAD-P8A010A
07749-0010000
Description
Oil Seal Driver
Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 80 m m I.D.
Driver
Qty
1
1
1
VTEC SOLENOID
V A L V E / O I L FILTER A S S E M B L Y
Engine Block
Component Location index (cont'd)
7-4
PISTON RINGS
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 7-22
SNAP RING
PISTON PIN
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-18
I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 7-18
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-18
PISTON
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
M e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-15
CONNECTING ROD
E n d p l a y , p a g e 7-7
S m a l l e n d m e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-18
ENGINE BLOCK
C y l i n d e r b o r e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
W a r p a g e i n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
C y l i n d e r b o r e h o n i n g , p a g e 7-17
R i d g e r e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
7-5
Engine Block
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
Remove the 8 drive plate bolts, then separate the drive
plate from the crankshaft flange. After installation,
tighten the bolts in the sequence shown.
7-6
0.014 in.)
Crankshaft End Play:
Standard (New): 0 . 1 0 0 . 3 5 mm (0.004
Service Limit:
0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
0.014 in.)
7-
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
remove the main caps and bearing halves.
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a
clean shop t o w e l .
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main
journal.
NOTE: If the engine is still in the car w h e n y o u bolt
the main cap d o w n to check the clearance, the
weight of the crankshaft and drive plate will flatten
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank w i t h a jack
under the counterweights, and check only 1
bearing at a time.
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the
bolts (see page 7-24). Do not rotate the crankshaft.
5. Remove the caps and bearing halves, and measure
the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.020 0.044 mm
(0.0008 0.0017 in.)
Service Limit:
0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
7 8
Aorl
B o r II
No. 4 B O R E
(DRIVE PLATE END)
No. 1 B O R E
(PULLEY END)
D o r llll
S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
1 or I
Red/
Pink
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
2 o r II
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
3 or III
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
4 o r llll
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
5 o r Hill
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
6 o r llllll
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
Brown/
Black
Smaller
main
Journal
C o r III
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
NOTE:
W h e n using bearing
h a l v e s of d i f f e r e n t c o l o r s ,
it d o e s n o t m a t t e r w h i c h c o l o r
is u s e d in t h e t o p o r b o t t o m .
C o l o r c o d e i s o n t h e d e g e of
the bearing.
3 33\
No. 1 J O U R N A L
(PULLEY END)
No. 4 J O U R N A L
(DRIVE PLATE END)
7-9
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
7-10
'
L a r g e r big e n d b o r e
Bearing Identification
Color c o d e is on the
e d g e of t h e b e a r i n g
2 or
orl
II
3 or
III
4 o r llll
S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
A or I
Pink
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
B o r II
Pink/
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
C or III
Yellow
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
D or llll
Yellow/
Green
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
E or Hill
Green
Green/
Brown
Brown
Brown/
Black
F or llllll
Green/
Brown
Brown/
Black
Black
f
Half of n u m b e r o r b a r
is s t a m p e d o n b e a r i n g c a p
a n d t h e other half is
s t a m p e d on rod.
Smaller
rod
Journal
Smaller
bearing
(Thicker)
Brown
7-11
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the CKP sensor (A) f r o m the oil p u m p , then
remove the t i m i n g belt drive pulley (B).
4. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B) and oil
p u m p (C).
a
B
7-12
INCORRECT
(cont'd)
7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
(cont'd)
Crankshaft Inspection
Straightness
7-14
16.0 m m
(0.63 in.)
SKIRT DIAMETER
TT
2. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper:
Standard (New): 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
(cont'd)
7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
3. Measure wear and taper in directions X and Y at 3
levels in each cylinder as s h o w n .
If the measurements in any cylinder are beyond
the oversize bore service limit, replace the
cylinder block.
If the block is to be rebored, refer to Piston
Clearance Inspection after reboring (refer to step
5).
Oversize
0.25: 86.250 86.265 mm (3.3957
0.50: 86.500-86.515 mm (3.4055
3.3963 in.)
3.4061 in.)
Bore Taper
Limit:
(Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
4. Check the top of the cylinder block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as
shown.
Cylinder Block Warpage:
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max.
Service Limit:
0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
7-16
Cylinder Honing
5. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and piston diameter.
Piston-to-Block Clearance:
Standard (New): 0.015-0.040 mm
(0.0006-0.0016 in.)
Service Limit:
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
S E R V I C E LIMIT
0.08 m m (0.003 i n )
7-1
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly
1. Apply engine oil to the piston pin snap rings (A)
and turn t h e m in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up w i t h the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
7-18
Inspection
NOTE; Inspect the piston, piston pin and connecting rod
when they are at room temperature.
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin.
(cont'd)
7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A).
7-20
20 m m
(0.79 in.)
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
cylinder bore 1 5 - 2 0 m m ( 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 in.) f r o m the
bottom.
7-22
(cont'd)
7-23
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they
do not bind.
8. Position the ring end gaps as s h o w n :
2ND RING G A P
A p p r o x . 90'
15
TOP RING G A P
DO N O T position any ring gap
in l i n e w i t h p i s t o n p i n h o l e .
OIL RING
GAP
SPACER GAP
OIL RING G A P
7-24
C\J
o
CO
o
o
<?
10 x 80 m m
10 x 60 m m
10 x 109 m m
10x80 mm
10x60 mm
(cont'd)
7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
13. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h
plastigage (see page 7-10).
14. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap,
then install the cap.
15. Apply engine oil t o the bolt threads. Torque the
bolts (B) to 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 I b f f t ) .
18. Torque the bearing cap bolts (A), then torque the
bearing cap side bolts (B). Follow the numbered
sequence shown.
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or connecting rod
bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
reassembly to run the engine at idling speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to run it for approximately 15 minutes.
11 x 1.5 m m
7 6 N - m (7.8 k g f - m ,
56 Ibfft)
16. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (B) as
shown.
17. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up w i t h the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90).
7-26
B
10 x
1.25 m m
4 9 N m (5.0 k g f - m ,
36 Ibfft)
22. Clean and dry the left side cover mating surfaces.
Apply a light coat of grease the crankshaft and to
the lip of the seal.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003, evenly to the block mating surface of
the left side cover and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (B)
and the engine block end cover (C) on the cylinder
block.
NOTE: Do not install the parts if 5 minutes or more
have elapsed since applying the liquid gasket.
Instead, reapply liquid gasket after removing the
old residue.
A
0.50.8 m m
( 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 3 in.)
IP
0.03 in.)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
7-27
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston installation (cont'd)
25. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
A p p l y liquid g a s k e t
a l o n g t h e b r o k e n line.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
27. Install the baffle plate (D), then install the oil screen
(E).
7-28
07VAD-P8A010A
7-29
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-7
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No.
(D
8-2
Tool Number
07GAD-PH70201
07912-6110001
Description
Oil Seal Driver
Oil Filter Wrench
Qty
1
...
8-3
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test
1. Remove the YEL/RED wire (A) f r o m the engine oil
pressure switch (B).
B
8-4
Change interval:
Every 7,500 miles {12,000 km) or 12 months
(Normal conditions)
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
(Severe conditions).
1. W a r m up the engine.
2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
B
(cont'd)
8-5
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the oil filter by hand.
4. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
clockwise w i t h the special tool.
Tighten:
7/8 t u r n clockwise.
Tightening t o r q u e : 22 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 Ibfft)
Number w h e n rubber
s e a l is s e a t e d .
N u m b e r after tightening,
Number when
rubber seal is
seated
Number after
tightening
8-6
6 x 1.0 m m
6 N - m (0.6 k g f - m , 4
Ibfft)
PUMP COVER
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
OIL S E A L
Replace.
PUMP HOUSING
A p p l y liquid gasket
to the mating surface of
the cylinder block
w h e n installing.
RELIEF VALVE
Valve m u s t slide freely
in t h e h o u s i n g b o r e .
R e p l a c e if it is s c o r e d .
SPRING
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
SEALING BOLT
3 9 N m (4.0 k g f m , 2 9 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
8-7
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required
Inspection
Removal
1. Drain the engine oil.
2. Turn the crankshaft so that the No. 1 piston is at
TDC (see page 6-22).
3. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-19).
A
8. Remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and the oil p u m p
assembly (B).
9. Remove the screws f r o m the p u m p housing, then
separate the housing and cover.
8-8
Installation
17. Reassemble the oil pump.
18. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
19. Clean and dry the oil p u m p mating surfaces.
20. Install the oil pump (A).
- 1 Apply liquid gasket part No. 08718-0001 or
08718-0003 evenly to the block mating surface
of the oil pump and to the inner threads of the
bolt holes.
- 2 Grease the lip of the oil seal and apply oil to
the new O-rings (B).
- 3 Install the dowel pins (C), then align the inner
rotor w i t h the crankshaft and install the oil
pump.
- 4 Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check the seal for distortion.
(cont'd)
8-9
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
22. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
23. Apply liquid gasket, part No. 08718-0001 or 087180003, evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the
block and to the inner threads of the bolt holes.
24. Install the oil pan w i t h a new gastet.
A p p l y liquid g a s k e t
a l o n g t h e b r o k e n line.
8-10
CD
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold R e m o v a l and Installation
INTAKE MANIFOLD
CHAMBER
R e p l a c e if i t is c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s
are d a m a g e d .
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
(IAT) S E N S O R
18 N - m
(1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
12 x 1.5 m m
26 N m
(2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 I b f f t )
('98-99 m o d e l s )
INTAKE MANIFOLD
R e p l a c e if it is c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s a r e
damaged.
THROTTLE
BODY
9-2
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N-m
(2.2 k g f - m ,
16 I b f f t )
22
Nm
(2.2
kgfm,
16
Ibfft)
Replace.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
1 0 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
Ibfft)
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
4 4 N-m
(4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m
(3.4 kgf-m, 25 Ibfft)
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
THREE W A Y CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
E X H A U S T PIPE A
GASKET
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t )
Replace.
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10 x 1.25 m m
33 N-m
10 x 1 2 5 m m
1
Rejlale" ' ^
9-4
<
l b f f t
>
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Fan Controls
10-2
10-5
10-7
10-7
10-8
10-8
10-9
10-9
10-10
10-10
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-17
10-19
10-20
10-21
Cooling System
Component Location Index
10-2
(cont'd)
10-3
Cooling System
Component Location Index (cont'd)
O-RING
10-4
'98-99 models:
1. Check the No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box before testing.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then
disconnect the YEL/GRN wire (A) f r o m the coolant
temperature gauge sending unit (B), and ground it
w i t h a jumper wire.
YEL/GRN
1
12
13 | 14
15
25
26
A
27
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
21
10
23
24
32
G o t o step 3.
(cont'd)
10-5
Cooling System
#
YEL/GRN
1
12
13
14
15
25
26
17
18
27
19
20
28 29
30
10
23
21
24
32
Is there approx. 5V ?
Y E S - R e p l a c e the fuel and temperature gauge
assembly.
NO
G A U G E CONNECTOR C (16P)
YEL/GRN
2
9
3
10
11
Go to step 5.
X X
12
14
15
16
12 13 14 15
Is there continuity
25 26 27
immediately
10
17 18 19 20 21
23
28 29 30
32
24
G A U G E CONNECTOR C (16P)
YEL/GRN
1
10
2xT
11
X X
12
14
15
16
Is there continuity
10-6
133F (56C)
137
185F ( 8 5 Q 212F(100C)
46-30
10-7
Cooling System
Radiator Test
LOCK
A^
10-8
Thermostat Test
Replace the thermostat if it is open at room
temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
10-9
Cooling System
Water Pump Replacement
1. Remove the t i m i n g belt (see page 6-19).
Coolant Replacement
6 x 1.0 m m
10-10
10-11
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
PIN
THERMOSTAT COVER
10-12
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f - m ,
7.2 Ibfft)
UPPER BRACKET
AND CUSHION
RADIATOR
O-RING
6x
1.0 m m
7 N m (0.7 k g f - m
5 Ibfft)
DRAIN P L U G
1.0 m m
N - m (1.0 k g f - m ,
Ibfft)
FAN MOTOR
4.4 N - m ( 0 . 4 5 k g f - m ,
3.3 I b f f t )
A/C CONDENSER
FAN ASSEMBLY
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
FAN CONNECTORS
Fan Controls
Component Location Index
10-14
SYMPTOM
PROCEDURE
10-15
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION
SWITCH
BATTERY
No.41 (100A)
No.42 (50A)
- WHT-
No.57 (20A)
No.58 (20A)
YEL
BLK/YEL
No.3
(7.5A)
RADIATOR
FAN .
RELAY
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
No.6
(15A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLK/YEL
BLU/YEL
BLU/BLK
GRN
YEL/WHT
YEL
WHT BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
-GRN
WHT/GRN
BLK
GRN
CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
RADIATOR
FAN MOTOR
BLK
BLK
BLK
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH A
f Closed: Above
L 199F (93C)
BLK
RADIATOR
FAN SWITCH B
f Closed ; Above 1
L225 F(107C) J
AIR
CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
BLK
BLK
A.
G201
10-16
G101
G401
OK?
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y
4P S O C K E T
Y E S - G o to step 2.
1
NO - Replace the fuse and recheck.B
Is the relay OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
T e r m i n a l side of
female terminals
fan run?
Y E S - G o to step 9.
N O - G o t o step 5.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire.
1
6. Disconnect the radiator fan connector.
2
3
Terminal side of
female terminals
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
4P S O C K E T
Is there battery
voltage?
Terminal side of
female terminals
2
3
Y E S - G o to step 4.
BLU/BLK
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
NO - Repair open in the BLU/BLK wire between the
under-hood fuse/relay box and the radiator fan.
(cont'd)
10-17
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan Circuit Troubleshooting (conf*
8. Check for continuity between the No. 1 terminal of
the radiator fan connector and body g r o u n d .
RADIATOR FAN CONNECTOR
2
1
W i r e side of
female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Is there battery
_1_
2
Terminal side of
female terminals
Is there battery
YES
NO
10-18
voltage?
voltage?
OK?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 4.
IMO Repair open in the GRN w i r e between the
radiator fan switch A and under-hood fuse/relay
box.B
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for
continuity between the No. 1 terminal on the
radiator fan switch A connector and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - Go to step 5.
NO Check for an open in the BLK w i r e between
the radiator fan switch A connector and body
ground. If the w i r e is OK, check for poor ground at
G101.B
10-19
Fan Controls
Fan Control Module Input Test
Perform the f o l l o w i n g tests w i t h the radiator fan control m o d u l e 8P connector connected, the ignition switch ON (II)
and the A/C switch OFF.
If you find the cause of a p r o b l e m , correct it before y o u continue.
BLK/YEL
YEL/WHT
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
Wire color
BLK
WHT
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
YEL/WHT
YEL
GRN
WHT/GRN
10-20
Test condition
Check for voltage to body
ground.
Check for battery voltage to
body ground.
Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (II)
Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (II)
Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (II)
Check battery voltage to
body ground: Ignition
switch-ON (III)
Connect body ground:
Ignition switch-ON (II)
Check for voltage: Engine
coolant temperature below
225F(107C)
Desired result
There should be less than 1V.
There should be battery
voltage.
Faulty radiator
condenser fan
An open in the
Faulty radiator
Faulty radiator
fan relay or
relay
wire
fan switch B
fan control module
Terminal
A
Operation
ON
196-203F
(91-95C)
OFF
5 - 1 5 F ( 3 - 8 C ) lower
than the temperature
w h e n it g o e s o n
ON
217-232F
(103-111C)
OFF
5 - 2 3 ( 3 - 1 3 ) lower
than the temperature
w h e n it g o e s o n
SWITCH
A
SWITCH
B
Temperature
!
I
Special Tools
PGM-FI System
11-2
11-3
11-6
11-7
11-50
11-52
11-80
11-84
11-84
11-85
11-86
11-87
11-88
11-89
11-91
11-92
11-94
11-95
- 11-96
11-97
11-98
11-99
............................ 11-100
11-101
-
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
- 11-102
EVAP System
Component Location Index
11-103
Refer to the 1998-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown in this section.
Outline of Accord V6 Model Change
J30A1 engine has been added.
11-2
Tool Number
A973X-041-XXXXX
07VAJ-0040100
07406-004000A
Description
V a c u u m Pump/Gauge, 0 30 in.Hg
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment
Fuel Pressure Gauge
Qty
1
1
1
Temporary DTC
Detection Item
P0171 (45)
P0170
P0172 (45)
P0170
P0108 (3)
P0112 (10)
P0113 (10)
P0116 (86)
P0116
P0117 (6)
P0118 (6)
P0122 (7)
P0123 (7)
P0131 (1)
P0132 (1)
P0133(61)
P0133
P0135 (41)
P0137 (63)
P0136
P0138 (63)
P0136
P0139(63)
P0136
P0141 (65)
Note
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-47)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-48)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-50)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-51)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-52)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-52)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-53)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-54)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-57)
(see page 11-55)
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
Service
P1399
P0300 and
Random Misfire
some of
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0305 (75)
P0306 (76)
*: These DTCs w i l l be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is jumped w i t h the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D 4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
(cont'd)
11-3
Temporary DTC
Detection Item
P1339
P0302 (72)
P1339
P0303 (73)
P1339
P0304 (74)
P1339
P0305 (75)
P1339
P0306 (76)
P1339
P0335 (4)
P0336 (4)
P0401 (80)
P0401
P0420 (67)
P0420
P0451 (91)*
P0451
P0452 (91)
P0450
P0453 (91)
P0450
P0505 (14)
P0505
P0560 (34)
P0700** (70)
P0715** (70)
P0720** (70)
P0730** (70)
P0740** (70)
P0753** (70)
P0758** (70)
P0763** (70)
P0780** (70)
P1106(13)
Note
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
*1 (see page 11-64)
*2 (see page 11-68)
(see page 11-73)
(see page 11-73)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-136)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-135)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-143)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-144)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-145)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-99)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 11-76)
Refer to the Automatic
Transmission DTC Troubleshooting
Index
11-4
P1106
DTC
(MIL indication*)
P1122 (7)
P1128
Temporary DTC
P1122
(5)
P1128
P1129 (5)
P1129
P1259 (22)
P1297 (20)
P1298 (20)
P1361 (8)
P1362 (8)
P1366 (58)
P1367 (58)
P1456 (90)
P1456 (90)
P1457 (90)
P1457 (90)
P1491 (12)
P1491 (12)
P1498 (12)
P1519 (14)
P1607 ( - )
Detection Item
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Higher
Than Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Lower Than Expected
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP)
Sensor Higher Than Expected
VTEC System Malfunction
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit
Low Voltage
Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit
High Voltage
Top Dead Center (TDC) 1 Sensor
Intermittent Interruption
Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 1 No
Signal
Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2
Intermittent Interruption
Top Dead Center Sensor (TDC) 2 No
Signal
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System Leakage (Fuel Tank System)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control
System Leakage (EVAP Canister
System)
Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve
Insufficient Lift
Exhaust Gas Recircuration (EGR) Valve
Position Sensor Circuit High Voltage
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve Circuit
Malfunction
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Internal Circuit Malfunction
FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
FPTDR Signal Line Malfunction
Automatic Transaxle System
Malfunction
Page
(see page 11-75)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-49)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-49)
(see page 6-6)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-84)
Refer to the '98-01 Accord
Manual (see page 11-85)
(see page 11-76)
Service
Service
Service
Service
P1676(35)*3
P1678(35)*3
P1705** (70)
P1706
P1706** (70)
P1738** (70)
P1739** (70)
P1750** (70)
P 1 7 5 1 * * (70)
P1753** (70)
P 1 7 6 8 * (70)
P1773** (70)
*: These DTCs will be indicated by the blinking of the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w h e n the SCS service signal
line is j u m p e d with the Honda PGM Tester.
* * : The D4 indicator light and the MIL may come on simultaneously.
* 3 : '01 model
#
11-5
Symptom
Engine will not start
( M I L w o r k s O K , n o D T C s set)
Cold
(MIL
Cold
(MIL
fast idle t o o l o w
w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
fast idle t o o high
w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
Idle s p e e d f l u c t u a t e s
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
Low power
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
E n g i n e stalls
( M I L w o r k s OK, n o DTCs set)
Difficult t o refuel
( M I L w o r k s O K , n o D T C s set)
Fuel o v e r f l o w s d u r i n g r e f u e l i n g
( N o DTCs set)
11-6
1.
2.
3.
! T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e i m m o b i l i z e r s y s t e m , refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
) S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 2 2 - 2 0 4 ) .
1. T e s t t h e b a t t e r y (see p a g e 2 2 - 3 0 ) .
2. C h e c k t h e f u e l p r e s s u r e (see p a g e 11-89).
i 3. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n w i r e s f o r '98-99 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22).
i 4. T e s t t h e i g n i t i o n c o i l f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-22), o r f o r '00-01
I
m o d e l s (see p a g e 4-23).
i 5. C h e c k t h e i g n i t i o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (ICM) i n p u t f o r '98-99 m o d e l s
(see p a g e 4-21).
C h e c k / a d j u s t t h e i d l e s p e e d (see p a g e 11-86).
! 1.
j 2.
! 3.
1.
2.
| 3.
i 1.
2.
! 3.
1.
' 2.
3.
i 4.
I 1.
;
A l s o c h e c k for
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Locked up engine
Slipped/
b r o k e n t i m i n g belt
Contaminated fuel
Low compression
Intake air leaks
Contaminated fuel
Low compression
System Descriptions
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in a signal f r o m a sensor, the PCM ignores that signal and assumes a pre-programmed
value for that sensor that allows the engine to continue to run.
Back-up Function
When an abnormality occurs in the PCM, the injectors are controlled by a back-up circuit independent of the system in
order to permit minimal driving.
Self-diagnosis
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor, the PCM supplies ground for the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) and stores the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in erasable m e m o r y . W h e n the ignition is first turned on, the PCM
supplies ground for the MIL for 2 seconds to check the MIL bulb condition.
Two Driving Cycle Detection Method
To prevent false indications, the " t w o driving cycle detection m e t h o d " is used for some self-diagnostic functions.
When an abnormality occurs, the PCM stores it in its memory. W h e n the same abnormality recurs after the ignition
switch is turned OFF and ON (II) again, the PCM informs the driver by turning on the MIL.
(cont'd)
11-7
Engine Speed
Vehicle Speed
Manifold
Absolute
Pressure (MAP)
Engine Coolant
Temperature
(ECT)
Primary Heated
Oxygen Sensor
(Primary H02S)
(Sensor 1),
Secondary
Heated Oxygen
Sensor
(Secondary H 0 2
S) (Sensor 2)
11-8
Description
If the PCM detects a p r o b l e m , it w i l l store it as a
code consisting of one letter and four numbers.
Depending on the problem, an SAE-defined code
(POxxx) or a Honda-defined code (P1xxx) w i l l be
output to the tester.
The PCM computes engine speed f r o m the signals
sent f r o m the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor.
This data is used for determining the t i m e and
amount of fuel injection.
The PCM converts pulse signals f r o m the
countershaft speed sensor into speed data.
The absolute pressure caused in the intake
manifold by engine load and speed.
Operating Value
If no problem is detected,
there is no output.
Freeze Data
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
Data
Fuel System
Short Term
Fuel Trim
Long Term
Fuel Trim
Intake Air
Temperature
(IAT)
Throttle
Position
Ignition
Timing
Calculated
Load Value
(CLV)
Description
Fuel system status is indicated as " o p e n " or
" c l o s e d " . Closed: Based on the H02S output, the
PCM determines the air/fuel ratio and controls the
amount of injected fuel.
Open: ignoring H02S output, the PCM refers to
signals f r o m the Throttle Position (TP), Manifold
Absolute Pressure (MAP), Intake Air Temperature
(IAT), Barometic Pressure (BAR0) and Engine
Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensors to control the
amount of injected fuel.
The air/fuel ratio correction coefficient for
correcting the amount of injected fuel w h e n Fuel
System Status is " c l o s e d " . When the ratio is leaner
than the stoichiometric ratio, the PCM increases
short tern fuel t r i m gradually, and the amount of
injected fuel increases. The air/fuel ratio gradually
gets richer, causing a lower oxygen content in the
exhaust gas. Consequently, the short term fuel t r i m
is lowered, and the PCM reduces the amount of
injected fuel. This cycle keeps the air/fuel ratio
close to the stoichiometric ratio w h e n in closed
loop status.
Long term fuel t r i m is computed f r o m short t e r m
fuel trim and indicates changes occuring in the fuel
supply system over a long period. If long term fuel
trim is higher than 1.00, the amount of injected fuel
must be increased. If it is lower than 1.00, the
amount of injected fuel must be reduced.
The IAT sensor converts intake air temperature into
voltage and signals the PCM. When intake air
temperature is low, the internal resistance of the
sensor increases, and the voltage signal is higher.
Based on the accelerator pedal position, the
opening angle of the throttle valve is indicated.
Ignition t i m i n g is the ignition advance angle set by
the PCM. The PCM matches ignition t i m i n g to the
driving conditions.
CLV is the engine load calculated f r o m the MAP
data.
Operating Valve
At idle speed: closed
Freeze Data
YES
0.731.47
YES
0.811.19
YES
YES
At idle speed:
approx. 10%
At idle speed: 1 0 2
BTDC w i t h the SCS
service signal j u m p e d .
At idle speed:
16 33%
At 2,500 rpm with no
load:
17-25%
YES
NO
YES
(cont'd)
11-9
rti
FUSES:
(D B A C K UP, A C C ( 4 0 A ) *
S T O P (20A)*
(DACGS (15A)*
(D BATTERY (100A) *
(DIG MAIN ( S O A ) *
N o . 1 F U E L PUMP ( 1 5 A ) *
<2) No.9 BACK UP LIGHT
INSTRUMENT LIGHT (7.5A)*
(D No.6 ECU (PCM)
CRUISE CONTROL ( 1 5 A ) *
(DNo.11 IG COIL (15A)*
No.13 STARTER SIGNAL (7.5A)*
<0) No.13 C L O C K BACKUP (7.5A)*
* i n the under-hood fuse/relay box
* : in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
* : in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
A
To E C T G A U G E
11-10
* 1 : '9899 models
* 2 : '00 model
* 3 : "01 model
> C28 V C C 2
* ICMB13 <
"1
> C27 T P S
To G A U G E
ASSEMBLY,
ABS/TCS
*
C O N T R O L UNIT
> C18 S G 2
> C6 EGRL
NEPA19
<
> B7 E-EGR
CRSA5 <
> A2S P T A N K
P C S A6 <
C19 V C C t
MCSA2 <
VBSOLD5 <
TEST TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
w To C R U I S E
C O N T R O L UNIT
o_^5$\_o-
ENGINE MOUNT C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E
o-r^lpu-o
C 7 SG1
EVAP B Y P A S S SOLENOID VALVE
2WBSA3
<
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
C26ECT
VSVA4 <
o-^W^o
VTEC SOLENOID VALVE
VTSB12 <
o-^W^-o
"1
C 2 5 IA T
1> A 2 6
PSPSW
Dp
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
(BPP) SWITCH
A32 B K S W
* 2 , *3 |
2
* *
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
I G P L S 2 C14 <
*2, *3 | p L S 3 C 3 <
G
^4
**SPARK
PLUG
icm
No. 1 IGNITION C O I L
I Q P L S 5 C12 <
PRIMARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
* *
C1P02SHTC
To
**SPARK
PLUG
> C16 P H 0 2 S
No. 3 IGNITION C O I L
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
To
o->> *** * S P A R K
6
BARO
SENSOR
(Built Into
the PCM)
11
i c m
p^n^r; P L U G
No. 4 IGNITION C O I L
14
"ft- H-ts_a-H>
St P A R K
PLUG
No. 5 IGNITION C O I L
,-4
ICM
ICM
p-^T;
F ^'
5
SPARK
PLUG
No. 6 IGNITION C O I L
(cont'd)
11-11
**
To IMMOBILIZER
UNIT
"
> A 2 5 JMOCD
I
J
To M U L T I P L E X
C O N T R O L UNIT "
(DRIVER'S)
*1.*2
| o P 2 S W B14,'
olf
"1
*3
AA13,
2 8 I LA161
U
MO E N |
"1
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
SOLENOID VALVE A S S E M B L Y
LCD1 <
o-^Wv-o
SHAD7 <
ons$^-o
SHBD2
oqf^u_o
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
SHCD3 <
_o_qfPo
. *2,*3
*1
' B14, D13 A T P N P
i 06 ATPR
m
m
5
LSA+B17
<
LSA-B8
<
> D14ATP2
LSB+B25
<
i D15ATP1
LSB-B18 <
i D8ATPD4
A U T O M A T I C T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY A
D8ATPD3
n
11
11
A U T O M A T I C T R A N S A X L E (A/T) C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A S S E M B L Y B
El
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
NM 011 <
\ MAINSHAFT
7 SPEED SENSOR
NMSGD12 <
NCD10
NCSGD16
<
* A T S F T P A11
3
* V R E F A7
\ COUNTERSHAFT
) SPEED SENSOR
i
i
ABS/TCS
CONTROL
UNIT*
* T H L O U T A31 <
* P F I N H A13 <
3
* F P T D R A22 <
PCM A (32P)
5 6 7
8 9
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
PC m
1 2
/ '12
22
13 14
/ *2l
PCM B (25P)
10
10
23
32
24
1
9
c ( 3 i P)
8 9 1C
'16 17 18 IS 20 21 /
2 30 /
26 27 2 8
?
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-12
3 4 5
6 7 8
11 12 13 14 15
17 18
21 22
23 24 25
P C M D (16P)
5 6
2
10
20
1
2 3
6 7 8 9 10 11
13 14 15
16
5
12
3
2WBS
14
D5
IND
25
IMO
CD
4
VSV
15
FLR
16
IMO
EN
26
27
ACS
PSPSW
5
CRS
6
PCS
7
VREF
8
S02S
HTC
17
ACC
18
MIL
19
NEP
21
20
22
FANC K-LINE FPTDR
28
ILU
29
30
31
PTANK ELD THIDUT
9
VSS
OUT
10
SCS
11
ATSFTP
23
SHQ2S
24
STS
32
BKSW
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V.
W i r e color
Terminal
Terminal n a m e
number
YEL/GRN
MTRTW
2
GRN/WHT
BLU
4
5
LT GRN/
WHT
BLU/GRN
RED/YEL
ORN/GRN
LT G R N
ATSFTP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
PNK
IMOLMP (IMMOBLIZER
I N D I C A T O R LIGHT)
IMOEN (IMMOBILZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
D 4 I N D (D4 I N D I C A T O R )
Drives immobilizer
indicator light.
Sends immobilizer enable
signal.
Drives D4 indicator light.
FLR ( I M M O B I L I Z E R F U E L
P U M P RELAY)
IMOEN (IMMOBILIZER
ENABLE SIGNAL)
A C C (A/C C L U T C H RELAY)
D r i v e s f u e l p u m p relay.
BLU/WHT
10
BRN
12
13*
14
17
BLU
GRN/BLK
15
16*
GRN/YEL
3
BLK/WHT
VREF (REFERRENCE
VOLTAGE)
S02SHTC (SECONDARY
HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR
HEATER C O N T R O L )
V S S O U T (VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL)
S C S (SERVICE CHECK
SIGNAL)
11*
Description
BLU
RED
Signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
At idle: 0 V
A b o v e idle: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t , b e l o w 147F (64
C): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t , a b o v e 147F (64
C): d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
With fully w a r m e d up engine running: duty controlled
Depending o n vehicle speed: pulses
W i t h the service check signal shorted w i t h t h e Honda
P G M Tester: 0 V
W i t h t h e s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5 V or
battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in p a r k p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 4 V
W i t h t h e s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5 V or
battery voltage
W i t h immobilizer indicator light turned O N : 0 V
With immobilizer indicator light turned OFF: battery voltage
W i t h D4 i n d i c a t o r l i g h t t u r n e d O N : 0 V
W i t h D 4 i n d i c a t o r l i g h t t u r n e d OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
0 V f o r t w o s e c o n d s after t u r n i n g i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N
(II), t h e n b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-1
2
1
MTRTW MCS
12
IMO
LMP
13
IMO
ENfRNH
3
2WBS
14
D5
IND
25
IMO
CD
4
VSV
15
FLR
16
IMO
EN
27
26
PSPSW ACS
5
CRS
6
PCS
7
VREF
17
18
MIL
19
NEP
ACC
28
29
ILU
PTANK
8
S02S
HTC
20
FANC
9
VSS
OUT
22
21
K-LINE FPTDR
30
31
ELD THLOUT
10
scs
ATSFTP
23
SHQ2S
24
STS
11
32
BKSW
N O T E : S t a n d a r d battery voltage is 12 V .
Terminal
number
18
W i r e color
GRN/ORN
19
20
BLU
GRN
21
GRY
22*
GRN/RED
Terminal name
MIL (MALFUNCTION
I N D I C A T O R LIGHT)
NEP {ENGINE SPEED PULSE)
FANC (RADIATOR FAN
CONTROL)
K-LINE
FPTDR ( F R A M E T O
POWERTRAIN TORQUE
D O W N REQUEST)
S H 0 2 S (SECONDARY
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR,
S E N S O R 2)
STS (STARTER SWITCH
SIGNAL)
IMOCD (IMMOBILIZER CODE)
P S P S W (P/S PRESSURE
SWITCH SIGNAL)
23
WHT/RED
24
BLU/ORN
25
26
RED
GRN
27
BLU/RED
A C S (A/C S W I T C H S I G N A L )
28
WHT/RED
29
LTGRN
30
GRN/RED
ILU ( I N T E R L O C K C O N T R O L
UNIT)
P T A N K (FUEL T A N K
PRESSURE SENSOR)
ELD (ELECTRICAL L O A D
DETECTOR)
31 *
32
YEL/GRN
WHT/BLK
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
11-14
T H L O U T (THROTTLE
POSITION SENSOR O U T P U T
SIGNAL)
B K S W (BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH)
Description
Drives MIL.
Outputs engine speed pulse.
Drives radiator fan relay.
Sends and receives scan
tool signal.
Detects engine retard
request signal.
Signal
With
With
With
With
With
With
MIL turned O N ; 0 V
M I L t u r n e d OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
engine running: pulses
radiator fan running: 0 V
radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h brake p e d a l r e l e a s e d : 0 V
W i t h brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
1
IGP1
9
IGP2
PG1
10
PG2
20
LG1
11
INJ1
3
INJ5
4
INJ4
12
VTS
14
13
ICM OR2SW*!
ATPNK
21
VBU
7
8
6
INJ6 E-EGR USA-
5
INJ2
22
LG2
18
17
LSA+ LSB-
15
INJ3
24
23
IACV
25
OP
3SW
LSB+
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V.
Terminal
number
1
W i r e color
Terminal name
YEL/BLK
IGP1 (POWER S O U R C E )
2
3
4
5
6
7
BLK
BLK/RED
YEL
RED
WHT/BLU
PNK
PG1 (POWER G R O U N D )
INJ5 ( N o . 5 INJECTOR)
INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR)
INJ2 ( N o . 2 I N J E C T O R )
I N J 6 ( N o . 6 INJECTOR)
E-EGR
WHT
YEL/BLK
10
11
12
BLK
BRN
GRN/YEL
13*
YEL/GRN
14*
BLU/BLK
14*
PG2 (POWER G R O U N D )
I N J 1 ( N o . 1 INJECTOR)
V T S (VTEC S O L E N O I D
VALVE)
ICM (IGNITION CONTROL
MODULE)
I O P 2 S W ( 2 N D OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH)
ATPNP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
INJ3 ( N o . 3 INJECTOR)
LSA + (A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE C O N T R O L
S O L E N O I D V A L V E A + SIDE)
LSB - (A/T C L U T C H
PRESSURE C O N T R O L
S O L E N O I D V A L V E B - SIDE)
LG1 (LOGIC G R O U N D )
V B U ( V O L T A G E B A C K UP)
BLU/WHT
15
17
BLU
RED
18
GRN
20
21
BRN/BLK
VVHT/YEL
22
23
BLK*
BRN/BLK*
BLK/BLU
24
BLU/WHT
25
ORN
LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D )
Signal
Description
Power source for the PCM
circuit.
G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit.
Drives N o . 5 injector.
Drives No. 4 injector.
Drives N o . 2 injector.
Drives N o . 6 injector.
D r i v e s EGR v a l v e .
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A p o w e r
supply negative terminal
Power source for the PCM
circuit.
G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit.
Drives No. 1 injector.
D r i v e s VTEC s o l e n o i d v a l v e .
Sends ignition pulse.
Detects 2 n d oil p r e s s u r e
switch.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e
switch signal.
Drives No. 3 injector.
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A power
supply positive terminal
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B power
supply negative terminal
G r o u n d for the PCM circuit.
Power source for the PCM
circuit.
P o w e r s o u r c e f o r t h e DTC
memory.
G r o u n d f o r the PCM circuit.
With
With
Less
With
t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V
t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
engine r u n n i n g : pulses
W i t h EGR o p e r a t i n g : d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
W i t h EGR n o t o p e r a t i n g : a b o u t 0 V
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
W i t h e n g i n e at l o w r p m : 0 V
W i t h e n g i n e at h i g h r p m : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 10 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n
engine speed)
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
In Park o r N e u t r a l : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
D r i v e s IAC v a l v e .
W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
Detects 3 r d oil p r e s s u r e
switch.
A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B p o w e r
supply positive terminal
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
'98-93 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-1
1
4
2
3
P02S
IGPLS1
HTC ALTC IGPLS3
14
12
13
IGPLS5 IGPLS4 IGPLS2
23
IGPLS6
25
IAT
5
ALTF
6
EGRL
16
17
PH02S MAP
26
ECT
27
TPS
7
SG1
18
SG2
8
9
10
CKPP CKPM VTM
19
20
21
VCC1 TDC1P TDC1M
28
VCC2
29
30
TDC2P TDC2M
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 12 V.
Terminal
number
1
W i r e color
Terminal name
BLK/WHT
WHT/GRN
3*2, *3
WHT/BLU
4*2, *3
YEL/GRN
WHT/RED
WHT/BLK
7
8
9
10
GRN/WHT
BLU
WHT
BLU/BLK
12* ' *
13* ' *
U
* 2 . *3
BLK/RED
BRN
BLU/RED
16
WHT
17
RED/GRN
18
19
GRN/BLK
YEL/RED
20
GRN
21
RED
23*2. * 3
BRN/WHT
25
RED/YEL
26
RED/WHT
27
RED/BLK
28
YEL/BLU
29
YEL
30
BLK
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
11-16
1)
MAP (MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE S E N S O R )
SG2 (SENSOR G R O U N D )
VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE)
T D C 1 P C T D C S E N S O R 1P
SIDE)
T D C 1 M (TDC S E N S O R 1 M
SIDE)
IGPLS 6 ( N o . 6 I G N I T I O N COIL
PULSE)
IAT ( I N T A K E AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
ECT ( E N G I N E C O O L A N T
TEMPERATURE SENSOR)
TPS (THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR)
VCC2 ( S E N S O R V O L T A G E )
T D C 2 P (TDC2 S E N S O R P
SIDE)
T D C 2 M (TDC2 S E N S O R M
SIDE)
Description
Drives primary heated
o x y g e n sensor heater.
Sends alternator control
signal.
Drives No. 3 ignition coil.
Signal
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
With fully w a r m e d up engine running: duty
controlled
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 0 V 5 V ( d e p e n d i n g
o n electrical load)
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0 V
W i t h engine running: pulses
e n g i n e at l o w r p m : 0 V
e n g i n e at h i g h r p m : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0 V
engine r u n n i n g : pulses
G r o u n d f o r T D C s e n s o r 1.
Drives No. 6 ignition coil.
Detects I A T s e n s o r s i g n a l .
D e t e c t s ECT s e n s o r s i g n a l .
Detects T P s e n s o r s i g n a l .
Provides sensor voltage.
Detects T D C s e n s o r 2.
G r o u n d f o r T D C s e n s o r 2.
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): 0V
W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1 - 4 . 8 V
( d e p e n d i n g o n i n t a k e air t e m p e r a t u r e )
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 1 - 4 . 8 V
(depending on engine coolant temperature)
W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n : a b o u t 4.8 V
W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y c l o s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: 0 V
W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
1
LC
2
SHB
6
ATPR
7
SHA
13
ATPNP*
OP2SW*
14
ATPD2
8
9
ATPD3 ATPD4
15
ATP1
5
VBSOL
3
SHC
10
NC
11
NM
12
NMSG
16
NCSG
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is 1 2 V .
Terminal
number
1
W i r e color
YEL
Description
Signal
LC ( T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R
CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE)
S H B (SHIFT S O L E N O I D
V A L V E B)
Terminal name
GRNAA/HT
GRN
SHC (SHIFT C O N T R O L
S O L E N O I D V A L V E C)
BLK/YEL
WHT
BLU/YEL
VBSO L (BATTERY V O L T A G E
FOR S O L E N O I D V A L V E )
ATPR ( T R A N S M I S S I O N
RANGE SWITCH)
S H A (SHIFT S O L E N O I D
VALVE A)
PNK
YEL
10
BLU
11
RED
12
WHT
ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
ATPD4 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
NC ( C O U N T E R S H A F T SPEED
SENSOR)
N M ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED
SENSOR)
N M S G ( M A I N S H A F T SPEED
SENSOR GROUND)
ATPNP (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
O P 2 S W ( 2 N D OIL P R E S S U R E
SWITCH)
ATP2 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
ATP1 (TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH)
NCSG (COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED S E N S O R G R O U N D )
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e
switch signal.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range
switch signal.
Detects countershaft speed
sensor signals.
Detects m a i n s h a f t speed
sensor signals.
G r o u n d for mainshaft speed
sensor.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e
switch signal.
D e t e c t s 2 n d oil p r e s s u r e
switch.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range
switch signal.
Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range
switch signal.
Ground for countershaft
speed sensor.
13* *
13*Y*
BLU/WHT
BLU/BLK
14
BLU
15
BRN
16
GRN
In R p o s i t i o n : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h engine r u n n i n g in 2 n d , 3rd gears: battery
voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g i n 1st, 4 t h g e a r s : a b o u t 0 V
In D3 p o s i t i o n : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
In D 4 p o s i t i o n : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 5 V o r b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), a n d f r o n t w h e e l s
rotating: battery voltage
W i t h engine running: pulses
In Park o r N e u t r a l : 0 V
In a n y o t h e r p o s i t i o n : b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h t h e i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
In
In
In
In
2nd position: 0 V
any other position: battery voltage
1st p o s i t i o n : 0 V
any other position: battery voltage
* 1 : '98-99 m o d e l s
* 2 : '00 m o d e l
* 3 : '01 m o d e l
(cont'd)
11-17
F U E L I N J E C T I O N A I R (FIA) C O N T R O L V A L V E
11-18
'00-01 models:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
INTAKE AIR B Y P A S S C O N T R O L V A L V E
(cont'd)
11-19
11-20
P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E
@ THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
CANISTER
@ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
CANISTER FILTER
@ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) P U R G E C O N T R O L
SOLENOID VALVE
@ E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) C O N T R O L
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) T W O W A Y V A L V E
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
F U E L TANK PRESSURE SENSOR'
> O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y ( O R V R )
VENT SHUT VALVE
@ O N B O A R D R E F U E L I N G V A P O R R E C O V E R Y (ORVR)
VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
() E N G I N E M O U N T C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D V A L V E
P O S I T I V E C R A N K C A S E V E N T I L A T I O N (PCV) V A L V E
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R FILTER
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
PURGE VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R V E N T
SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O W A Y V A L V E
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR RECIRCULATION VALVE
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(cont'd)
11-21
11-22
THERMISTOR
THERMISTOR
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
HEATER
TERMINALS
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER
HEATER
TERMINALS
SENSOR UNIT
3br
Starting Control
When the engine is started, the PCM provides a rich
mixture by increasing injector duration.
(cont'd)
11-23
BRUSH
RESISTOR
TERMINAL
To INTAKE
MANIFOLD
11-24
(cont'd)
11-25
THROTTLE
P O S I T I O N (TP)
SENSOR
<-
: BLOW-BY VAPOR
: F R E S H AIR
PCV
VALVE
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned (Refer to System Diagram to see the
functional layout of the system).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve
When the engine coolant temperature is above 167F
(75C), the PCM controls the EVAP canister purge valve
which provides vacuum to the EVAP canister.
HOUSING
THREE-WAY
CATALYSTS
11-26
SENSORS
BLK
THROTTLE BODY
ACL
AIR
INTAKE
DUCT
RESONATOR
From
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
VARIOUS
SENSORS
(cont'd)
11-27
"1
BLK
I
*1:
*2:
' 0 0 model
'01 model
VARIOUS
SENSORS
11-28
/ EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
BLK/
YEL
YEL/
BLU
Q R N /
BLK
From
No. 6
ECU(PCM)
CRUISE
CONTROL
(15 A)
(in the
driver's
underdash
fuse/relay
box)
I VARIOUS
|SENSORS
11-29
* 5
To CLIMATE
C O N T R O L UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
EGR VALVE
LIFT S E N S O R
YEL/
BLU
- YEL/8LU -WHT/BLKo"
- GRN/BLK 2
a
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
JT
a
( T o p a g e 11-31
11-30
(cont'd)
11-31
ALT
A ^ CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOIDO VALVE B
11-32
No. 1 F U E L I N J E C T O R
'K
'K
r -V I N J 2
B5J
R E D No. 2 F U E L I N J E C T O R
<B15)
BLU No. 3 F U E L I N J E C T O R
>IT
No. 4 F U E L I N J E C T O R
-YEL/BLK
it
No. 5 F U E L I N J E C T O R
No. 6 F U E L I N J E C T O R
IACV
'B23)
BLK/BLU
- YEL/BLK
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
IGP2
-\B9)
,
YEL/BLK
(cont'd)
11-33
11-34
- BLK/WHT -
/Nil
a"
- GRN/BLK - BLK/YEL
- BLK/WHT-
1
ba
C302
-GRN/WHT -
!T~
-
RED YEL
- BLK/YEL
-GRN/WHT'
no:
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
RED/YEL
1
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
BLK/YEL
'HE
EVAP PURGE
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
CRUISE
C O N T R O L UNIT
a"'
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR
LIGHT
To
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
C204
- GRN - BLK -
AF
From
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y ,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
(cont'd)
11-35
LT GRM/WHT -
- BLK/YEL
EVAP CONTROL
CANISTER VENT
SHUT V A L V E
- YEL/BLU
- LT GRN
F U E L TANK
PRESSURE SENSOR
3
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
00000
JST
jKT
jST
GRN
BLK
.J
jKT
YEL
2
BLU
L.
D R I V E R S UNDER-DASH
CONNECTOR F
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
2
GRN/BLK
YEL/BLU
CONNECTOR D
YEL/BLU
GRN/BLK -
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
WHT/YEL
CONNECTOR
2
GRN/BLK -
YEL
BLK/YEL
A
B
-
CONNECTOR K
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
CONNECTOR A
IGNITION
SWITCH
FUSES
A : No. 9 B A C K U P L I G H T
I N S T R U M E N T L I G H T (7.5A)
B I No. 6 E C U (PCM)
C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A)
C : No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L
(7.5A)
D : No. 1 F U E L P U M P (15A)
11-36
( T o page 11-37 )
( F r o m p a g e 11-36 )
CONNECTOR I
1
BRN
BLU/ORN
M^Z
CONNECTOR
-
RED/WHT
B L K / Y E L
WHT/BLK'
WHT/YEL
C O N N E C T O R N
W H T
C O N N E C T O R E
-[
a
-
DRIVER S
BOX
DATA
LINK
BRN
B R N / B L K
- WHT/GRN
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
CONNECTOR
-
WHT/BLK
- W H T / Y E L
B R A K E
m an
C103
C104
B L K / Y E L
BLK
C201
- WHT/GRN
YEL/BLK
BLK
- B R N / B L K ' -
YEL/BLK
BLK*
'
WHT/GRN
=0
BRN/BLK -
C301
- B L U / O R N
SWITCH
- G R N / Y E L
B L K / Y E L
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
(cont'd)
11-37
CONNECTOR B
- BLK/YEL
- BLK/YEL
- YEL
^
BRN/BLK
-4
To A/C
PRESSURE
BLU RED
SWITCH
CONNECTORG
BLU RED
-BRN/BLK
- WHT/YEL
CONNECTORH
- BLK/YEL
CONNECTOR I
- WHT/YEL
-BRN/BLK
P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
5
CONNECTOR C
-WHT
CONNECTOR A
- WHT/GRN
CONNECTORB
- WHT/YEL
- YEL
- BLK/YEL
A30)
GRN/RED -
-GRN/RED
- BLK
CONNECTORD
. T o A/C
CLUTCH RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
FUSES
E : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K U P (7.5A)
F I I G MAIN (50A)
G : A C G S (15A)
H : S T O P (20A)
I: B A C K U P A C C (40A)
J : B A T T E R Y (100A)
11-38
'00-01 models:
)*
3=
toj)
MAP SENSOR
-
GRN/WHT JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
1
ECTSENSOR
To CLIMATE
C O N T R O L UNIT
-frte 1
3
f
(C27>-
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
EGR VALVE
POSITION
YEL/
BLU
SENSOR
- YEL/BLU
- WHT/BLIC- GRN/BLK
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
a
( T o p a g e 11-40
(cont'd)
11-39
,
I
.PH02S
(as)"
.
WHT*
-GRN/BLK - BLK/YEL3
BLK/WHT
PRIMARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 1)
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
BLK/YEL
C104
1RP 1
~vric
X
(eM2}-
SOLENOID
VALVE
VTEC PRESSURE
SWITCH
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
I0*
C107
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
3
3
W H T
11-40
TDC
SENSOR 1
TDC
SENSOR 2
CKP
SENSOR
T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R C L U T C H (TCC)
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY
SHIFT SOLENOID
(SS)
VALVE ASSEMBLY A
- GRN/WHT -
G R N
SHIFT SOLENOID
(SS)
VALVE ASSEMBLY C
3
MAINSHAFT S P E E D S E N S O R
3
COUNTERSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E
CLUTCH PRESSURE
(A/T)
CONTROL
AUTOMATIC T R A N S A X L E
(A/T)
(cont'd)
11-41
3
No. 1 I N J E C T O R
'
>
No. 2 I N J E C T O R
- YEL/BLK
lNJ3
,
BLU
No. 3 I N J E C T O R
- YEL/BLK
'K
No. 4 I N J E C T O R
-YEL/BLK -
'I?
No. 5 I N J E C T O R
13
No. 6 I N J E C T O R
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
11-42
2ND
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
3RD
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
To
IMMOBILIZER
UNIT
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
* 1 : '00 model
* 2 : '01 model
(cont'd)
11-43
- BLK/WHT
.
- GRN/BLK BLK/YEL - BLK/WHT -
SECONDARY
H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2)
i
- BLK/YEL
C302
-GRN/WHT E N G I N E MOUNT
CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
RED/YEL
RED/YEL
BLK/YEL
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE ALVE
[I
(A5>
CRUISE
C O N T R O L UNIT
IMMOBILIZER
INDICATOR
LIGHT
To
- >
TACHOMETER
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
- BLU
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
- BLU -
hL
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
- GRN - BLK -
* 2 : '01 model
11-44
From
RADIATOR FAN R E L A Y ,
RADIATOR FAN SWITCH
- LT GRN/WHT - BLK/YEL *
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
- YEL/'BLU
-LTGRN
-GRN/BLK
*5
FTP SENSOR
3
EVAP BYPASS
SOLENOID VALVE
0 0 E 0
CONNECTOR F
GRN/YEL/
BLK
BLU
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BLK/YEL
GRN/BLK'
YEL/BLU
CONNECTOR
YEL/BLU
GRN/BLK'
D
-
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
- WHT/YEL -
CONNECTOR J
- G R N / B L K '
YEL
BLK/YEL
-o<\>o
CONNECTORK
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
CONNECTOR A
IGNITION
SWITCH
ST O -
\ + B
FUSES
A : No. 11 IG C O I L (15 A)
B : No. 9 B A C K U P L I G H T
I N S T R U M E N T U G H T (7.5A)
C : No. 6 E C U ( P C M )
C R U I S E C O N T R O L (15A)
D ! No. 13 S T A R T E R S I G N A L
(7.5A)
E : No. 1 F U E L P U M P (15A)
( T o p a g e 11-46 )
(conf
11-
CONNECTOR I
1
- BRN
- BLU/ORN
CONNECTORM
-
RED/WHT
BLK/YEL
WHT/BLK'
-WHT/YEL
CONNECTORN
-
WHT
CONNECTORE
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
"1
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
- WHT/BLK
- WHT/YEL
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
(BPP) SWITCH
np a n
BLK/YEL BLK
C201
r- WHT/GRN A
WHT/GRN
YEL BLK
-BLK'
-BRN/BLK
~1
^{ATj}-^?
BLK
BRNBLK
C301
-BLU/ORN - GRN/YEL -
GRN/YEL
- BLK/YEL -
11-46
PGM-FI
MAIN R E L A Y
0
CONNECTOR B
BLK/YEL
- BLK/YEL
- YEL
B R N / B L K '1
To A / C
BLU/RED P R E S S U R E SWITCH
99t
CONNECTOR H
BLU/RED
BRN/BLK
WHT/YEL -
CONNECTOR I
- BLK/YEL
CONNECTOR J
- WHT/YEL
P A S S E N G E R ' S UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
CONNECTORC
WHT
CONNECTOR A
- WHT/GRN
OwO
CONNECTORB
-0-
- WHT/YEL
J
o--o
- YEL
ELD
>
t
_LL_
G202
FUSES
F : No. 13 C L O C K B A C K UP (7.5A)
G : i G MAIN (50A)
H I A C G S (15A)
I: S T O P (20A)
J : B A C K U P A C C (40A)
K : B A T T E R Y (100A)
UNDER-HOOD
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
(cont'd)
11-47
GAUGE
ASSEMBLY
11-48
- LT G R N -
"L.
3L
J
r
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT
PGM-FI System
Component Location Index
NOTE: The illustration shows '00 model.
/ELECTRICAL LOAD
' D E T E C T O R (ELD)
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-84
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
INTAKE AIR T E M P E R A T U R E
(IAT) S E N S O R
Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-50
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
Service Manual
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R
Troubleshooting,
p a g e 11-47
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d
Service Manual
TOP D E A D C E N T E R 1 (TDC1)/
T O P D E A D C E N T E R 2 (TDC2)
SENSOR
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , page 11-76
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) S E N S O R
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-73
11-50
THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) S E N S O R
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-54
a n d p a g e 11-56
n the '98-01 A c c o r d
Service Manual
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) S E N S O R
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-52
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
General Troubleshooting Information,
p a g e 11-3
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)
General Troubleshooting Information,
p a g e 11-3
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 11-90
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P0122: TP S e n s o r Circuit L o w Voltage
?
Go to step 4.
Y E S - G o to step 10.
NO
TP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
VCC2
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
4.5kQ?
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES
Go to step 11.
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
N O - R e p l a c e the throttle body.
NO
Go to step 19.
11. Disconnec the PCM connector C (31P) connector.
11-52
TP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
1 2 3 4
8 9 10
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
THL
OUT
(YEL/GRN)
TPS (RED/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Is there
continuity?
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
1 2 3 4
8 9 10
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
THL
OUT
(YEL/GRN)
Is there
11
24
P C M C O N N E C T O R C {3 IP)-
11
24
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
8 9 10
5 6 7
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
TPS (RED/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 15.
N O - G o t o step 17.
(cont'd)
11-53
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. At the wire harness side, check for continuity
between TP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and body ground.
TP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
8 9 10
5 6 r
16 17 18 19 20 21 /
29 30
26 27 28
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Is there approx.
5 V?
11-54
P H 0 2 S (WHT)
less?
Go to step 4.
Wire side of female terminals
continuity?
normal?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO
Is there
less?
Go to step 9.
11-55
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0132: Primary H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 1) Circuit
High Voltage
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
more?
P H 0 2 S (WHT)
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
P H 0 2 S (WHT)
SG2 (GRN/BLK)
Y E S - G o to step 9.
N O - R e p l a c e the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1 ) . B
11-56
5 6 7
8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 2S
29 30
J U M P E R WIRE
Y E S - G o to step 4.
Is there 0.9 V or
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
DTC P0133
indicated?
\)M
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0137: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit L o w Voltage
S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)
less?
Y E S - G o to step 4.
NOIntermittent failure, system is OK at this t i m e .
Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204
(located under the right side of the dash), C104
(located at the right side of the engine
compartment), the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) and
the P C M . B
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
6. Start the engine.
7. Check the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) output
voltage w i t h the scan tool.
Does the voltage stay at 0.3 V or
less?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
N O - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2 ) . f l
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (32P).
11-58
Is there
continuity?
DTC P0138: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit High Voltage
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
1
12 13 14 15
25 26 27
10
17 18 19 20 21
28 29 30
32
SH02S
J U M P E R WIRE
(WHT/RED)
more?
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
C(31P)
1
Y E S - G o to step 4.
24
23
12 13 14
23
25
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
more?
JUMPER WIRE
S G 2 (GRN/BLK)
S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)
more?
Y E S - G o to step 9.
N O - R e p l a c e the secondary H02S (Sensor 2). I
11-59
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0139: S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)
Circuit S l o w R e s p o n s e
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 r p m w i t h
no load (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan
comes o n .
3. Check the secondary H 02 S (Sensor 2) output
voltage at 3,000 r pm w i t h the scan tool.
Does the voltage stay within 0.3 0.8 V for
minutes?
two
11-60
indicated?
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NOIntermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at C204
(located under the right side of the dash), C104
(located at the right side of the engine
compartment), the primary H 0 2 S (Sensor 1), the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the P C M . B
Is there
W i r e side of
female terminals
continuity?
H 0 2 S 4P C O N N E C T O R
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
1 2
- 3 4 -
3 4
W i r e side of
female terminals
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
Wire side of
female terminals
Terminal side of
male terminals
Is there battery
Is there 5~ 15 Q (10-40
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
&)*
Y E S - G o to step 6.
N O - R e p l a c e the primary H02S (Sensor 1) or
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) * . B
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 9.
NO Repair open in the wire between the No. 6
ECU (PCM) CRUISE CONTROL (15A) fuse and the
H02S.B
(cont'd)
11-61
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Reconnect the H02S (primary or secondary * )
(Sensor 1, Sensor 2 * ) 4P connector.
S02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
P02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
- 3
/
W i r e side of
female terminals
12 13 14
23
T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
25
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
28 27 28
29 30
S 0 2 S H T C (BLK/WHT)
Is there
continuity?
12 13 14 15
Y E S - G o t o step 11.
NO
25 26 27
S02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
Wire side of
female terminals
Is there
- 3
Terminal side of
male terminals
continuity?
11-62
10
17 18 19 20 21
28 29 30
23
|
24
32
G o t o step 13.
P02SHTC
(BLK/WHT)
Is there battery
voltage?
D T C P0300: R a n d o m misfire
and a n y combination of the following:
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder misfire
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder misfire
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder misfire
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder misfire
DTC P0305: No. 5 Cylinder misfire
DTC P0306: No. 6 Cylinder misfire
NOTE:
If the misfiring is frequent enough to trigger detection of increased emissions during t w o consecutive driving cycles,
the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored.
If the misfiring is frequent enough to damage the catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfiring occurs, and DTC
P0300 (and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the misfiring stops, the MIL will remain
on.
1. Troubleshoot the f o l l o w i n g DTCs first if any of them were stored along w i t h the random misfire DTC(s):
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: MAP Sensor
P0131, P0132: Primary H02S
P0171, P0172: Fuel metering
P 0 4 0 1 , P1491, P1498: EGR System
P0505: Idle control system
P1259: VTEC System
P1361, P1362, P1366, P1367: TDC 1/TDC 2 Sensor
P1519: IAC Valve
2. Test-drive the vehicle to verify the s y m p t o m .
3. Find the s y m p t o m in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the sequence listed, until you find the
cause.
Symptom
Random misfire only
at low RPM and
under load
Random misfire only
during acceleration
Random misfire at
high RPM and under
load, or under
random conditions
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Procedure(s)
Check fuel pressure (see page 11-89).
Inspect the distributor ignition housing.*
Malfunction in the
VTEC system (see
page 6-9).
Correct valve
clearance (see page
6-13).
*: '98-99 models
11-63
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ('98-99
models)
models)
models)
Y E S - G o to step 10.
whose
Does it
click?
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
N O - G o to step 19.
Is it OK?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
N O - R e p l a c e the faulty ignition wire
Y E S - G o to step 16.
11-64
Is there battery
whose
YES
voltage?
Go to step 23.
N O - G o to step 3 1 .
Y E S Replace the faulty injector
(see page 11-80).
N O - G o to step 17.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
OK ?
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
1
INJ
2
IGP
Is there 10 Q - 13 Q ?
YES
Go to step 26.
INJ2 (RED)
9
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
2
10
20
3 4 5
6 7 8
17 18
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
23 24 25
INJ1
(BRN)
X X
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
Cv) Cv)
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
(cont'd)
11-65
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
30. Determine w h i c h cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder
injector was
exchanged?
INJ2 (RED)
10
20
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
21 22
INJ1
(BRN)
X X
11 12 13 14 15
17 18
2 3 24 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
2
IGP
(YEL/BLK)
DTC
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 35.
INJ
JUMPER WIRE
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
11-66
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
INJ4 (YEL)
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
10
12 13 14 15
20
21 2 2
1NJ1
(BRN)
7
17
23 2 4 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
11-
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01
models)
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire ('00-01
models)
whose
NO
Go to step 9.
click?
13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
YES - G o t o step 4.
N O - Go to step 3 1 .
NO
whose
Go to step 14.
11-68
18. Check the DTC and the Temporary DTC with the
scan tool.
GND
(BLK)
Y E S - G o to step 19.
NO Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the
injector connector (no misfire at this t i m e ) . B
19. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the other cylinder
injector was
exchanged?
whose
Js there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 26.
NO Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil and G101 (or G102).B
N O - G o to step 20.
20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
29 30
26 27 28
/
/
I1,
IG1
(BLK/YEL)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
C4
C14
C3
C13
C12
C23
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
Y E S - G o to step 24.
Is there
NO Repair open or short in the wire between the
No. 11 COIL (15 A) fuse and the ignition c o i l . S
continuity?
11-69
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Connect the ignition coil 3P connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire (see
table).
OK?
JUMPER WIRE
NO
W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s
DTC
i
|
I
|
:
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGPLS1 (YEL/GRN)
11 12 13 14
21 22
10
20
INJ2 (RED)
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
INJ1
(BRN)
23
17
24 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
(V) (V)
(V) (Y)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
DTC
3
4
5
6
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
Is there
continuity?
No.
No.
No.
No.
YES
PCM
TERMINAL
C4
C14~
1
C3
C13
C12
C23
WIRE
COLOR
YEL/GRN
BLU/RED^
WHT/BLU
BRN
BLK/RED
BRN/WHT
G o t o step 30.
11-70
PROBLEM
CYLINDER i
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
I
No. 6
!
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
Is there battery
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 35.
N O - G o to step 43.
35. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
36. Disconnect the injector 2P connector on the
problem cylinder.
37.
46.
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
IGP
(YEL/BLK)
Is there 10 Q - 13 Q?
Is there battery
YES
G o t o step 38.
NO- Replace the injector (see page 11-82).
Y E S - G o t o step 47.
voltage?
INJ2 (RED)
10
20
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
YES
G o t o step 42.
NO- Intermittent misfire due to injector fouling,
etc.B
11 12 13 14 15
|
INJ1
(BRN)
21 22
17 18
2 3 24 25
INJ3
(BLU)
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
whose
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
YES
Repair short in the wire between the PCM
and the injector. B
NO
G o t o step 49.
11 71
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
49. Connect the injector 2P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table).
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ
JUMPER WIRE
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No. 4
No. 5
No. 6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
INJ2 (RED)
10
20
INJ5
(BLK/
RED)
/ 17
2 3 24 25
11 12 13 14 15
INJ1
(BRN)
21 22
INJ3
(BLU)
18
INJ6
(WHT/
BLU)
(o) (a)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
PROBLEM
CYLINDER
No. 1
No. 2
No. 3
No 4
No. 5
No. 6
Is there
DTC
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0305
P0306
PCM
TERMINAL
B11
B5
B15
B4
B3
B6
WIRE
COLOR
BRN
RED
BLU
YEL
BLK/RED
WHT/BLU
continuity?
11-72
interruption
C K P S E N S O R 2P C O N K l E C T O R
CKPP
indicated?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
N O - Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
CKP sensor and the PCM.
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals
continuity?
N O - G o to step 7.
7. Reconnect the CKP sensor 2P connector.
8. Disconnect PCM connector C (31P).
9. Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals C8 and C9.
CKPP
CKPM
PCM
CONNECTOR C
(31P)
CKPP
T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there 1,850-2,450
Q?
Y E S - Go to step 6.
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
CKPM
8 9 10
5 6 7
16 17 18 19 20 21
29 30
26 27 28
Is there 1,850-2,450
Q?
Y E S - G o to step 10.
N O - R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (C8,
C9) and the CKP sensor.
(cont'd)
11-73
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminal C8.
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
CKPP (BLU)
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23 25
8 9 10
5 6 7
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28 29 30
Is there
continuity?
11-74
is
is
11-75
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P1361: TDC1 Sensor Intermittent
Interruption
T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
TDC1P
TDC1M
DTC
P1361,
P1362,
P1366
or P1367
indicated?
Terminal side of male terminals
Y E S - G o to step3.
Is there
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.
Check for poor connections or loose wires at the
TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor and the PCM.
continuity?
T D C 1 / T D C 2 S E N S O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (31P)
TDC1P
TDC1M
TDC2P
TDC2M
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
SENSOR
DTC
TDC1
P1361
P1362
P1366
P1367
TDC2
Is there 1,850-2,450
SENSOR
TERMINAL
1
2
3
4
PCM
TERMINAL
C20
C21
C29
C30
WIRE
COLOR
GRN
RED
YEL
BLK
Q?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
N O - R e p l a c e the TDC 1/TDC 2 sensor (see page 655).
11-76
Is there 1,850-2,450
Q?
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
I 5 9 10
12 13 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
23 / 25 26 27 28 29 30 /
Is there
continuity?
11-77
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P1676: F P T D R S i g n a l Line Malfunction
1. Do the PCM Reset Procedure.
Is DTC P1676
indicated?
10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
22 23
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
32
24
Y E S - G o to step 3.
FPTDR (GRN/RED)
0 )
1 2
4
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 7.
5. Check for continuity between body gound and PCM
connector terminal A22.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2
25 26 2 7
28 29 30 31
10
11
23
24
32
FPTDR
(GRN/RED)
PCM CONNECTORS
A (32P)
5 6 7
8 9
10
12(13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1
3 4
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
C(31P)
continuity?
JUMPER
WIRE
1 2 3 4
12 13 14
23
25
32
FPTDR
(GRN/RED)
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
11
24
5 6 7
8 9 10
17 18 19 20 21
16
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
indicated?
11-78
indicated?
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
'98-99 models:
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake manifold.
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose and fuel return hose from the fuel pressure regulator (B). Place a rag or shop towel
over the hoses before disconnecting them.
5. Disconnect the fuel hose (C) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the retainer bolts (E) from the fuel rails and harness holders (F), then replace the O-rings (G).
7. Disconnect the fuel rails.
8. Remove the injectors from the fuel rails.
11-80
10. Coat new O-rings (C) with clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
11. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.
12. Coat new seal rings (E) with clean engine oil, and press them into the intake manifold.
13. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake manifold.
14. Install and tighten the retainer bolts.
15. Connect the fuel hose to the fuel rail with new washers.
16. Connect the v a c u u m hose and fuel return hose to the fuel pressure regulator.
17. Install the connectors on the injectors and harness holders.
18. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-81
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont'd)
'00-01 models:
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-88).
2. Remove the intake manifold covers and the intake m a n i f o l d .
3. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the injectors (A).
4. Remove the retainer bolts (D) f r o m the fuel rails (C) and harness holders (E), then replace the O-rings (F).
5. Disconnect the fuel rails.
6. Remove the injectors f r o m the fuel rails.
11-82
8. Coat new O-rings (C) w i t h clean engine oil, and put them on the injectors.
9. Insert the injectors into the fuel rails (D) first.
10. Coat new seal rings (E) w i t h clean engine oil, and press t h e m into the intake manifold.
11. To prevent damage to the O-rings, install the fuel injectors in the fuel rails first, then install them in the intake
manifold.
12. Install bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Install the intake manifold and the intake manifold cover.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for approximately 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this 2 or 3 times, then check for fuel leakage.
11-83
PGM-FI Sy stem
Primary H02S Replacement
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 33 Ibfft)
Ibfft)
2. Install the secondary H02S in the reverse order of
removal.
11-84
11-85
NOTE:
Leave the IAC valve connected.
Before setting the idle speed, check these items:
- The MIL has not been reported on.
- Ignition t i m i n g
- Spark plugs
- Air cleaner
- PCV system
2. Connect a tachometer.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm w i t h
no load (transmission in Park or neutral position)
until the radiator fan comes o n , then let it idle.
4. Check the idle speed w i t h no-load conditions:
headlights, blower fan, rear defogger, radiator fan,
and air conditioner are not operating.
Idle speed should be:
680 + 50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
5. Adjust the idle speed, if necessary, by turning the
idle adjusting screw (A) 1/4-turn clockwise or
counterclockwise.
NOTE: Do not turn the idle adjusting screw more
than 1/4-turn w i t h o u t checking the idle speed.
11-86
F U E L FILL C A P
F U E L V A P O R PIPE
F U E L RAIL
FUEL PUMP
Test, p a g e 11-115
n the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-122
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
FUEL FILTER
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-121
n the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
FUEL G A U G E SENDING UNIT
Test, p a g e 11-94
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-127
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
FUEL TANK
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-123
in the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
F U E L R E T U R N PIPE
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
R e p l a c e m e n t f o r ' 9 8 - 9 9 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-92
R e p l a c e m e n t f o r '00-01 m o d e l s , p a g e 11-93
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
11-87
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper (A) one
complete turn.
NOTE: Replace all washers whenever the fuel
pulsation damper is loosened or removed.
11-88
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write down the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the battery negative cable f r o m the
battery negative terminal.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Use a wrench on the fuel pulsation damper (A) at
the fuel rail.
B
5. Place a rag or shop towel (B) over the fuel pulsation
damper.
6. Slowly loosen the fuel pulsation damper 1
complete turn.
7. Remove the fuel pulsation damper f r o m its fitting,
and attach the fuel pressure gauge attachment.
11-89
11-90
11-92
NOTE:
Replace the O-ring.
W h e n assembling the fuel pressure regulator,
apply clean engine oil to the O-ring and assemble
it into its proper position, taking care not to
damage the O-ring.
'00-01 models:
11-93
VVV
JUMPER
WIRE
2Q
RESISTOR
(YEL/BLU)
2
5
11-94
4T>
THROTTLE BODY
Test, p a g e 11-96
R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 11-99
D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 11-100
11-95
A973X-041-XXXXX
11-96
11-97
11-98
'98-99 models:
11-99
'00-01 models:
11-100
"98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
1. Start the engine, then let it idle.
NOTE: Engine coolant temperature must be below
104F(40C).
11-101
PCV System
PCV Valve Inspection and Test
1. Check the PCV valve (A) and hoses (B) and
connections for leaks and restrictions.
'98-99 models:
'00-01 models:
11-102
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) C A N I S T E R
E V A P O R A T I V E EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) B Y P A S S
SOLENOID VALVE
E V A P O R A T I V E E M I S S I O N (EVAP) T W O - W A Y V A L V E
Test, p a g e 11-158
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
11-103
Automatic Transmission
Transmission End Cover
Automatic Transmission
Special Tools
14-2
System Description
14-3
14-7
14-8
14-18
DTC Troubleshooting
S Indicator Light Circuit
Troubleshooting
Interlock S y s t e m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit
14-64
14-93
14-96
14-99
Road Test
14-101
S t a l l Speed Test
14-103
Pressure Tests
14-104
14-106
14-106
14-107
14-107
14-108
14-109
14-110
14-111
Shift L e v e r R e m o v a l
Shift L e v e r Installation
14-111
14-112
14-113
14-114
14-121
14-127
14-128
14-129
14-130
14-132
Shift C a b l e R e p l a c e m e n t
14-133
14-136
Transmission Removal
T r a n s m i s s i o n Installation
Circuit Diagram
Transmission Range Switch Test
14-138
14-139
14-140
14-141
14-143
14-144
14-145
14-146
14-147
14-149
14-149
Shift L o c k S o l e n o i d R e p l a c e m e n t
14-150
14-150
Circuit Diagram
14-151
14-153
14-195
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft A s s e m b l i e s R e m o v a l
Bearing Replacement
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
14-154
14-156
14-192
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Valve Body Repair
V a l v e B o d y V a l v e Installation
M a i n V a l v e Body D i s a s s e m b l y ,
Inspection a n d R e a s s e m b l y
A T F P u m p Inspection
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly,
Inspection a n d R e a s s e m b l y
Servo Body Disassembly,
I n s p e c t i o n and R e a s s e m b l y
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection
and Reassembly
Valve Bodies a n dA T F Strainer
Installation
14-157
14-159
14-160
14-161
14-163
14-164
14-165
14-166
14-190
14-167
14-168
14-168
14-169
14-170
14-171
14-172
14-173
14-175
14-176
14-177
14-179
14-180
14-183
14-185
A / T Differential
A / T interlock System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
14-201
Backlash I n s p e c t i o n
14-201
Final Driven G e a r / C a r r i e r R e p l a c e m e n t
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Oil S e a l R e p l a c e m e n t
Carrier Bearing Outer Race R e p l a c e m e n t
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
14-202
14-202
14-203
14-204
14-205
Automatic Transmission
Special Tools
Ref.No.
**
***
14-2
Tool Number
07GAB-PF50101 or 07GAB-PF50100
07GAD-PG40101 or 07GAD-PG4010G
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
07HAC-PK40102
07HAJ-PK40201
07JAD-PH80101
07JAD-PH80400
07LAD-PW50601
07LAE-PX40100
07MAJ-PY4011A
07MAJ-PY40120
07NAD-PX40100
07SAZ-001000A
07WAZ-002010A
07406-0020400
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
07746-0010300
07746-0010500
07746-0010600
07746-0030100
07749-0010000
07947-6340500
Description
Mainshaft Holder
Seal Driver Attachment
Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly
Housing Puller
Preload Inspection Tool
Oil Seal Driver Attachment
Pilot 2 8 x 3 0 mm
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm
Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment
A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm
A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm
BackprobeSet
S C S Service Connector (DLC)
A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set W/Panel
Adjustable Bearing Puller, 2 5 - 4 0 mm
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm
Attachment, 62 x 68 mm
Attachment, 72 x 75 mm
Driver 40 mm I.D.
Driver
Driver Attachment
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
@@
<3
General Troubleshooting Information
How to Check for DTCs with the PGM Tester/Scan Tool
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the (H indicator light in the gauge assembly will
blink. W h e n the 16P Data Link Connector (DLC) (located next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester as s h o w n , the scan tool or tester will indicate the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON(II).
HONDA P G M T E S T E R or
OBD II S C A N T O O L
If the E indicator light or the MIL has been reported o n , or if a driveability problem is suspected, f o l l o w this procedure:
1. Connect the OBD II Scan Tool (conforming to SAE J1978) or Honda PGM Tester to the 16P DLC. (See the OBD II
Scan Tool or Honda PGM Tester user's manual for specific instructions. If you are using the Honda PGM Tester,
make sure it is set to the SAE DTC type.)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and observe the DTC on the screen.
3. Record all fuel and emission DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700). DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
5. Get the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n the radio station presets.
6. Reset the m e m o r y w i t h the PGM Tester or by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box for more than 10 seconds.
7. Drive the vehicle for several minuites in the freeze data conditions or at speeds over 30mph (50 km/hr), and then
recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC returns, go to the DTC Troubleshooting Index on page 14-7. If the DTC does not
return, there was an intermittent problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight,
and then go to step 8.
8. Enter the radio code, reset the radio preset stations, and set the clock.
(cont'd)
14-3
Automatic Transmission
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Check for DTCs
W h e n the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or output systems, the H indicator light in the gauge assembly will
usually blink and/or the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may come on. W h e n the Data Link Connector (DLC) (located
next to the driver's side kick panel) is connected to the Honda PGM Tester, the B indicator light will blink the
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
W h e n the B indicator light has been reported on, connect the Honda PGM Tester to the DLC. Turn the ignition switch
ON (II), select Honda Systems, and then the SCS m o d e , then observe the H indicator light.
IS I N D I C A T O R L I G H T
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a series of long and
short blinks. One long blink equals 10 short blinks. A d d the long and short blinks together to determine the code. After
determining the code, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index.
S h o r t blink (once)
OFF
See DTC 1
OFF
See DTC 2
L o n g blink
OFF
S h o r t b l i n k s (five t i m e s )
S e e D T C 15
If the IS indicator light or the MIL has been reported on, or if a driveability problem, follow this procedure:
1. Record all fuel/emissions DTCs, A/T DTCs, and freeze data.
2. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC (except for
DTC P0700), DTC P0700 means there is one or more A/T DTC, and no problems were detected in the fuel and
emissions circuit of the PCM.
3. Get the customer's radio anti-theft code, and write d o w n the numbers of the radio station presets.
4. Reset the m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more than 10
seconds.
5. Drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed over 30 m p h (50 km/h), and then recheck for DTCs.
If the DTC returns, refer to the DTC Troubleshooting Index. If the DTC does no return, there was an intermittent
problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight, then go to step 6.
6. Enter the radio code, reset the preset stations, and reset the clock.
14-4
07SAZ-001000A
A
07SAZ-001000A
(cont'd)
14-5
Automatic Transmission
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Reset the PCM
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n the radio station presets.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Use one of these methods to reset the PCM m e m o r y :
Use the OBD II Scan Tool or the Honda PGM Tester.
Remove the BACK UP fuse (7.5 A)(A) f r o m the passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box (B) for 10 seconds.
14-6
H Indicator
Light
MIL
r
Detection Item
Page
P0715O5)
Blinks
ON
P0720 (9)
Blinks
ON
P0730(41)
OFF
ON
P0740 (40)
OFF
ON
P0753 (7)
Blinks
ON
P0758 (8)
Blinks
ON
P0763 (22)
Blinks
ON
P0780 (45)
Blinks
ON
P1705 (5)
Blinks
ON
P1706 (6)
OFF
ON
P1738 (25)
OFF
OFF
P1739 (26)
OFF
OFF
P1750(46)
Blinks
ON
P1751 (47)
Blinks
ON
P1753 0 )
Blinks
ON
P1768(16)
Blinks
ON
P1773 (23)
Blinks
ON
The DTC in the parentheses is the flash code the H indicator light indicates w h e n the Data Link Connector (DLC) is
connected to the Honda PGM Tester.
NOTE: Codes P0780 (45), P1750 (46), and P1751 (47) are applied to the '00-01 models.
14-7
Automatic Transmission
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
These s y m p t o m s DO NOT trigger Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) or cause the E indicator light to blink. If the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) w a s reported ON or the S indicator light has been blinking, check for DTCs. But if
the vehicle has one of the s y m p t o m s in the f o l l o w i n g chart, check the probable causes(s) for it, in the sequence listed,
until y o u find the problem.
Symptom
Probable cause(s)
Notes
14-8
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Engine runs, but
vehicle does not
move in any gear
10.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Notes
(cont'd)
14-9
Automatic Transmission
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Vehicle moves in S3,
H, [EEL but not in
[3 position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Vehicle moves in H,
HI/but not in
SI position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
14-10
Notes
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
flares on starting off
in fi and H
positions:
Stall speed high in E ,
E, HI, and \%1
positions
Poor acceleration;
flares on starting off
in B and H
positions:
Stall speed high in S ,
fi, and GO positions
Poor acceleration;
flares on starting off
in M position:
Stall speed is in
specification in E , S ,
1JD, and US positions,
but high in El
position
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2,
1.
2.
Notes
Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
transmission control shaft.
Check 1st clutch pressure.
Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
transmission control shaft.
Check 2nd clutch pressure.
Inspect the clutch piston and O-rings. Check the
spring retainer for wear and damage. Inspect the
clutch end plate-to-top disc clearance. If the clearance
is out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates
for wear and damage. If the discs and plates are worn
or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are OK,
adjust the clutch end plate clearance.
(cont'd)
14-11
Automatic Transmission
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Poor acceleration;
Stall speed low
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Vehicle moves in El
position
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
14-12
Notes
Excessive ATF
Foreign material in
separator plate orifice
1st clutch defective
2nd clutch defective
3rd clutch defective
4th clutch defective
Clutch clearance incorrect
Needle bearing seized up,
w o r n , or damaged
Thrust washer seized up,
w o r n , or damaged
<2
Symptom
Late shift f r o m M
position to H and E
positions
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Notes
(cont'd)
14-13
Automatic Transmission
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
No shift
Erratic shifting gears;
Fails to shift in I B
position; does not
upshift to 4th
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
Excessive shock, or
flares on all upshifts
and downshifts
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Excessive shock or
flares on 1-2 upshift
or 2-1 downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
14-14
Notes
Measure line pressure.
Symptom
Excessive shock, or
flares on 2-3 upshift
or 3-2 downshift
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Excessive shock, or
flares on 3-4 upshift
or 4-3 downshift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Noise f r o m
transmission in all
shift lever positions
1.
2.
Notes
ATF p u m p w o r n or binding
Torque converter housing
or transmission housing
bearing w o r n or damaged
(cont'd)
14-15
Automatic Transmission
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
Probable cause(s)
Symptom
Vibration in all shift
lever positions
1.
2.
3.
Transmission does
not shift into E
position
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
14-16
Notes
Set idle rpm in gear to the specified idle speed. If still
no g o o d , adjust the engine mounts as outlined in the
engine section of the service manual.
Check the stall speed.
Check for a loose shift cable on the shift lever and the
transmission control shaft.
Check the park pawl spring installation and the park
lever spring installation. If installation is incorrect,
install the spring correctly. Make sure that the park
lever stop is not installed upside d o w n . Check the
distance between the park pawl and the park lever
roller pin. If the distance is out of tolerance, adjust the
distance w i t h the park lever stop.
Symptom
Lock-up clutch does
not operate smoothly
Probable cause(s)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.
2.
3.
Speedometer does
not operate
Notes
14-17
Automatic Transmission
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a 3-element torque converter and triple-shaft electronically controlled
automatic transmission w h i c h provides 4 speeds f o r w a r d and 1 reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line w i t h the
engine.
Torque Converter, Gears, and Clutches
The torque converter consists of a p u m p , turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. They are connected to the
engine crankshaft so they turn together as a unit as the engine turns. A r o u n d the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes w i t h the starter pinion w h e n the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has three parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, and the secondary shaft. The mainshaft is in line w i t h the engine crankshaft. The
mainshaft includes the 3rd and 4th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, reverse, and idler (reverse gear is integral w i t h the
4th gear). The countershaft includes the final drive, 1st, 3rd, 4th, reverse, 2nd, park, and idler gears (the final drive gear
is integral w i t h the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st and 2nd clutches, and gears for 1st, 2nd and
idler. The countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its center,
providing 4th gear or reverse, depending w i t h w h i c h w a y the selector m o v e d . The gears on the mainshaft and the
secondary shaft are in constant mesh w i t h those on the countershaft. When certain combinations of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted f r o m the mainshaft and the secondary shaft to the
countershaft to provide H, 33, HI, LE and El positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), sensors, and six solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located
below the dashboard, under the f r o n t lower panel behind the center console.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body, and the accumulator body.
They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve,
the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve E, the servo control valve, the torque converter check valve, the
reverse CPC valve, the lock-up shift valve, the relief valve, the cooler check valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The
regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the lock-up t i m i n g valve, and the lock-up control valve. The servo
body contains the servo valve, the shift valve A, the shift valve B, the CPC valves A and B, and 3rd and 4th
accumulators. The accumulator body contains the 1st and 2nd accumulators and lubrication check valve. Fluid f r o m
the regulator passes through the manual valve to the various control valves. The 1st, 3rd, and 4th clutches receive
fluid f r o m their respective feed pipes, and the 2nd clutch receives fluid f r o m the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B while
receiving input signal f r o m various sensors located throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the
positions of the shift valves to switch the port leading hydraulic pressure to the clutch. The A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift smoothly between lower gear and higher gear. This
pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
In H position (3rd and 4th), and S3 position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the t i m i n g of the lock-up mechanism. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up on and off. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve control the range of
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are all controlled by the PCM.
14-18
Gear Selection
The shift lever has seven positions: B PARK, S REVERSE, M NEUTRAL, B 1st through 4th gear ranges, H 1st through
3rd gear ranges, [2] 2nd gear, and |T) 1st gear.
Description
Position
E PARK
Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All clutches released.
mREVERSE
Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 4th clutch locked.
I I NEUTRAL
B DRIVE
(1st through 4th)
General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, then 4th, depending on
vehicle speed and throttle position. Downshift through 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to
stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd and 4th gears.
B DRIVE
(1st through 3rd)
Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving; up-hill and down-hill
driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd, depending on vehicle speed and
throttle position.
Downshifts through 2nd to 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 3rd
gear.
(U SECOND
Used for engine braking or better traction starting off on loose or slippery surfaces; stays in
2nd gear; does not shift up or d o w n .
DO FIRST
Used for engine braking; stays in 1st gear; does not shift up.
Starting is possible only in OB and M positions through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transaxle (A/T) Gear Position Indicator
The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows which gear has been selected without having to look
down at the console.
(cont'd)
14-19
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Clutches
The four-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 2nd clutch. The 1st clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the middle of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
joined back-to-back to the 1st clutch. The 2nd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a
circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 3rd clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 3rd clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the mainshaft.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
4th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 3rd clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe
within the mainshaft.
14-20
PITOT FLANGE
('00-01 m o d e l s
MAINSHAFT
4TH G E A R
4TH CLUTCH
3RD CLUTCH
RING GEAR
LUBRICATION
P I T O T PIPE
('00-01 m o d e l s
TORQUE CONVERTER
LOCK-UP CLUTCH
PISTON
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
P I T O T PIPE
('00-01 m o d e l s )
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE
SELECTOR H U B
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
DRIVE PLATE
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER G E A R
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
(cont'd)
14-21
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Power Flow
POSITION
TORQUE
CONVERTER
OS
m
m
B
1ST
2ND
3RD
4TH
1ST
2ND
3RD
m
m
1ST GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
2ND GEAR
2ND
CLUTCH
PART
3RD GEAR
3RD
CLUTCH
GEAR
4TH
CLUTCH
REVERSE
GEAR
PARK
GEAR
O
O
OiOperates
X-.Doesn't operate
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
The 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 3rd clutch.
The 4th gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The reverse gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
The idler gear is splined w i t h the mainshaft and rotates w i t h the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft
The final drive gear is integral w i t h the countershaft.
The 1st gear, 3rd gear, 2nd gear, and park gear are splined w i t h the countershaft and rotate w i t h the countershaft.
The 4th gear and reverse gear rotate freely f r o m the countershaft. The reverse selector engages the 4th gear or the
reverse gear w i t h the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined w i t h the countershaft so that the 4th
gear or reverse gear engage w i t h the countershaft.
The idler gear rotates freely f r o m the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft
The 1st gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch.
The 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged w i t h the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
The idler gear is splined w i t h the secondary shaft and rotates w i t h the secondary shaft.
14-22
OB Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
HI Position
Engine power transmitted f r o m the torque converter drives the mainshaft idler gear, the countershaft idler gear, and
the secondary shaft idler gear, but hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted t o the
countershaft. The countershaft 4th gear is engaged w i t h the reverse selector hub and the countershaft by the reverse
selector, w h e n the shift lever is shifted in El position f r o m B position. The countershaft reverse gear is engaged when
shifted f r o m E position.
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
14-23
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
In H or H position, the o p t i m u m gear is automatically selected f r o m the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears, according to
conditions such as the balance between the throttle opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
S or H Position in 1st gear and 0Q Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear w i t h the
secondary shaft.
The mainshaft idler gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
14-24
(cont'd)
14-25
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
B or B Position in 3rd gear
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the mainshaft 3rd gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the countershaft 3rd gear and the countershaft.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVEN G E A R
14-26
(cont'd)
14-27
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Power Flow (cont'd)
SB Position
Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector w i t h the countershaft (reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the OH position).
Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear w i t h the
mainshaft.
The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
The rotation direction of the countershaft reverse gear is changed via the reverse idler gear.
The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, w h i c h in turn drives the final driven gear.
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
REVERSE SELECTOR
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
FINAL DRIVEN G E A R
14-28
Throttle Position S e n s o r
Signal
Data Link C o n n e c t o r
PGM-FI
Control S y s t e m
A / T Control S y s t e m
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e A
INTERLOCK
CONTROL UNIT
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e B
Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e C
Shift C o n t r o l
D4
D3
2nd Clutch Pressure
Switch
>4
Lock-up C o n t r o l
3rd C l u t c h P r e s s u r e
Switch
H Indicator Light
Mainshaft S p e e d S e n s o r
Signal
Self-Diagnosis Signal
Self-Diagnosis
Function
Countershaft S p e e d
Sensor Signal
(cont'd)
14-29
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Electronic Controls Location
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
2ND
CLUTCH PRESSURE
SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E C
14-30
Shift Control
Shifting is related to engine torque through the solenoid valves, which are controlled by the PCM. The PCM instantly
determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent f r o m sensors, and actuates the shift solenoid valves
A, B, and C to control shifting. Also, a Grade Logic Control System to controls shifting in E and B positions while the
vehicle is ascending or descending a slope, or reducing speed.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, and C is s h o w n in the table below.
Position
B,S
B
m
m
m
Gear position
Shifting f r o m M position
Stays in 1st
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd
Stays in 2nd
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd
Stays in 3rd
Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th
Stays in 4th
2nd
1st
A
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Lock-up Control
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve controls modulator pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up
ON and OFF. The PCM controls the torque converter clutch solenoid valve and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B. When the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned O N , the condition of lock-up starts. The A/T
clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B regulate A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure, and apply the
pressure to the lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve. The lock-up control mechanism operates in 3rd, and
4th gear in B and in 3rd gear in B positions.
(cont'd)
14-31
automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Grade Logic Control System
How it works:
The PCM compares actual driving conditions w i t h memorized driving conditions, based on the input f r o m the
countershaft speed sensor, the throttle position sensor, the engine coolant temperature sensor, the brake pedal
position switch signal, and the shift level position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or
descending a slope, or reducing speed.
SENSORS/SWITCHES
SIGNALS DETECTED
PCM
Countershaft Speed
Sensor
Throttle Position
Sensor
Driving
Resistance
Calculation
of a c t u a l
acceleration
o
c
">
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor
Transmission Range
Switch
Coolant Temperature
D e t e c t i o n of
standard
acceleration
(in M e m o r y )
Calculation
of d e c e l e r a tion
C a l c u l a t i o n of g r a d i e n t
o r IPJI P o s i t i o n
S e l e c t i o n of S h i f t i n g M o d e
X
N o r m a l M o d e (Flat r o a d m o d e )
Ascending Mode
Fuzzy Logic
Descending Mode
> Gradual Descending Mode
Steep Descending Mode
Deceleration Mode
Automatic 4 Speeds
14-32
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in B and E positions, the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear and 3rd gear to prevent the transmission f r o m frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more power w h e n needed.
NOTE:
Shift schedules stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, and between 3rd and 4th gears, enable the PCM's
fuzzy logic to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
Fuzzy logic is a f o r m of artificial intelligence that lets computers respond to changing conditions much like a human
mind w o u l d .
100%
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in B and B positions, the shift-up speed f r o m 3rd to
4th gear and f r o m 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road driving to
widen the 3rd gear and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination w i t h engine braking f r o m the deceleration lock-up,
achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are t w o descending modes w i t h different 3rd gear
driving areas and 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. W h e n the
vehicle is in 4th gear, and you are decelerating w h e n you are applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will
downshift to 3rd gear. W h e n you accelerate, the transmission will then return to higher gear.
100%
3RD44TH
Vehicle speed
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating f r o m
speeds above 27 mph (43 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission f r o m 4th to 2nd earlier than normal to cope w i t h
upcoming acceleration.
(cont'd)
14-33
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections
PGM-FI
MAIN
RELAY
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
IG1
3 -
(+)
PG1
PG2
TTT
. LS A
IGP1
1GP2
VBU
LS B
VCC2
TPS
SG2
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
SHA
PGM-FI
CONTROL
SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
LG1
I TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
' VALVE
LG2
77T
IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 -
VBSOL
VSS OUT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
NMSG
NC
COUNTERSHAFT
'SPEED SENSOR*
NCSG
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (DRIVER'S)
ILU
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
824 C9 -99l
D13 (00-01)
8
3RD CLUTCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
('01 model)
PCM Connector Terminal Locations
(1) 2
(7)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
25 26 27
A (32P)
4-34
28 29 30 (31)
10 (11)
23 24
/
/
/ /A
32
25
3 (25P)
C(31P)
10
/
30
/
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29
D(16P)
3 4
10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
23
25 26 27
28 29 30
/
24
32
1
9
/
B
(32P)
3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
1 2
16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
/ / /
/
C(31P)
(25P)
6 7
9 10
29 30
/
/
7 8
13 14 15
9 10 11 12
16
D (16P)
Wire
Signal
Description
BLU/GRN
CRS
A9
BLU/WHT
VSSOUT
A10
BRN
SCS
A14
GRN/BLK
D4IND
A28
WHT/RED
ILU
A32
WHT/BLK
BKSW
Interlock control
(cont'd)
14-35
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs
(1) 2 3 4
5 6 (7)
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27
28 29 30 (31)
32
6 7 8
3 4 5
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
5 6 7
// //
/ A25
C(31P)
B (25P)
A (32P)
1 2
8 9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 28
29 30
/
/
2 3
6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
16
D(16P)
Wire
Signal
Description
YEL/BLK
IGP1
B2
B8
BLK
WHT
LS A -
B9
YEL/BLK
IGP2
B10
B14
C98-99)
B14
('00-01)
BLK
BLU/BLK
PG2
OP2SW
BLU/BLK
ATPNP
B17
RED
LSA+
B18
GRN
LSB -
B20
B21
B22
LG1
VBU
LG2
B24
BRN/BLK
WHT/YEL
BLK
C98-99)
BRN/BLK
('00-01)
BLU/WHT
OP3SW
B25
ORN
LSB +
14-36
PG1
<S0
PCM CONNECTOR D (16P)
Terminal
Number
D1
Wire
Signal
Description
YEL
LC
D2
GRN/WHT
SHB
D3
GRN
SHC
D4
D5
BLK/YEL
VBSOL
D6
WHT
ATPR
D7
BLU/YEL
SHA
Not used
Power supply for solenoid
valves (Fuse No.6 in driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box)
Transmission range switch H
position input
Shift solenoid valve A control
(cont'd)
14-37
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
PCM Inputs and Outputs
3 4
(1) 2
6 (7)
25 26 27
28 29 30 (31)
10 (11)
24
10 11 12 13 14 15
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22) 23
32
A
B
A (32P)
20
21 2 2
17 18
2 3 24 25
1 2
C(31P)
(25P)
16 17 18 19 20 21
25
26 27 28
6 7
9 10
/
/
29 30
2 3
7 8
13 14 15
9 10 11 12
16
D (16P)
Wire
Signal
Description
PNK
ATPD3
D9
YEL
ATPD4
D10
BLU
NC
D11
RED
NM
D12
WHT
NMSG
D13
C98-99)
BLU/WHT
ATPNP
D13
('00-01)
D14
BLU/BLK
OP2SW
BLU
ATP2
D15
BRN
ATP1
D16
GRN
NCSG
14-38
In E and H positions: 0 V
In other than [Pj and M position: Battery
voltage
With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
(No 2nd clutch pressure)
In [JO position: 0 V
In other than \2\ position: Battery voltage
In [T| position: 0 V
In other than \T\ position: Battery voltage
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the servo body and the accumulator body. The
ATF pump is driven by splines on the left end of the torque converter which is attached to the engine. Fluid flows
through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the manual valve directing
pressure to each of the clutches. The shift solenoid valves B and C are mounted on the outside of the torque converter
housing. The shift solenoid valve A and the torque converter clutch solenoid valve are mounted on the torque
converter housing as an assembly. The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on the
transmission housing.
(cont'd)
14-39
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
M a i n Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the m o d u l a t o r valve, the shift valve C, the shift valve D, the shift valve
E, the servo control valve, the cooler check valve, the torque converter check valve, the reverse CPC valve, the lock-up
shift valve, the relief valve, and the ATF p u m p gears. The primary function of the main valve body are to switch fluid
pressure on and off and to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
MODULATOR VALVE
SHIFT V A L V E C
SHIFT V A L V E D
SHIFT V A L V E E
RELIEF VALVE
REVERSE CPC VALVE
MANUALVALVE
LOCK-UP SHIFT V A L V E
MAIN V A L V E BODY
COOLER CHECK VALVE
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
LOCK-UP TIMING V A L V E
14-40
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure f r o m the ATF p u m p to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubricating system and torque converter. Fluid f r o m the ATF p u m p flows through B and B\
Fluid entering f r o m B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the right side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve moves to the
left side. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes, and
the amount of fluid f r o m B' through torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the line
pressure.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the illustration below.
From A T F PUMP
To T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R
To LUBRICATION
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are performed by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (Torque Converter Range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its m a x i m u m w h e n the stator torque reaction reaches its m a x i m u m .
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
STATOR
REGULATOR VALVE
REGULATOR
SPRING CAP
TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR SHAFT ARM
STATOR SHAFT
(cont'd)
14-41
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)
Servo Body
The servo body is on the main valve body. It contains the servo valve, shift valve A, shift valve B, CPC valves A and B,
and the 3rd and 4th accumulators.
CPC VALVE A
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the torque converter housing, next to the main valve body. It contains the 1st and 2nd
accumulators and the lubrication check valve.
14-42
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn t h r o u g h the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF f l o w i n g f r o m the ATF p u m p becomes line pressure
that's regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure f r o m the regulator valve enters the torque converter
through the lock-up shift valve and it is discharged f r o m the torque converter. The torque converter check valve
prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid pressure
to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve, and
switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B.
The A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulated the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure and apply
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid pressure to CPC valves A and B.
When shifting between upper gear and lower gear, the clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the CPC pressure mode.
The PCM controls one of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This m o v e m e n t switches the
port of the CPC and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and the CPC pressure is intercepted.
Engaging the clutch w i t h line pressure happens w h e n shifting is completed.
Hydraulic pressure at the parts is as follows:
PORT
NO.
1
3
3'
3"
4
4'
4"
4A
4B
5A
5D
5B
5E
5F
5F'
5C
5G
DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
LINE
CPC A
CPC B
CPC A
CPC B
CPC A or LINE
CPC A or LINE
CPC A or LINE
CPC A or LINE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
PORT
NO.
5H
5J
5K
5K'
6
SA
SB
SC
LA
9
10
20
25
30
40
41
56
DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
CPC B or LINE
MODULATE
SHA
SH B
SHC
LC
LINE
1ST CLUTCH
2ND CLUTCH
LINE
3RD CLUTCH
4TH CLUTCH
4TH CLUTCH
LS A
PORT
NO.
57
58
90
90'
91
91'
92
93
94
95
95'
96
97
99
X
HX
AX
DESCRIPTION OF
PRESSURE
LS B
LS A o r LS B
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
ATF COOLER
TORQUE CONVERTER
LUBRICATION
LUBRICATION
TORQUE CONVERTER
TORQUE CONVERTER
SUCTION
DRAIN
HIGH POSITION DRAIN
AIR DRAIN
NOTE:
CPC: Clutch Pressure Control pressure
SH: Shift Solenoid pressure
LS: A/T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid pressure
LC: Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid pressure
(cont'd)
14-43
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
SO Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift solenoid valve and positions of the shift valve
are as follows:
The shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and the shift valve A is m o v e d to the left side.
The shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and the shift valve B remains in the right side.
The shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C remains in the left side.
Line pressure (1) passes through the manual valve and stops at shift valve D. Line pressure (1) also flows to the
modulator valve, and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows to the shift solenoid valves and
the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. Under this condition, hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
14-44
(cont'd)
14-45
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
H Position: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, but shift solenoid valves B and C remain O N . SH A pressure (SA) is applied
to the left side of shift valve A, then shift valve A is m o v e d t o the left side. This movement switches the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure on shift valve A. The 1st clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 1st
clutch is engaged securely. CPC A pressure (5E) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
1ST ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
3RD CLUTCH
*TH CLUTCH
SOLENOID VALVE A
14-46
(cont'd)
14-47
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
B Position: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain O N . Releasing LS A pressure in the CPC valve A releases CPC A
pressure in the 1st clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u m d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the
right side of shift valve C. Then shift valve C is m o v e d t o the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC
pressure. The 2nd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure m o d e , and the 2nd clutch is engaged securely. The CPC
B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve B.
NOTE:
W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
14-48
(cont'd)
14-49
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
S3 Position; Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns the shift solenoid valve C ON, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to release LS B
pressure (57). Shift solenoid valve A remains ON, and B remains OFF. Releasing LS B pressure in the CPC valve B
releases CPC B pressure in the 2nd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and SH C pressure (SC)
in the right side of shift valve C is released. Then shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure and CPC pressure. The 3rd clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged
securely. The CPC A pressure (4A) stops at shift valve E.
NOTE:
When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
14 -50
(cont'd)
14-51
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
E Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve A to release LS A
pressure (56). Shift solenoid valves A and B remain OFF. Releasing LS A pressure (56) releases CPC A pressure in the 3
rd clutch pressure circuit. Shift solenoid valve C is t u r n e d OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of
shift valve C. Then shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure and CPC pressure.
The CPC B pressure (5B) changes to line pressure (5B) at shift valve C, and flows to the 4th clutch via shift valve B, shift
valve C, shift valve D, and the manual valve. The 4th clutch pressure is changed to line pressure mode by switching
the position of shift valve C, and 4th clutch is engaged securely. The CPC B pressure (5D) stops at shift valve A.
14-52
OH Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the
shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as follows:
Shift solenoid valve A is turned O N , and the shift valve A is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and the shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF, and the shift valve C is moved to the left side.
The PCM also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valve B to apply LS B pressure (57) to CPC valve B. Line
pressure (4) f r o m the manual valve becomes line pressure (5C) at shift valve C. Line pressure (5C) flows to shift valve
A via shift valve B, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20). The 2nd clutch pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, and
2nd clutch is engaged.
NOTE:
W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-53
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
H] Position
The PCM the shift solenoid valves and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The conditions of the shift
solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valve are as f o l l o w s :
Shift solenoid valve A is turned OFF, and shift valve A is m o v e d to the left side.
Shift solenoid valve B is turned O N , and shift valve B is in the right side.
Shift solenoid valve C is turned O N , and shift valve C is in the right side.
Line pressure (4) becomes line pressure (5B) at shift valve C. Line pressure <5C) flows to shift valve B via shift valve A,
and becomes 1st clutch pressure (10). 1st clutch pressure (10) is applied to the 1st clutch, then 1st clutch is engaged.
14-54
(cont'd)
14-5
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
El Position: Driving in reverse gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and B remains ON. Shift solenoid valve
C is turned OFF, and SH C pressure (SC) is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC valve. Then the reverse CPC
valve moves to the left side, creating full line pressure. Line pressure to the 4th clutch is same as shifting to El position,
and 4th clutch pressure increases. The 4th clutch is engaged with line pressure mode.
14-56
OS Position
Shift solenoid valve C is turned OFF by the PCM, and SH C pressure (SO is applied to the right side of the reverse CPC
valve. Then the reverse CPC valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading line pressure (3) to the servo
valve. Line pressure (3'} passes through the servo valve and flows to the manual valve. Line pressure (3') is
intercepted at the manual valve, and is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE:
When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
. Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-57
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Lock-up System
In H position (3rd and 4th), and S position (3rd), pressurized fluid is drained f r o m the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the lock-up piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place,
the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together w i t h hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes
the t i m i n g of the lock-up mechanism. W h e n the t o r q u e converter clutch solenoid valve activates, modulator pressure
changes to switch lock-up ON and OFF. The lock-up control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve control the range of
lock-up according to A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
mounted on the torque converter housing, and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B are mounted on
the transmission housing. They are controlled by the PCM.
General Operation
1. Operation (clutch on)
W i t h the lock-up clutch on, fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the lock-up piston is
drained off, and the converter fluid exerts pressure t h r o u g h the piston against the torque converter cover. As a
result, the converter turbine is locked to the converter cover. The effect is to bypass the converter, placing the
vehicle in direct drive.
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT
14-58
No Lock-up
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned OFF by the PCM. The lock-up shift valve receives LC pressure (LA)
on the left side, and modulator pressure (6) on the right side. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side to uncover the
port leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92)
becomes torque converter pressure (94), and enters into the left side of the torque converter to disengage the lock-up
clutch. The lock-up clutch is OFF.
NOTE:
When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH SOLENOID
VALVE
(cont'd)
14-59
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the prescribed value, the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is turned ON by
the PCM to release LC pressure (LA) in the left side of the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is moved to the
left side to switch the port leading torque converter pressure to the left side and right side of the torque converter.
Torque converter pressure (92) f l o w s to the right side of the torque converter to engage the lock-up clutch. The PCM
also controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B, and LS A or LS B pressure is applied to the lock-up
control valve and the lock-up t i m i n g valve. The position of the lock-up control valve depends on torque converter
pressure and LS A or LS B pressure. When LS A or LS B pressure (58) is lower, torque converter pressure (91) f r o m the
lock-up t i m i n g valve is lower. The lock-up clutch is engaged partially. LS A or LS B (58) increases, and the lock-up
t i m i n g valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port leading torque converter pressure to high. The lock-up clutch
is then engaged securely. Under this condition, the lock-up clutch is engaged by pressure f r o m the right side of the
torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
NOTE:
W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
14-60
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B to
increase LS A o r LS B pressure (58). The LS A or LS B pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and the
lock-up timing valve, and moves t h e m to the left side. Under this condition, torque converter back pressure is released
fully, causing the lock-up clutch to be fully engaged.
NOTE:
When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
Hydraulic circuit shows the '98-99 models; the '00-01 models are similar.
(cont'd)
14-61
Automatic Transmission
System Description (cont'd)
Circuit Diagram
QNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
14-62
MAINSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
' KEY
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
COUNTERSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
ri
BSU UNIT
KEY
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
STEERING LOCK
ASSEMBLY
PARK
PIN
SWITCH
H
H
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
.
BLK
A
BRN
WHT/BLK
BLU/GRN
RED
Li I
CPS
STOP SW
BLU
WHT
NM
NMSG
GRN
NC
RED/WHT
NCSG
LT
LS1P
WHT
RED
GRN
SHA
LC
D1
B25
ORN
' >D7
YEL
BLU/YEL
BLU/YEL
GRN/WHT
SHB
SHC
D2
D3
BRN/BLK
GRN/WHT
2
Q
\
r\
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
.
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
VALVE
SHIFT
SOLENOID
VALVE A
BLK {'98-99)
BRN/BLK COO 01)
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
2ND CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
3RD CLUTCH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
Q
\
n \
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
G101
BRN/BLK
BRN/BLK
G101
G101
(1)
6 (7)
10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 (22) 23 24
25 26 27
A(32P)
28 29 30 (31)
32
/ / 13
/ /
C(31P)
14 15 16 17 18 13 20 21
25
26 27 28
29 30
10
13 14 15
/
10
16
Fl
"hi
D(16P)
14
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C P1753: Problem in T o r q u e Converter
Clutch S o l e n o i d V a l v e Circuit
fr^\
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
1
6
9 10 11 12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
16
Is the resistance
12-250,
Y E S - G o to step 11.
N O - G o to step 7.
7. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22
terminals and body ground.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
6 7
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D (16P)
(25P)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LC (YEL)
LC (YEL)
voltage?
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
N O - Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G101).B
14-64
PCM
CONNECTORS
/^x
L C (YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D(16P)
B (25P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
CONNECTORS
21 22
17 18
6 7
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
23 24 25
16
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
10
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
(BRN/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
Is there
voltage?
continuity?
Is the resistance
12-250,
14-65
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P1705: Short In Transmission R a n g e
S w i t c h Circuit
is
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO The system is OK at this time. Check the w i r e
harness for damage.
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
D (16P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
10
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
ATPNP
(BLU/WHT)
L G 2 (BLK)
indicators
go out?
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
'00-01 models:
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
6 7 8
/ 17 18
23 24 25
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
PCM CONNECTORS
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there approx. 5 V?
(BRN/BLK)
Is there battery
Y E S - G o to step 10.
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
NO Check for short in the w i r e between the D6
terminal and the transmission range switch or A/T
gear position indicator, and check for an open in
the wires between the B20 and B22 terminals and
body ground (G101). If wires are OK, check for
loose terminal fit in the PCM connectors. If
necessary, substitute a known-good PCM and
recheck.
14-66
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
CONNECTORS
(25P)
(16P)
PCM
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7 8
4 5
21 22
10
17 18
23 24 25
CONNECTORS
D (16P)
B (2SP)
12
14 15
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
ATP D4 (YEL)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7 8
23 24 25
21 22
10
17 18
13 14
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
ATP
D3
(PNK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Y E S - G o to step 12.
Is there battery
voltage?
(cont'd)
14-67
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Shift to all positions other than HI.
PCM
CONNECTORS
B (25P)
PCM
B (25P)
2
1
9
10
20
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
(16P)
8
10
18
23 24 25
21 22
14 15
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
ATP 2 (BLU)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
10
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
A T P 1 (BRN)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there battery
D (16P)
CONNECTORS
voltage?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 16.
14-68
D T C P1706: O p e n In T r a n s m i s s i o n Range
Switch Circuit (no gear position inputs)
NOTE: Record ail freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.
5. Shift to B position.
6. Measure the voltage between the D9 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
140).
Is the switch
OK?
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
Y E S - G o to step 2.
(16P)
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
A T P D4 (YEL)
1
9
3 4
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there
voltage?
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
D (16P)
B (25P)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO -Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G101), or repair poor
ground ( G 1 0 D . B
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
23 24 25
21 22
10
17 18
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
14 15
12
16
A T P R (WHT)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
voltage?
(cont'd)
14-69
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Measure ATP NP voltage between these t e r m i n a l s :
'98-99 models: Between terminals D13 and B20
or B22.
'00-01 models: Between terminals B14 and B20
or B22.
'98-99 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
3
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
10
13 14
17 18
11 12
A T P D3 (PNK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
13 14 15
23 24 25
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
6 7 8
1
9
21 22
3 4
6 7 8
D(16P)
D (16P)
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
L G 2 (BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
W i r e side of female terminals
voltage?
'00-01 models:
N O - G o to step 13.
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
ATP NP (BLU/WHT)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
N O - G o to step 11.
21 22
(16P)
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
voltage?
B (25P)
10
13 14 15
12
16
ATP 2 (BLU)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
voltage?
14-70
D (16P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7
1
9
CONNECTORS
(25P)
5
21 22
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
12
16
ATP
(BRN)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?
14-71
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0753: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve
A Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.
SH A (BLU/YEL)
10
20
D (16P)
B (25P)
4
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
6 7
17 18
10
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
D(16P)
B (25P)
1
CONNECTORS
^
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
14 15
12
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Y E S - G o to step 11.
N O - G o to step 7.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?
10
N O - G o to step 5.
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
NO Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G101).B
14-72
<3
8. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve/shift solenoid valve A 3P connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D7 and B20 or
B22 terminals.
PCM
CONNECTORS
SH A (BLU/YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
D (16P)
1
10 11 12 13 14 15
3 4
20
6 7
21 22
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
CONNECTORS
8
10
17 18
13 14 15
23 24 25
12
16
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
6 7
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
10
13 14 15
12
16
LG2IBLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
Is there
continuity?
voltage?
S H A (WHT)
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
14-73
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0758: Problem in Shift S o l e n o i d V a l v e
B Circuit
NOTE: Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
SH B (GRN/WHT)
10 11 12 13 14 15
D (16P)
B (25P)
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
10
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
SH B (GRN/WHT)
B (25P)
1
9
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
3
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
D (16P)
21 22
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
16
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Y E S - G o to step 11.
N O - G o to step 7.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?
10 11 12 13 14 15
N O - G o t o step 5.
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 8.
N O - R e p a i r open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G10D.H
14-74
0
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
S H B (GRN/WHT)
B (25P)
1
9
3 4
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
10
13 14 15
12
16
10
20
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there continuity
D (16P)
B (25P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
(16P)
3 4
6 7
11 12 13 14 15
21 22
10
17 18
23 24 25
12
13 14 15
LG2 (BLK;'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
voltage?
NO - Go to step 10.
10. Measure shift solenoid valve B resistance at the
solenoid valve connector.
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E
B CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
14-75
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0720: Problem in Countershaft S p e e d
S e n s o r Circuit
speed
sensor
N C (BLU)
installed
Y E S - G o to step 2.
N C S G (GRN)
Is there
continuity?
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
N C (BLU)
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
11
Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO Replace the countershaft speed sensor.
13 14 15
12
16
N C S G (GRN)
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
14-76
1
6
9 10 11
13 14 15
12
N M S G (WHT)
16
N M (RED)
speed
sensor
W i r e side of female terminals
Y E S - G o to step 2.
Is there
continuity?
N O - G o to step 6.
3. Measure mainshaft speed sensor resistance at the
sensor connector.
MAINSHAFT SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
1
6
13 14 15
10 11
16
12
N M S G (WHT)
N M (RED)
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
W i r e side of female terminals
Y E S - G o to step 4.
Is the resistance
400-
600 Q ?
14-77
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the mainshaft speed sensor 2P
connector.
9. Check for continuity between the D11 terminal and
the No. 1 terminal of the mainshaft speed sensor
connector.
P C M C O N N E C T O R D (16P)
1
7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
16
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
NM (RED)
RED
f
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15
N M S G (WHT)
16
MAINSHAFT SPEED
SENSOR CONNECTOR
Is there
continuity?
14-78
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
LS A -
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
(WHT)
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
L S A + (RED)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
approx. 5 Q ?
Is the resistance
YEST e r m i n a l side of male terminals
Is the resistance
approx. 5 Q?
G o t o step 7.
YES Go to s t e p 3 .
1
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
PCM
CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
D (16P)
(25P)
(WHT)
7 8
17 18
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
23 24 2 5
21 22
7 8
10
17 18
23 24 25
12
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
L S A + (RED)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
voltage?
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
14-79
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Check for continuity between the B20 and B22
terminals and body g r o u n d .
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
1
9
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 (BLK: ' 9 8 - 9 9 )
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
14-80
0 0
DTC P0763: Problem In Shift Solenoid Valve
C Circuit
NOTE; Record all freeze data before you troubleshoot.
S H C (GRN)
B (25P)
1
D (16P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
1
10
17 18
14 15
23 24 25
12
16
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
PCM CONNECTORS
S H C (GRN)
1
9
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
3
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
D(16P)
(25P)
21 22
1
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
12- 25 Q ?
Is the resistance
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Y E S - G o to step 11.
NO - G o t o step 7.
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
voltage?
10 11 12 13 14 15
Go to step 5.
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
6 7 8
1
9
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
NO Repair open in the wires between the B20 and
B22 terminals and ground (G10D.B
(cont'd)
14-81
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the shift solenoid valve B 2P connector.
PCM CONNECTORS
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
S H C (GRN)
B (25P)
3
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10
13 14 15
12
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
12
16
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
continuity?
10
13 14 15
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
D (16P)
B (25P)
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
(16P)
voltage?
N O - G o to step 10.
10. Measure shift solenoid valve C resistance at the
solenoid valve connector.
SHIFT SOLENOID V A L V E
C CONNECTOR
Is the resistance
12-25
Q?
14-82
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
20
LS B +
(ORN)
2
W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
approx. 5
q?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
NO - Replace the A/T clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B . B
G o t o step 5.
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LS B +
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
L1 S B -
(GRN)
(ORN)
Is the resistance
approx. 5
q?
Y E S - G o t o step 7.
N O - Repair loose terminal or open in the wires
between the B 1 8 and B25 terminals and A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B . B
(cont'd)
14-83
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Disconnect PCM connector D (16P).
CONNECTORS
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
VB SOL
(BLK/YEL)
D (16P)
B (25P)
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
21 22
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
16
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Wire side of female terminals
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 10.
N O - C h e c k for b l o w n No. 6 (15A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open in the w i r e between the D5 terminal
and the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box. a
14-84
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
'98-99 models:
10 11 12 13
'98-99 models:
20
21 22
6 7 8
17
14 15
23 2 4
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
18
25
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
3 4 5
10
11 12 13 14 15
6 7 8
20
17 18
23 24 25
21 22
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Wire side of female terminals
'00-01 models:
PCM
CONNECTORS
B (25P)
3 4 5
2122
20
P C M C O N N E C T O R D (16P)
6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
'00-01 models:
D (16P)
17 18
23 24 25
10
13 14
12
15
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
9 10 11
13 14 15
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
2
8
5
12
16
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
^
Wire side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
Is there
continuity?
YES - G o t o step 7.
NO - G o t o step 3.
14-85
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.
BLU/BLK
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
17 18
23 24 25
W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
voltage?
Y E S - Go to step 15.
N O - Repair open in the wire between the 2nd
clutch pressure switch and the PCM.
'00-01 models:
PCM CONNECTORS
B (25P)
1
9
D (16P)
3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15
21 22
20
6 7
2ND C L U T C H P R E S S U R E
SWITCH CONNECTOR
8
10
17 18
23 24 25
13 14 15
12
16
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
LG2
(BRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx. 0 V?
Y E S - C h e c k for loose terminal fit in the PCM
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
PCM and recheck.
NO - Go to step 11.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14-86
T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
10 MQ or more?
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
/
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
21 22
20
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
1
9
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-01)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
YES ~ G o to step 7.
N O - G o to step 3.
Is there
continuity?
(cont'd)
14-87
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and make sure it is
securely supported.
8. Set the parking brake, and block rear wheels
securely.
1
9
C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
17 18
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l
23 24 25
21 22
20
LG1
OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
(BRN/BLK)
BLU/WHT
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
(BRN/BLK:
'00-01)
&
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 15.
NO Repair open in the wire between the 3rd
clutch pressure switch and the PCM.B
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
approx.
V?
N O - G o to step 11.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Disconnect the 3rd clutch pressure switch
connector.
13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Terminal side of male terminal
Is the resistance
10 MQ or
more?
14-88
another
code?
limit?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NORepair the hydraulic system as necessary (see
page 1 4 - 1 0 4 ) .
3. Replace the torque converter clutch solenoid valve
(lock-up control solenoid valve)/shift solenoid valve
A (see page 14-106).
4. Replace the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B (see page 14-109).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and reset the PCM
m e m o r y by removing the BACK UP fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box for more
than 10 seconds.
6. Using the scan t o o l , check to be sure that the
engine coolant temperature is in 176F (80C) and
above.
7. Drive the vehicle at 55 m p h (88 km/h) constantly for
more than one minute.
8. Recheck for code P0740.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate
code
P0740?
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P0730: P r o b l e m in Shift Control S y s t e m
NOTE: Record all freeze data before y o u troubleshoot.
1. Check whether the OBD II scan tool indicates
another code.
Does the OBD II scan tool indicate another
code?
limit?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO Repair the hydraulic system as necessary
14-90
P0730?
another
code?
code
P0780?
Automatic Transmission
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
D T C P1750: M e c h a n i c a l P r o b l e m In H y d r a u l i c
Control S y s t e m for A / T Clutch P r e s s u r e
Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e s A and B, or P r o b l e m
in Hydraulic Control S y s t e m
another
another
code?
G o t o step 2.
N O - Go to step 2.
code
Y E S - R e p l a c e the transmission.
NO
14-92
3. Replace the shift solenoid valve B (see page 14107), and the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B (see page 14-109).
P1750?
code
P1751?
D4
Y E S - G o t o step 2.
9 10 11
13 14 15
5
12
16
A T P D4 (YEL)
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES Faulty PCM or the gauge assembly.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
28 29 30
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2 5 26 27
10
23
24
32
D4 IND (GRN/BLK)
voltage?
N O - G o to step 6.
N O - G o to step 13.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Reconnect PCM connector A (32P).
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
9. Shift t o any position other than
&
(cont'd)
14-93
Automatic Transmission
U S Indicator Light Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (25P).
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
17 18
PCM CONNECTORS
23 24 25
21 22
20
6 7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
LG1
A (32P)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
(BRN/BLK)
B (25P)
(1) 2 3 4
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
10 11 12 13 1415
5 6 (7)
26 27
28 29 30 (311
D4 IND
(GRN/BLK)
32
3 4
20
21 22
6 7 8
17 18
23 24 25
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there continuity
terminal?
between
ground
and
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
each
Y E S - G o t o step 16.
Is there voltage for at least 2
NO Repair open in the wire(s) between the B20 or
B22 terminal and ground (G101) B
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
17. Measure the voltage between terminals B1 and B22,
and between terminals B9 and B20.
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
IGP1 ( Y E L / B L K )
IGP2 (YEL/BLK)
1
y
6 7
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
21 22
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
17 18
23 24 25
LG2 (BLK:'98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 18.
NO Repair open or short in the w i r e between the
B1 or B9 terminal and the PGM-FI main relay and
f r o m fuse No. 46 in the under-hood fuse/relay box
to the PGM-FI main relay. B
14-94
seconds?
G o t o step 22.
5 6 (7)
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27
(GRN/BLK)
28 29 30 (313
32
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C (16P)
CONNECTOR
1
10 11
12
14 15 16
D4 IND ( G R N / B L K )
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Automatic Transmission
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
5. Measure the voltage between the B12 terminal of
the multiplex control unit, driver's B (22P)
connector and body ground w i t h the throttle
released and the brake pedal pressed.
ON?
Y E S - G o to step 2.
NO Repair faulty brake light circuit, refer to
the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 19-8).B
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to IB
position.
1
3 4 5
11 12 13 14 15 16
6 7 8 9
17
X XXX
22
ILU (WHT/RED)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
5 6 (7)
(1) 2 3 4
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27
28 29 30 (31]
32
ILU ( W H T / R E D )
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
1/ 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
11 12 13 14 15 1 6 X 17
22
XXXX
N O - G o to step 8.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 7.
NO Repair open in the wire between the B22
terminal of the driver's multiplex control unit and
the driver's under-dash fuse No. 9 (via the shift lock
solenoid).
14-96
in the gauge
assembly
A (32P)
(25P)
3 4
6 7 8
8 9 10 (11)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
10 11 12 13 14 15
(1) 2 3 4
25 26 27
5 6 (7)
28 29 30 (31
32
BK S W
(WHT/BLK)
20
21 22
A 17 18
23 24 25
LG1
(BRN/
BLK)
LG2
(BLK: '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 11.
NO Repair open in the wire between the A32
terminal and the brake pedal position switch (brake
switch).
(cont'd)
14-97
Automatic Transmission
Interlock System - Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Reconnect PCM connectors A (32P) and B (25P).
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (25P)
3 4
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
10 11 12 13 14 15
C (31P)
B (25P)
1
9
7 8
17 18
20
5
1 2
23 24 25
21 22
9 10
21 22
LG1 (BRN/BLK)
17 18
23 24 25
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
/ 16 17 18 19 20 21 /
26 27 28
29 30
25
/
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR CONNECTOR
TPS
(RED/BLK)
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K ; '00-01)
1
SG1 (GRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
fully
closed)?
NO
Go to step 17.
NO - G o t o step 14.
B (25P)
C(31P)
10 11 12 13 14 15
20
3 4
6 7 8
21 22
17 18
23 24 25
//
/ //
/
1 2
25
9 10
16 17 18 19 20 21
26 27 21
L G 2 ( B L K : '98-99)
( B R N / B L K : '00-01)
29 30
SG2
(GRN/BLK)
LG1
(BRN/BLK)
Is there
continuity?
14-98
WHT/YEL
K E Y S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R (7P)
5 6
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
e e
Y E S - Go to step 7.
solenoid
operate
voltage?
properly?
P A R K PIN S W I T C H
4P C O N N E C T O R
Y E S - G o to step 6.
NO -Faulty key interlock solenoid/switch. Replace
the ignition key cylinder/steering lock assembly.H
2
BLK
4
WHT/RED
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 9.
NO Repair open in the wires between the park pin
switch and the 4P connector. If wires are OK,
replace the park pin switch.
(cont'd)
14-99
Automatic Transmission
Interlock System - Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between the No. 4 terminal of
the park pin switch 4P connector and the No. 5
terminal of the key switch connector.
K E Y S W I T C H C O N N E C T O R (7P)
5 6 7
WHT/RED
P A R K PIN S W I T C H
4P C O N N E C T O R
WHT/RED
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between No. 4
terminal of the park pin switch 4P connector and
the No. 5 terminal of the key switch connector
10. Check for continuity between the No. 3 terminal of
the 4P connector and body g r o u n d .
P A R K PIN S W I T C H
4P C O N N E C T O R
4
BLK
i J)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
14-100
<3&
Road Test
Special Tools Required
Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (Two required)
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Apply the parking brake, and block rear wheels. Start the engine, then shift to B position while pressing the brake
pedal. Press the accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should not stall.
3. Repeat the same test in B position.
4. Connect the Honda PGM Tester (A), and g o t o the PGM-FI Data List; then g o t o step 1. If you don't have a PGM
Tester, go to step 5.
5. Pull back the carpet f r o m the passenger's side of the center console to expose the PCM (A).
6. Connect the digital multimeter (B) and the special tools (C) to check voltage between the C27 ( + ) terminal and B20
( - ) or B22 ( - ) terminal of the PCM.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
(cont'd)
14-101
Automatic Transmission
Road Test (cont'd)
7. Test-drive the vehicle on a flat road in the E position. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage. While driving,
check that the shift points occur at the proper speeds by m o n i t o r i n g the throttle position sensor voltage and
comparing your shift point speeds and voltage to those in the table. (The throttle position sensor voltage
represents the throttle opening.)
Upshift-El position
Throttle Opening
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 0.7 V
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 2.25 V
Fully-opened throttle.
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 4.5 V
Unit of Speed
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
1st 2nd
9-10
14-16
24-27
39-43
35-39
57-63
2nd 3rd
21-23
33-37
45-48
72-78
65-68
104-110
3rd 4th
30-34
48-54
65-68
104-110
98-101
157-163
Lock-up ON
45 48
73 - 7 7
77-81
124-130
99-103
160-166
Unit of Speed
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
mph
km/h
Lock-up O F F
44-47
71-75
68-71
109-115
90-94
145-151
4th 3rd
17-19
27-31
3rd 2nd
2nd 1st
6 - 8 (3rd 1st)
9 - 1 3 (3rd 1st)
89-92
142-148
54-58
87-93
27-31
44-50
Downshift-IB position
Throttle Opening
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 0.8 V
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 2.25 V
Fully-opened throttle.
Throttle position
sensor voltage: 4.5 V
8. Accelerate to about 35 m p h (57 km/h) so the transmission is in 4th, then shift f r o m B position to [2] position.
The vehicle should immediately begin s l o w i n g d o w n f r o m engine braking.
9. Check for abnormal noise and clutch slippage in the f o l l o w i n g positions.
0D (1st Gear) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts should
not occur w i t h the shift lever in this position.
SO (2nd Gear) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle. Check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage. Upshifts and
downshifts should not occur w i t h the shift lever in this position.
I B (Reverse) Position
Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle, and check that there is no abnormal noise or clutch slippage.
10. Test in E (Park) Position.
Park the vehicle on a slope (approx. 16), apply the parking brake, and shift into B position. Release the brake; the
vehicle should not move.
14-102
TROUBLE
PROBABLE C A U S E
14-103
Automatic Transmission
Pressure Tests
Special Tools Required
18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
A / T OIL PRESSURE G A U G E
SET W / P A N E L
07406-0020400
INSPECTION HOLE
14-104
A / T PRESSURE HOSE, 2 2 1 0 m m
07MAJ-PY4011A
(4 Required)
INSPECTION HOLE
INSPECTION HOLE
0
7. Start the engine, and run it at 1,500 rpm.
8. Shift to H or E position, and measure line pressure at line pressure inspection hole (A).
NOTE; Higher pressure may be indicated if measurements are made in shift lever positions other than H or [ 0 .
9. Shift to QQ position, and measure 1st clutch pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection hole (B).
10. Shift to [2] position, and measure 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection hole (C).
11. Shift to [B position, then press the brake pedal and hold it.
12. Shift to H position, and release the brake pedal (the transmission is in 1st gear).
13. Accelerate the engine to 2,500 rpm (the transmission will be shifted to 2nd gear).
14. Release the accelerator for more than 5 seconds after the transmission is shifted to 2nd gear, the engine speed
will decrease to about 1,000 r p m .
15. Press the accelerator very slowly (so it takes at least 5 seconds to raise the engine speed to 2,000rpm), then hold
the engine speed at 2,000 r p m .
16. Measure 3rd and 4th clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection hole (D), and the 4th clutch pressure
inspection hole (E), as the transmission will shifted 2nd gear to 3rd gear, then to 4th gear.
PRESSURE
Line
(A)
1st clutch
(B)
2nd clutch
(C)
3rd clutch
(D)
4th clutch
(E)
SHIFT
LEVER
POSITION
05] or E
m
S3
SYMPTOM
PROBABLE C A U S E
FLUID P R E S S U R E
Service Limit
Standard
No (or low)
line pressure
Torque converter,
ATF pump, pressure
regulator valve,
torque converter
check valve
760 kPa
(7.7 kgf/cm , 110
psi)
No or low 1st
pressure
1st clutch
750 kPa
(7.6 kgf/cm , 110
psi)
No or low 2nd
pressure
2nd clutch
No or low 3rd
pressure
3rd clutch
No or low 4th
pressure
4th clutch
17. Install the inspection hole bolts w i t h new sealing washers, and tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE:
18 N m (1.8 kgf.m,13 Ibfft)
NOTE: Do not reuse old sealing washers.
14-105
Automatic Transmission
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid
Valve - Shift Solenoid Valve A Test
1. Disconnect the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve 3P connector/shift solenoid valve A.
12-25 Q
12-25 Q
14-106
12-25 Q
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N m (1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
14-107
Automatic Transmission
A / T Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valves A and B Test
1. Disconnect the A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and B 2P connectors.
A
Approx. 5.0 Q
14-108
14-109
Automatic Transmission
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the connectors from the mainshaft and
countershaft speed sensors.
2. Remove the bolt securing the mainshaft speed
sensor/then remove the mainshaft speed sensor
from the end cover.
mm
(1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
14-110
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f m , 14 I b f f t )
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f m , 1 4 I b f f t )
14-111
Automatic Transmission
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. Park the vehicle on the level g r o u n d . Turn off the
engine.
14-112
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
1. Bring the transmission up to operating temperature
(the radiator fan comes on) by driving the vehicle.
2. Park the vehicle on the level ground, and turn the
engine off.
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug, and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
18 x 1.5 m m
4 9 N m (5.0 k g f m , 3 6 I b f f t )
2 4 x 1.5 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
14-113
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Removal
1. Before disconnecting power, make sure you have
the anti-theft code for the radio, then write d o w n
the frequencies for the radio's preset stations.
14-114
<3
13. Disconnect the connectors from the 3rd clutch
pressure switch (A), mainshaft speed sensor (B),
and A/T clutch pressure control solenoid valves A
and B (C), then remove the harness clamps from
the clamp brackets.
B
18. Remove the transmission range switch connector
(C) from the connector bracket (D), then disconnect
it.
14. Disconnect the connector from the torque
converter clutch solenoid valve/shift solenoid valve
A assembly (A), then remove the connector from
harness cover (B).
B
(cont'd)
14-115
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
20. Lift and support the engine/transmission assembly
w i t h an engine hanger (P/N AAR-T-1256, available
through the American Honda Tool and Equipment
p r o g r a m , or equivalent).
22. Remove the cotter pins <A) and castle nuts (hex
nuts) (B), and remove the damper forks (C), then
separate the ball joints f r o m the lower arms (D),
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page
18-17).
C
23. Remove the bolts securing the radius rods (E), then
separate the radius rods f r o m the lower arms (D).
24. Pry the driveshafts out of the differential and the
intermediate shaft, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see step 10 on page 16-4).
14-116
B
26. Disconnect the vacuum tube (A) on the front beam
(B), and unclamp the power steering fluid pipe (C)
from the clamps on the front beam.
A
29. Pull on the inboard joints to remove the left
driveshaft from the differential and to remove the
right driveshaft from the intermediate shaft.
30. Move the left driveshaft to the front side. Coat all
precision finished surfaces with clean engine oil,
then tie the plastic bags (B) over the driveshaft
ends.
31. Remove the intermediate shaft.
A
27. Remove the nuts securing the transmission lower
mounts, then remove the front beam (B).
32. Coat all precision finished surfaces with clean
engine oil, then tie the plastic bags over the both
ends of intermediate shaft.
(cont'd)
14-117
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
33. Remove the bolts securing shift cable holder (A),
then remove shift cable cover (B).
14-118
(cont'd)
14-119
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
45. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's
damaged.
14-120
Transmission Installation
1. Flush the ATF cooler (see page 14-127).
2. Install the transmission lower front m o u n t
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N - m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
A
1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
E
4. Install the 14 m m dowel pin (D) and 10 m m dowel
pin (E) in the torque converter housing (F).
5. Place the transmission on a transmission jack, and
raise it to engine level.
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
14-121
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
13. Install the control lever (A) with the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
14 N m (1.4 k g f m , 10 I b f f t )
14. Install the lock bolt (D) w i t h a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the shift cable cover.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint,
be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
A
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
14-122
NOTE:
Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent or
carburetor cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air.
Turn the right and left steering knuckle fully
outward, and slide the left driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its spring clip engage
the side gear. Slide the right driveshaft into the
intermediate shaft until you feel its spring clip
engage the intermediate shaft.
19. Install the transmission lower rear mount on the
transmission.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N-m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
14-123
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
2 3 . Install the damper forks (A), then install the ball
joints on each lower arms (B) with the castle nuts
(hex nuts) (C) and new cotter pins (D).
10 x 1.25 m m
43 N m
(4.4 k g f - m , 3 2 I b f f t )
12 x 1.25 m m
49~59 N m (5.0-6.0 kgfm,
3 6 - 4 3 Ibfft)
14-124
x 1.25 mm
(cont'd)
14-125
Automatic Transmission
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
38. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
39. Install the battery cable clamps on the battery base.
40. Install the battery tray and battery, then secure the
battery with its hold-down bracket.
41. Install the intake air duct and air cleaner housing
assembly.
42. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-113).
43. Connect the battery positive terminal, then connect
the negative terminal.
44. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all gears three times.
45. Check the shift lever operation, A/T gear position
indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
46. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment, refer
to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 185).
47. Start the engine and let it reach normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on) with the
transmission in OS or OB position, then turn it off
and check the ATF level (see page 14-112).
48. Perform a road test (see page 14-101).
49. Enter the anti-theft code for the radio, then enter
the customer's radio station presets.
50. Loosen the front mount nut after the road test, then
retighten the nut to the specified torque.
12x1.25 mm
5 4 N m (5.5 k g f m , 4 0 I b f f t )
14-126
7. With the water and air valves (A) off, attach the
water and air supplies to the flusher. (Hot water if
available.)
13. Turn the water valve and the water supply off.
14. Turn the air valve on for t w o minutes, or until no
moisture is visible leaving the drain hose. Residual
moisture in the cooler or lines can damage the
transmission.
15. Remove the flusher f r o m the cooler line. Attach the
drain hose to an ATF container.
16. Install the transmission, and leave the drain hose
attached to the cooler line.
(cont'd)
14-127
Automatic Transmission
ATF Cooler Flushing (cont'd)
17. Make sure the transmission is in OS position.
Fill the transmission w i t h ATF, and run the engine
for 30 seconds or until approximately 0.95 fi
(1.0 US qt., 0.8 Imp qt.) is discharged.
14-128
14-129
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
El position indicator light comes on.
+ +++
14-130
10. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
11. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector and park
pin switch 4P connector.
12. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
13. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
Cable e n d rides o n t h e b o t t o m
of the m o u n t i n g stud.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
14-131
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS c o m p o n e n t locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
A p p l y silicone grease to these parts:
Movable parts of the shift lever.
Movable parts of the shift lock mechanism.
Sliding surfaces on the detent spring.
PUSH BUTTON
SPRING
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
PLUNGER
SCREW
3 N m (0.3 k g f - m , 2 I b f f t )
Apply non-hardening thread
lock sealant.
PLUNGER SPRING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CLAMP
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
A / T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT HOUSING
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
LEVER COVER
SHIFT LOCK
STOP CUSHION
8 x 1.25mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
DETENT SPRING
SHIFT CABLE
SHIFT LEVER
BRACKET BASE
8 x 1.25mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
14-132
A
6. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder to remove the shift cable f r o m the shift lever
bracket base (C).
NOTE: Do not remove the shift cable by twisting
the shift cable guide pipe (D).
C
10. Remove the lock bolt (C) securing the control lever
(D), then remove the shift cable (E) w i t h the control
lever.
(cont'd)
14-133
Automatic Transmission
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
11. Insert the new shift cable through the g r o m m e t
hole, then install the shift cable guide bracket.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
E position indicator light comes on.
13. Install the control lever (A) w i t h the shift cable (B)
on the control shaft (C). Do not bend the shift cable
excessively.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m ,
10 I b f f t )
14. Install the lock bolt (D) w i t h a new lock washer (E),
then bend the lock washer tab against the bolt.
15. Install the shift cable cover (F), then install the shift
cable holder (G) on the cover.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the control lever joint,
be sure to install the shift cable holder after
installing the shift cable cover to the torque
converter housing.
16. Install the floor heat shield.
14-134
21. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C).
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) with the
square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the
shift cable.
8x1.25 mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
25. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
26. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
27. Start the engine, and check the shift lever operation
in all gears.
22. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly
installed on the mounting stud (B).
Properly Installed:
14-135
Automatic Transmission
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Shift the transmission into E position.
2. Remove the center console, refer to '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 20-83).
+ ++++
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the
E position indicator light comes on.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14-136
<2
9. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B)
counterclockwise a quarter turn, then slide the
holder onto the shift lever bracket base (C).
Install the shift cable end (D) over the mounting
stud (E) by aligning its square hole (F) w i t h the
square shape (G) at the bottom of the stud. Rotate
the holder clockwise a quarter turn to secure the
shift cable.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
13. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
14. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
15. Push the shift lock release, and verify that the shift
lever releases.
Properly Installed:
14-137
14-138
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
No 41 (100A)
CTNjO
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.42 (50A)
CTNJD
No.9 (15A)
YEL
[7
1
D4
IND
VSP
OUT
ATP
R
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
<3
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT,
DRIVER'S
DIMMING
CIRCUIT
STARTER
CUT RELAY
r BLK/BLU
RED/BLK | RED/BLK
LT BLU
P>
CRUISE
CONTROL
UNIT
Wr-
--
- PNK -
- PNK -
- BLU -
- BLU -
- BLU
-BRN-
-BRN-
- BRN
14-139
Terminal
1
Position
E
10
u
CS.
w
KJ
/~\
~ - KJ
KJ
- KJ
r\
KJ
rs
KJ
KJ
s~\
r>
/-\
KJ
KJ
14-140
c%
KJ
KJ
KJ
KJ
(cont'd)
14-141
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all gears, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization w i t h the A/T gear
position indicator (A).
kgfm,
13. Move the shift lever through all gears, and verify
the f o l l o w i n g :
The engine will not start in any position other
than M or B .
The back-up lights come on when the shift lever
is in ID position.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m {1.2 k g f m , 8.7 I b f f t )
14-142
0
Indicator Input Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations, precautions, and procedures in the
SRS section before performing repairs or service, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 23-28).
1. Remove the instrument panel, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 20-84).
2. Remove the gauge assembly f r o m the dashboard, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 22-68),
then disconnect the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
3. Inspect the connectors and connector terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
If the terminals are bent, loose, or corroded, repair t h e m as necessary, and recheck the system.
If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the gauge assembly B (22P) and C (16P) connectors.
- If a test indicates a problem, find a correct the cause, then recheck the system.
- If all the input tests prove OK, but the indicator is faulty, replace the printed circuit board.
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y CONNECTORS
C(16P)
B(22P)
1 2
11 12
/ 4 5
///
6 7 8 9 10
19 20 21 22
16|XI/
4 5 6 7
1 2 3
14 15 16
8 9 10 11|X112
Cavity
Wire Color
Test Condition
B11
YEL
Ignition switch
ON (II)
B16
BLK
C4
WHT
C5
BRN
C6
PNK
C7
BLU
C12
GRN/BLK
Under all
conditions
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in E
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [ J
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in B
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in [2]
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in S3
C15
BLK/BLU
Shift lever in LB
C16
RED/BLK
Ignition switch
ON (II) and shift
lever in \M
Possible Cause
(If result is not obtained)
Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
An open in the wire
Poor ground(G501)
An open in the wire
Faulty transmission range
switch
An open in the wire
14-143
14-144
0 0
14-145
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A)
No.42(50A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
No.9 (7.5A)
BAT
WHT/YEL
CH
IG1
YEL
STEERING LOCK
ASSEMBLY
GRN
IG1
WHT/RED
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
"o^|\ PARK
PG
LG
ATP P
A15
BLK
BLK
BLK/BLU
ii/
ILU
B12
WHT/RED
BLK
A
G501
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
G401
14-146
/IJJK
SWITCH W
WHT/BLK
PEDAL
POSITION
SWITCH
(cont'd)
14-147
24P
1
13 14 15 16
5 6 7 8
17 18 19 20
9 10 11 12
21 22 23 24
3 4
11 12 13 14 15
6
16
Shift lever in B
A12
Under all
conditions
Under all
conditions
Ignition switch
turned ON (II)
A24
BLK
B22
GRN
Under all
conditions
Ignition switch
ON (II)
/
22
A3
A14
N" / / / /
Possible Cause
(If result is not obtained)
Faulty transmission range switch
Poor ground (G101)
An open in the wire
Blown No. 13 (7.5A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/
relay box
Faulty passenger's under-dash
fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Poor ground (G401)
An open in the wire
Blown No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
An open in the wire
Possible Cause
(If result is not obtained)
Poor ground (G503)
A n open in the wire
Blown No. 9 (7.5A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
Faulty shift lock solenoid
A n open in the wire
4. Reconnect the connectors to the multiplex control unit (driver's), and make this input test.
B12
WHT/RED
Ignition switch
ON (II) and brake
pedal pushed
Ignition switch
ON (II), brake pedal
and accelerator
pedal pressed at
the same time
If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
|f all the input tests prove OK, substitute a known-good multiplex control unit (driver's), and recheck the system.
If the system is OK, the multiplex control unit (driver's) must be faulty; replace it.
14-148
<5
Key Interlock Solenoid/Switch Test
S R S components are located in this area. Review the
S R S component locations, precautions, and procedures
in the S R S section before performing repairs or service,
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page 2328).
1 /
3/5 5 6 7
5>.
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
14-149
A
4. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger (C) and
plunger spring (D) in the new shift lock solenoid.
14-150
END COVER
SECONDARY SHAFT
LOCKNUT
Replace.
MAINSHAFT LOCKNUT
Replace.
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
P I T O T PIPE
'00-01 models)
LUBRICATION
P I T O T PIPE
00-01 m o d e l s )
BEARING H U B /
BALL BEARING
ASSEMBLY
CONICAL SPRING WASHER
Replace.
PITOT FLANGE
('00-01 m o d e l s )
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
M A I N S H A F T IDLER G E A R
CONICAL SPRING WASHER
Replace.
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
BREATHER TUBE
A T F C O O L E R LINE
PARK P A W L SHAFT
LINE BOLT
A T F C O O L E R LINE
SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
LINE BOLT
(cont'd)
14-151
0 7 G A B - P F 5 0 1 0 1 or
07GAB-PF50100
14-152
6x
1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
85.6 m m ( 3 . 3 3 3 . 3 7 in.)
L2
Part Number
24537-PA9-003
24538-PA9-003
24539-PA9-003
L1
11.00 mm
(0.433 in.)
10.80 mm
(0.425 in.)
10.60 mm
(0.417 in.)
L2
11.00 mm
(0.433 in.)
10.65'mm
(0.419 in.)
10.30 mm
(0.406 in.)
14-153
Transmission Housing
Housing and Shaft Assemblies Removal
Exploded View
R E V E R S E IDLER G E A R
SHAFT HOLDER
R E V E R S E IDLER
GEAR SHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLTS
a ^
TT
TRANSMISSION HANGER/
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
TRANSMISSION HANGER
SHIFT FORK
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
14-154
07HAC-PK40102
14-155
Transmission Housing
Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required
Driver 07749-0010000
Seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40101
Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500
Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600
0 7 mm
( 0 - 0 . 2 8 in.)
14-156
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal
Exploded V i e w
A T F FEED PIPE,
8 x 198 m m
A T F FEED PIPES,
8 x 85 m m
3 Pipes
SERVO DETENT
BASE
ATF STRAINER
SJATOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP
DOWEL PINS, 2
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
6x 1.0 m m , 1 Bolt
M A I N VALVE BODY
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
SPRING
SERVO BODY
COOLER CHECK V A L V E
D O W E L PINS, 2
SERVO SEPARATOR
PLATE
M A I N SEPARATOR PLATE
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
DOWEL PINS, 3
TORQUE CONVERTER
HOUSING
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER
CHECK VALVE SPRING
(cont'd)
14-157
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Removal (cont'd)
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
f o l l o w i n g procedure.
1. Remove the ATF feed pipes f r o m the regulator
valve body, servo body, and accumulator body.
16. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B).
thoroughly w i t h compressed air, then check that it
is in good condition, and the inlet opening is not
clogged.
14-158
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATFsoaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it w i t h compressed air.
4. Roll up half a sheet of ATF-soaked # 600 paper and
insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve.
Twist the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits
the bore tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the
paper as you push it in and out.
NOTE: The valve body is a l u m i n u m and doesn't
require much polishing to remove any burrs.
7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts w i t h
compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
lubricant.
14-159
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Reassembly
1. Coat all parts w i t h ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence
shown for the main valve body (see page 14-161),
regulator valve body (see page 14-164), and servo
body (see page 14-165). Refer to the f o l l o w i n g
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up w i l l be facing the outside
of the valve body.
3. Install all the springs and seats. Insert the spring (A)
in the valve, then install the valve in the valve body
(B). Push the spring in w i t h a screwdriver, then
install the spring seat (C).
C
14-160
(cont'd)
14-161
Valve Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Sectional V i e w
MANUAL VALVE
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No.
CD
14-162
Spring
Modulator valve spring
Shift valve C spring
Shift valve D spring
Shift valve E spring
Relief valve spring
Lock-up shift valve spring
Cooler check valve spring
Torque converter check valve
Servo control valve spring
Reverse CPC valve spring
Wire Dia.
1.6(0.063)
0.8 (0.031)
0.7 (0.028)
0.7 (0.028)
1.1 (0.043)
0.9 (0.035)
0.6 (0.024)
1.2 (0.047)
0.7 (0.028)
0.7 (0.028)
No. of Coils
9.8
21.7
17.2
13.4
10.7
22.4
6.8
14.3
17.2
7.9
14-163
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry t h e m with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement, If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts are w o r n or damaged.
4. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
5. Reassembly is the reverse of the disassembly. Install the filter in the direction shown.
6. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
7. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap w i t h the hole in the valve body, then press the spring cap into the valve
body, and tighten the stop bolt.
VALVE SLEEVE
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No.
14-164
Spring
Stator reaction spring
Regulator valve spring A
Regulator valve spring B
Lock-up control valve spring
Lock-up t i m i n g valve spring
Wire Dia.
5.5(0.217)
1.8 (0.071)
1.7 (0.067)
0.7 (0.028)
0.65 (0.026)
No. of Coils
2.12
16.5
13.4
14.2
15.6
<2
Servo Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
2. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to Valve Body Repair (see page 14-159).
3. Replace the valve body as an assembly if any parts worn or damaged.
4. Coat all parts with ATF during reassembly.
Replace.
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No.
Spring
Shift valve B spring
Shift valve A spring
CPC valve A spring
CPC valve B spring
4th accumulator spring A
4th accumulator spring B
3rd accumulator spring A
3rd accumulator spring B
Wire Dia.
0.8 (0.031)
0 8 (0.031)
0.7 (0.028)
0 7 (0.028)
2.6 (0.102)
2.4 (0.094)
2.6 (0.102)
2.4 (0.094)
No. of Coils
16.9
16.9
7.9
7.9
9.7
11.5
9.7
11.5
14-165
Valve Body
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls: it m a y magnetize the balls.
2. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them w i t h compressed air. Blow out all
passages.
3. Coat all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
SNAP RINGS
SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
No.
14-166
Springs
1st accumulator spring B
1st accumulator spring A
2nd accumulator spring B
2nd accumulator spring A
Wire Dia.
2.7 (0.106)
2.5 (0.098)
2.4(0.094)
2.7 (0.106)
No. of Coils
10.3
11.8
12.9
9.9
<3
3. Install the new oil seal flush with the housing with
the special tools.
07749-0010000
07746-0010600
07736-A01000Bor
07736-A01000A
14-167
07749-0010000
17-6340500
B
00.03 m m
(0-0.001 in.)
/ | ^
I
tA\
.hQ^f)
14-168
THRUST WASHER,
27 x 47 x 5 m m
T H R U S T NEEDLE B E A R I N G
4TH GEAR
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
('00-01 m o d e l s )
PITOT F L A N G E
00-01 m o d e l s )
IDLER G E A R
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
3RD/4TH CLUTCH A S S E M B L Y
O-RINGS
Replace.
T H R U S T S H I M , 41 x 7 3 m m
S e l e c t i v e part
SEALING RINGS,
32 m m
3RD G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
SEALING RINGS
2 9 mm
NEEDLE BEARING
S E T RING
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check the clearance of the 3rd/4th clutch assembly (see page 14-170).
Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
Check shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
Install the conical spring washer and 41 x 73 m m thrust shim in the direction s h o w n .
Inspect condition of the sealing rings. If the sealing rings are w o r n , distorted, or damaged, replace them (see page
14-171).
14-169
0 . 0 3 0 . 1 1 m m (0.001
0.004 in.)
C
Part Number
90414-P7X-000
90415-P7X-000
90416-P7X-000
90417-P7X-000
90418-P7X-000
90419-P7X-000
7.85
7.90
7.95
8.00
8.05
8.10
Thickness
m m (0.309
m m (0.311
m m (0.313
m m (0.315
m m (0.317
m m (0.319
14-170
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
2. Remove the reverse selector hub, 3rd gear, and 1st gear (see page 14-173).
3. Check the bearing in the bearing hub for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, replace it
(see page 14-175).
4. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
5. Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
6. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
7. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF, and reassemble the shafts and gears.
8. Install the conical spring washer, reverse selector, reverse selector hub, and distance collar in the direction shown.
14-172
Countershaft Reverse Selector Hub, 3rd Gear, and 1st Gear Replacement
Special Tools Required
Driver 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
Removal
3. Remove the 1st gear (A) and 3rd gear (B) together
f r o m the countershaft (C) w i t h a puller (D). Place a
shaft protector (E) between the puller and
countershaft to prevent damaging the countershaft.
(cont'd)
14-173
14-174
07746-0030100
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND G E A R
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
TRANSMISSION
HOUSING BEARING
^
(Hj
1
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
T H R U S T S H I M , 37 x 55 m m
Selective part
NEEDLE BEARING
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
1ST G E A R
O-RINGS
Replace.
C O T T E R S , 32 m m
SPLINED WASHER,
3 8 x 5 6 . 5 mm
Selective part
COTTER RETAINER
SNAP RING
S E A L I N G R I N G S , 25 m m
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inspect the thrust needle bearing and the needle bearing for galling and rough movement.
Check clearance of the secondary shaft assembly (see page 14-177).
Check the splines for excessive wear and damage.
Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring, scratches, and excessive wear.
Check the idler gear bearing for wear and rough movement. If the bearing is w o r n or damaged, replace it (see
page 14-179).
7. Before installing the O-rings, w r a p the shaft splines w i t h tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts w i t h ATF during reassembly.
9. Install the conical spring washer and 38 x 56.5 m m splined washer in the direction shown.
14-176
<S0
Secondary Shaft Clearance Inspection
1. Remove the O-rings f r o m the shaft.
2. Assemble the thrust needle bearing (A), needle
bearing (B), 1st gear (C), thrust needle bearing (D),
38 x 56.5 m m splined washer (E), 32 m m cotters (F),
cotter retainer (G), and snap ring (H) on the
secondary shaft (I).
|
j
;
j
I
!
i
Part Number
90502-P0Z-000
90503-P0Z-000
90504-P0Z-000
90505-P0Z-000
90506-P0Z-000
90507-P0Z-000
6.85
6.90
6.95
7.00
7.05
7.10
Thickness
m m (0.270
m m (0.272
m m (0.274
m m (0.276
m m (0.278
m m (0.280
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
(cont'd)
14-177
0.005 in.)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part Number
90406-P0Z-000
90407-P0Z-000
90408-P0Z-000
90409-P0Z-000
90410-P0Z-000
90411-P0Z-000
90412-P0Z-000
4.90
4.95
5.00
5.05
5.10
5.15
5.20
Thickness
m m (0.193
m m (0.195
m m (0.197
m m (0.199
m m (0.201
m m (0.203
m m (0.205
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
14-178
14-179
14-180
(cont'd)
14-181
14-182
Clutch Inspection
1ST/2ND CLUTCH
NOTE: There are t w o types of spring retainer, you may find either type in the clutch assembly. Some spring retainers
have seal lips, and do not have O-rings. The seal lip is undetachable f r o m the spring retainer.
- SNAP RING
O-RINGS
Replace.
- CLUTCH END
PLATE
CLUTCH PISTON
DISC SPRING
-CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . )
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
RETURN SPRING
O-RING
Replace,
SPRING RETAINER
S N A P RING
- SNAP RING
-SPRING RETAINER
CLUTCH
DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
CLUTCH
PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n .
- O-RING
Replace.
- R E T U R N SPRING
CLUTCH PISTON
'O-RINGS
Replace.
2ND C L U T C H
DRUM
CLUTCH END
PLATE
- S N A P RING
1ST CLUTCH
DRUM
(cont'd)
14-183
SNAP RING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness:
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n . )
CLUTCH END PLATE
CLUTCH PLATES
Standard thickness:
2.0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 i n . )
O-RINGS
Replace.
CHECK VALVE
CLUTCH
PISTON
SNAP RING
DISC SPRING
RETURN
SPRING
SPRING
SPRING
RETAINER
RETURN
RETAINER
SPRING
SNAP RING
DISC SPRING
CLUTCH DISCS
Standard thickness
1.94 m m ( 0 . 0 7 6 i n .
CLUTCH
PISTON
O-RINGS
Replace.
SNAP RING
14-184
4TH
CLUTCH DRUM
3RD
CLUTCH DRUM
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07LAE-PX40100
Clutch spring compressor attachment
07HAE-PL50101
Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A
(cont'd)
14-185
0 7 L A E - P X 4 0 1 0 0 or
07HAE-PL50101
0 7 G A E - P G 4 0 2 0 0 or
07GAE-PG4020A
14-186
12. Install the disc spring in the 1st, 3rd, and 4th
clutches in the direction shown.
NOTE: The 2nd clutch does not have a disc spring.
(cont'd)
14-187
14-188
Service Limit
1 . 2 - 1 . 4 m m (0.047- 0.055 in.)
0.85 -1.05 m m (0.033-0.041 in.)
0.55 0.75 m m (0.022 0.030 in.)
0.55 0.75 m m (0.022-0.030 in.)
Part Number
22551-P7Z-003
22552-P7Z-003
22553-P7Z-003
22554-P7Z-003
22555-P7Z-003
22556-P7Z-003
22557-P7Z-003
22558-P7Z-003
22559-P7Z-003
Thickness
2.6mm (0.102 in.)
2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
3.0 m m (0.118 in.)
3.1 m m (0.122 in.)
3.2 m m (0.126 in.)
3.3 m m (0.130 in.)
3.4 m m (0.134 in.)
Part Number
22551-PX4-003
22552-PX4-003
22553-PX4-003
22554-PX4-003
22555-PX4-003
22556-PX4-003
22557-PX4-003
22558-PX4-003
22559-PX4-003
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Thickness
m m (0.083 in.)
m m (0.087 in.)
m m (0.091 in.)
m m (0.094 in.)
m m (0.098 in.)
m m (0.102 in.)
m m (0.106 in.)
m m (0.110 in.)
m m (0.114 in.)
14-189
Valve Body
Valve Bodies and ATF Strainer Installation
Exploded View
Torque:
6 x 1.0 m m : 1 2 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
8 x 1.25 m m : 1 8 N - m ( 1 . 8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m ,
8 Bolts
- A T F F E E D PIPE,
8 x 198 m m
SERVO DETENT
BASE
ATF STRAINER
STAJOR SHAFT
STATOR SHAFT STOP
D O W E L PINS, 2
O-RING
Replace
REGULATOR
SEPARATOR PLATE
6 x 1.0 m m
2 Bolts
6 x 1.0 m m , 1 B o l t
MAIN V A L V E BODY
6 x 1.0 m m
9 Bolts
COOLER CHECK VALVE
SPRING
SERVO BODY
D O W E L PINS, 3
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
14-190
9. Install the detent arm (C) and arm shaft (D) in the
main valve body (E), then hook the detent arm
spring (F) to the detent arm.
10. Install the servo body (G) (nine bolts).
11. Install the accumulator cover (two bolts).
12. Install the ATF strainer (two bolts).
13. Install the servo detent base (two bolts).
14. Install the accumulator body (six bolts).
3. If the ATF p u m p drive gear and ATF pump driven
gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
torque, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF p u m p
driven gear shaft correctly will result in a seized
ATF pump drive gear or ATF p u m p driven gear
shaft.
14-191
Transmission Housing
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation
Exploded V i e w
8 x 1.25 m m
2 6 N - m (2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 I b f f t )
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
MOUNTING BOLTS
10 x 1.25 mm
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
COUNTERSHAFT
2ND G E A R
COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
TRANSMISSION HANGER/
HARNESS CLAMP BRACKET
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N - m (1.4 k g f - m
10 I b f f t )
TRANSMISSION HANGER
TRANSMISSION HOUSING
GASKET
Replace.
LOCK WASHER
Replace.
SHIFT
FORK
R E V E R S E IDLER
GEAR
REVERSE SELECTOR
REVERSE SELECTOR
HUB
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH G E A R
' /
'
MAINSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
SECONDARY SHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
COUNTERSHAFT
SUB-ASSEMBLY
DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER
14-192
HOUSING
1. Install the differential assembly, countershaft subassembly, mainshaft sub-assembly, and secondary
shaft sub-assembly in the torque converter housing.
2. Install the countershaft 4th gear and reverse
selector hub on the countershaft. If the reverse
selector hub is a press-fitted type, refer to the
installation procedure (see page 14-173).
3. Turn the shift fork shaft (A) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole. Then install the
shift fork (B) and reverse selector (C) together on
the shift fork shaft and countershaft (D). Secure the
shift fork to the shift fork shaft with the lock bolt (E)
and a new lock washer (F), then bend the lock
washer against the bolt head.
E
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
14-193
Transmission Housing
Shaft Assemblies and Housing Installation (cont'd)
7. Align the spring pin (A) on the control shaft (B) w i t h
the transmission housing groove (C) by turning the
control shaft.
A
14-194
3. Install the park gear (A) using the old locknut (B)
and a collar (C). Hold the park pawl (D) to engage
w i t h the park gear, then tighten the old locknut until
the shaft splines come out slightly over the park
gear splines.
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench.
Countershaft locknut has left-hand threads.
(cont/d)
14-195
14-196
BEARING HUB
Mark
A
B
C
D
Part Number
90520-P6H-000
90521-P6H-000
90522-P6H-000
90523-P6H-000
3.503
3.490
3.477
3.464
Difference
m m (0.1379
m m (0.1374
m m (0.1369
m m (0.1364
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
16. Install the secondary shaft idler gear (E) and the old
conical spring washer (F) on the secondary shaft
(G). Tighten the old locknut (H) to seat the
secondary shaft idler gear to 226 N-m (23.0 kgf-m,
166 I bf-ft)
NOTE:
Do not use an impact wrench, always use a
torque wrench to tighten the locknut.
Secondary shaft locknut has left-hand threads.
17. Remove the old locknuts and old conical spring
washer f r o m the mainshaft and the secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
14-197
22. For '00-01 models: Install the pitot flange (A) on the
mainshaft idler gear (B), then install the lubrication
pitot pipe (C) and the pitot pipe (D) on the
transmission housing.
23. Set the park lever in the E position, then verify that
the park pawl (A) engages the park gear (B).
B
24. If the park pawl does not engage fully, check the
distance between the pawl shaft (C) and the park
lever roller pin (D) (see page 14-153).
25. Tighten the lock bolt (E), and bend the lock tab of
the lock washer (F) against the lock bolt head.
14-198
0
26. Install the end cover (A) along w i t h t w o dowel pins,
new O-rings, new gasket, and harness clamp
bracket (B). Tighten the 16 bolts to 12 N-m, (1.2
kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft).
B
(cont'd)
14-199
14-200
A/T Differential
Component Location Index
Backlash Inspection
1. Install both axles, and place the differential
assembly on V-blocks (A).
T H R U S T S H I M , 76 m m
THRUST WASHER
CARRIER BEARING
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-202
FINAL DRIVEN G E A R
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-202
0.15 m m (0.002
0.006 in.)
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
B a c k l a s h I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 14-201
CARRIER BEARING
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 14-202
14-201
A/T Differential
Final Driven Gear/Carrier
Replacement
1. Remove the final driven gear f r o m the differential
carrier.
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand
threads.
14-202
07JAD-PH80400
14-203
A/T Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required
Driver 07749-0010000
Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NA1D-PX40100
NOTE:
Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is to be replaced.
Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
Adjust preload after replacing the bearing and outer
race.
Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
07NAD-PX40100
14-204
Part Number
41438-PX4-700
41439-PX4-700
41440-PX4-700
41441-PK4-000
41442-PK4-000
41443-PK4-000
41444-PK4-000
41445-PK4-000
41446-PK4-000
41447-PK4-000
41448-PK4-000
41449-PK4-000
41450-PK4-000
41451-PK4-000
41452-PK4-000
41453-PK4-000
41454-PK4-000
41455-PK4-000
41456-PK4-000
41457-PK4-000
41458-PK4-000
2.05
2.01
2.15
2.20
2.25
2.30
2.35
2.40
2.45
2.50
2.55
2.60
2.65
2.70
2.75
2.80
2.85
2.90
2.95
3.00
3.05
Thickness
m m (0.081
m m (0.083
m m (0.085
m m (0.087
m m (0.089
m m (0.091
m m (0.093
m m (0.094
m m (0.096
m m (0.098
m m (0.100
m m (0.102
m m (0.104
m m (0.106
m m (0.108
m m (0.110
m m (0.112
m m (0.114
m m (0.116
m m (0.118
m m (0.120
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
in.)
(cont'd)
14-205
A/T Differentia!
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
5. Install the thrust shim (A), thrust washer (B), and
bearing outer race (C) in the transmission housing
(D).
:'d)
8. Install the differential assembly (A), gasket (B), and
dowel pins (C) on the torque converter housing (D).
Align the spring pin on the control shaft <E) w i t h the
transmission housing groove.
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N - m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
14-206
2.7-3.9 N m
( 2 8 - 4 0 kgf-cm, 2 4 - 3 5 Ibf-in.)
2.5 3.6 N-m
( 2 5 - 3 7 kgf-cm, 2 2 - 3 2 Ibf-in.)
07HAJ-PK40201
14-207
Transaxle
Driveline/Axle
Special T o o l s
16-2
Driveshafts R e a s s e m b l y
16-3
Intermediate Shaft R e m o v a l
16-14
Intermediate Shaft D i s a s s e m b l y
16-14
Intermediate Shaft R e s a s s e m b l y
16-16
16-18
01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008, for the items not shown
in this section.
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
Ref. No.
Tool Number
07LAF-SM40300
07746-0010300
07749-0010000
07947-SD90101
07947-4630100
07947-6340500
07965-SD90100
16-2
Description
Support Base Attachment
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm
Driver
Oil Seal Driver, Attachment
Fork Seal Driver, 39.2x49.5x15 mm
Driver Attachment
Support Base
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Driveshafts Reassembly
Exploded View
'98-00 model
INBOARD JOINT
ROLLER
CIRCLIP
ShMmm
STOP RING
Replace.
(Rubber type)
OUTBOARD JOINT
(cont'd)
16-3
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
' 0 1 model
Pack c a v i t y w i t h g r e a s e .
16-4
(cont'd)
16-5
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Pack the inboard joint w i t h the joint grease
included in the new driveshaft set.
Grease quantity
Inboard joint; 1 2 0 - 1 3 0 g ( 4 . 2 - 4 . 6 oz)
('98-00 models)
1 5 0 - 1 6 0 g (5.3 5.6 oz)
('01 model)
554
544
559 mm (21.8
549 mm (21.4
22.0 in.)
21.6 in.)
16-6
10.
I n s t a l l t h e n e w l o w p r o f i l e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t
12.
Fit t h e b o o t e n d s o n t o t h e d r i v e s h a f t a n d t h e
(B) a n d d y n a m i c d a m p e r , t h e n h o o k t h e t a b (C) o f
i n b o a r d j o i n t , t h e n i n s t a l l t h e b a n d (A) o n t o t h e b o o t
the band.
(B).
(cont'd)
16-7
Driveline/Axfe
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of the commercially available boot band
tool KD-3191 or equvialent (A), and into the slot on
the w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
18. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m ( 0 . 2 - 0 . 4
in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
16-8
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere w i t h
anything and the band does not move.
Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces
(cont'd)
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
5. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft
groove (B).
10 cm
(4 In.)
Push.
16-10
12. Set the new double loop band (A) onto the boot.
I T
Grease quantity
Outboard joint (Rubber): 1 3 0 - 1 4 0 g ( 4 . 6 - 4 . 9 oz)
Outboard joint (TPE):
1 4 0 - 1 5 0 g ( 4 . 9 - 5 . 3 oz)
(cont'd)
16-11
Driveline/Axle
Driveshafts Reassembly (cont'd)
15. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
section of a commercially available boot band tool
KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
18. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
free end of the band to leave a 5 - 1 0 m m ( 0 . 2 - 0 . 4
in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
16-12
NOTE:
Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with
anything, and the band does not move.
Remove any grease remaining on the
surrounding surfaces.
A
20. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (B) and
outboard joint (C).
16-13
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Drain the ATF, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 14-113).
2. Remove the left driveshaft; refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 16-3).
16-14
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
FLANGE BOLTS
mm
(1.0 k g f m ,
6 x 1.0
10 N m
7.2 ibfft)
RING
P a c k t h e i n t e r i o r of t h e o u t e r s e a l .
3 . 0 - 4 . 0 g ( 0 . 1 1 - 0 . 1 4 oz)
16-16
07947-4630100
(cont'd)
16-17
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
(cont'd)
6. Pack the interior of the outer seal (A). Install the
outer seal into the bearing support (B) using the
special tools and a press.
16-18
Steering
Power Steering
Special T o o l s
17-2
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
17-3
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
17-4
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
17-6
Pump P r e s s u r e Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 ..... 17-7
Pump P r e s s u r e Test-with T/N 0 7 4 0 6 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A .... 17-8
Fluid Leakage Inspection
17-9
Pump Belt Inspection and A d j u s t m e n t
17-10
Hoses and Lines Replacement
17-12
Pump R e p l a c e m e n t
17-13
Pump Overhaul
17-14
Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t
17-19
Steering G e a r b o x Overhaul
17-20
NOTE; Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for items not shown
in this section.
Power Steering
Special Tools
Tool N u m b e r
Description
Piston Seal Ring Guide
07LAG-SM40100 or 07LAG-SM401 OA
07LAG-SM40200 or 07LAG-SM4020A
Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool
Belt Tension Gauge
07JGG-001010A
Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment
07TAF-SZ50100
Attachment, 42 x 47 m m
07746-0010300
Driver
07749-0010000
17-2
Qty
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
17-3
Power Steering
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
F i n d t h e s y m p t o m in t h e c h a r t b e l o w , a n d d o t h e r e l a t e d p r o c e d u r e s in t h e o r d e r l i s t e d u n t i l y o u f i n d t h e cause.
Symptom
Hard Steering
Procedure(s)
T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e s y s t e m {see p a g e 17-6).
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
U n e v e n or r o u g h steering
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
S t e e r i n g w h e e l kicks b a c k
during wide turns
1.
2.
Humming
1.
2.
3.
17-4
A l s o c h e c k for:
Modified suspension
T i r e sizes, t i r e
v a r i e t i e s , a n d air
pressure
Power steering p u m p
belt a d j u s t m e n t
Front w h e e l alignment;
refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 18-5).
Rattle o r c h a t t e r i n g
Hissing
P u m p noise
Squeaking
F l u i d Leaks f r o m t h e
steering gearbox
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p
1.
Fluid leaks f r o m r e s e r v o i r
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p
outlet hose (high-pressure)
Fluid leaks f r o m p u m p i n l e t
hose (low-pressure)
page 1 7 - 1 3 )
17-5
Power Steering
Symptom Troubleshooting
Hard Steering
Is the steering
OK?
Y E S Repair is completed.
Is the power assist more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)?
NO Faulty gearbox.
Y E S - G o to step 2.
7. Check for feed and return lines between the p u m p
and the gearbox for clogging and deformation.
N O - Power assist is O K . B
2. Measure steady-state fluid pressure f r o m the p u m p
at idle w i t h T/N 07406-0010001 (see page 17-7) or
w i t h T/N 07406-001000A (see page 17-8).
2
psi) or less?
Go to step 7.
85
kgf/cm
deformed?
valve
OK?
Y E S Faulty p u m p a s s e m b l y .
N O - F a u l t y f l o w control valve.
9. Check the cylinder lines A and B for deformation
(see page 17-12).
Y E S - G o to step 4.
NO
or
Y E S - G o to step 3.
NO
Go to step 8.
deformed?
Y E S Replace the l i n e s .
N O - G o to step 10.
kgf,
10. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack
guide (to tight).
Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO
Go to step 9.
17-6
kgf/crrf,
adjusted
07406-0010001
07VAK-P8A011A
(1.1 k g f m , 8 Ibfft)
3. Connect the P/S joint adapter (hose) to the P/S
pressure gauge, then connect the p u m p outlet hose
(A) to the P/S joint adapter (hose).
[NOTICE]
Do not keep the pressure control valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the p u m p could be damaged by
over-heating.
11. Immediately open the pressure control valve fully.
If the p u m p is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 7 , 6 0 0 - 8 , 3 0 0 kPa ( 7 8 - 8 5 kgf/cm ,
1,1101,210 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the p u m p .
2
17-7
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A
Special Tools Required
P/S joint adapter (pump), 07VAK-P8A011A
P/S joint adapter plate (pump), 07VAK-P8A012B
P/S joint adapter (hose), 07RAK-S040122
P/S pressure gauge, 07406-001000A
I NOTICE I
17-8
H O S E S and LINES
Inspect hoses for d a m a g e , leaks, interference a n d t w i s t i n g
Inspect fluid lines for d a m a g e , rusting and leakage.
C h e c k f o r leaks at h o s e a n d line j o i n t s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s .
Power Steering
Pump Belt Inspection and Adjustment
Special Tools Required
Belt tension gauge set, 07JGG-001000A or
Belt tension gauge, 07JGG-001010A
Adjustment
3. Loosen the power steering p u m p mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
3 9 0 - 5 4 0 N ( 4 0 - 5 5 kgf, 8 8 - 1 2 1 Ibf)
740 880 N (75 90 kgf, 1 6 5 1 9 8 Ibf)
0 7 J G G - 0 0 1 0 0 0 A or
07JGG-001010A
2 4 N m (2.4 k g f m , 17 I b f f t )
17-10
Deflection Method
Inspection
Adjustment
3. Loosen the power steering p u m p mounting nut (A)
and bolt (B).
2 4 N m (2.4 k g f - m , 17 I b f f t )
17-11
Power Steering
Hoses and Lines Replacement
Note these items during installation:
Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance f r o m the hose end as s h o w n .
Check all clamps for deterioration or d e f o r m a t i o n ; replace w i t h the clamps new ones if necessary.
A d d the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
A D J U S T A B L E HOSE CLAMP (A)
2 . 5 5 . 5 mm
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 in.)
2 . 5 5 . 5 mm
( 0 . 0 1 - 0 . 2 2 In.)
17-12
2.04.0 mm
( 0 . 0 8 - 0 . 1 6 in.)
1.0
mm
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
6 x 1.0 m m B O L T
17-13
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
R e p l a c e t h e p u m p a s a n a s s e m b l y If t h e p a r t s "indicated w i t h a s t e r i s k (*) a r e w o r n o r d a m a g e d .
4 . 5 mm
ROLLER
FLANGE BOLTS
2 0 N m (2.0 k g f - m , 1 4 I b f f t )
*PUMP COVER
*SIDE PLATE
5 mm
ROLLER
15.2x2.4 m m O-RING
Replace.
51 x 2 . 4 m m O - R I N G
Replace.
13 x 1.9 m m O - R I N G
Replace.
INLET JOINT
FLANGE BOLTS
11 N - m (1.1 k g f - m ,
8 Ibfft)
SPRING
15.2x2.4 m m O-RING
Replace.
PULLEY NUT
6 4 N - m (6.5 k g f - m , 47 I b f f t )
17-14
Inspection
Disassembly
NOTE; Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure.
1. Remove the power steering p u m p (see page 17-13).
2. Drain the fluid f r o m the pump.
3. Hold the steering p u m p (A) in a vise w i t h soft jaws,
hold the pulley (B) w i t h the special tool, and
remove the pulley nut (C) and pulley. Be careful not
to damage the pump housing w i t h the jaws of the
vise.
07725-0030000
B
12. Slip the f l o w control valve back in the p u m p
housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 13; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not
available separately.
(cont'd)
17-15
Power Steering
Pomp Overhaul (cont'd)
13. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the f l o w control
valve (B) as s h o w n . Then submerge the f l o w
control valve (B) in a container of power steering
fluid or solvent (C), and b l o w in the hose.
If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm , 14.2 psi), replace the p u m p
as an assembly. The f l o w control valve is not
available separately.
If the f l o w control valve tests OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
Reassembly
16. Clean the disassembled parts w i t h solvent, and dry
them w i t h compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
in solvent.
17. Align the pin (A) of the sub-valve (B) w i t h the oil
passage (C) in the p u m p housing, and push the
sub-valve into place, then install the snap ring (D).
WE
iulJJji
17-16
ID
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (C) by aligning
the roller set holes (D) in the side plate w i t h the
rollers (E).
(cont'd)
17-17
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
28. Coat the new O-ring (A) w i t h power steering f l u i d ,
and position it in the bottom of the p u m p housing
(B).
8 x 1.25 m m
20 N m
(2.0 k g f - m , 1 4 I b f f t )
32. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
nut (B). Hold the steering p u m p in a vise w i t h soft
jaws. Be careful not to damage the p u m p housing
w i t h the jaws of the vise.
07725-0030000
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m ,
47 Ibfft)
4 9 N - m (5.0 k g f - m ,
36 Ibfft)
17-18
33. Hold the pulley (A) w i t h the special tool, and tighten
the pulley nut (B).
34. Check that the p u m p turns smoothly by turning the
pulley by hand.
6 9 N - m (7.0 k g f - m ,
60 + 5
17-19
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
F L A R E NUTS
13 N-m (1-3 k g f m ,
9.4
Ibfft)
FLANGE BOLTS
1 9 N-m (1.9 k g f m , 1.4 I b f f t )
17-20
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot band (A) and tie-rod clips (B). Pull
the boots away f r o m the ends of the gearbox.
(cont'd)
17-21
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
5. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide
screw (B).
17-22
13. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (B), and
steering rack (C) f r o m the steering gearbox.
A
14. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B)
f r o m the rack bushing (C).
15. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside of seal ring groove and piston edges w h e n
removing the seal ring.
(cont'd)
17-23
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
20. Turn the special tool so it will fit through the rack
guide hole of the steering gearbox, then position
the special tool on the cylinder end seal (A). Make
sure that the special tool is securely positioned on
the seal edges.
Reassembly
22. Coat the special tool w i t h power steering fluid, then
slide it onto the rack, big end first.
23. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
ring (B) on the special tool, then slide them d o w n
t o w a r d the big end of the tool.
Note these items during reassembly:
Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings w i t h care so as not to damage
t h e m . After installation, be sure to contract the
seal ring using the special tool (sizing tool).
Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
24. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the
special tool w i t h power steering fluid, then
carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over the
piston seal ring.
07TAF-SZ50100
0 7 L A G - S M 4 0 1 0 A or
07LAG-SM40100
26. Move the special tool back and forth several times
to make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston.
17-24
27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped
portion.
28. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack w i t h its grooved side toward the
piston. W h e n installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not damage the lip of the seal w i t h the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
A
I
32. Install the cylinder and seal (B) into the bottom of
the cylinder by pressing on the tool w i t h a press.
Do not push on the tool w i t h excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
(cont'd)
17-25
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
coat the surface of the tape with power steering
fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
carefully so there is no stepped portion.
35. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
rack bushing (B) using the special tools.
SS
07749-0010000
A
07746-0010300
36. Coat the new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,
and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
17-26
37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with
the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the
piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger.
38. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the
hole (B) is aligned with the slot (C) on the steering
rack.
40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (B) of
the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop
counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in
the rack stop.
A
45. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new Orings with power steering fluid, then install the
lines.
Note these items during reassembly:
Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material.
Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
13 N m (1.3 k g f m , 9 . 4 I b f f t )
42. Install the nut (D) onto the pinion shaft end, and
tighten to specified torque. After tightening, use a
drift to stake the nut shoulder (E) against the pinion
shaft.
47. Apply new sealant all the way around the first 3
threads of the rack guide screw (B), then install the
spring (C) rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
f
43. Apply sealant all the way around the threads on the
end plug (F), install the end plug onto the gearbox
housing, and tighten it to the specified torque.
48. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-19). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
sliding it right and left.
(cont'd)
17-27
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
49. Install the stop washer (A) w i t h the chamfered side
facing out, and screw each rack end (B) into the
rack while holding the lock washer (C) so its tabs
(D) are in the slots (E) in the end of the rack.
B
53. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (B) to the boot
grooves (B) on the rack ends.
50. Hold the flat surface sections of the right side
steering rack w i t h a w r e n c h , and tighten both rack
ends. Be careful not to damage the rack surface
w i t h the w r e n c h .
5 1 . Bend the lock washer back against the flat spots on
the rack end joint housing.
17-28
55. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (B) of the band.
57. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
Installation
58. Install the steering gearbox; refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 17-47).
Note these items during installation:
Reinstall exhaust pipe A w i t h new gasket (see
page 5-11).
Reconnect the primary H02S sensor connector.
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components
Front Brake P a d s Inspection
and R e p l a c e m e n t
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) Components
19-2
19-4
19-7
NOTE; Refer to the 1 9 9 8 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008 for the items not
s h o w n in this section.
ACAUTION
A
9.8 N m
(1.0 k
7.2 Ibfft)
L
i
5. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the front pads and shims together as
a set.
6. Clean the caliper thoroughly; remove any rust, and
check for grooves and cracks.
7. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks.
19-2
8. Install the pad retainers (A).
11. Push in the piston (A) so the caliper will fit over the
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
19-3
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
Avoid breathing dust particles
Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; It may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages w i t h compressed air.
Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake f l u i d .
Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
W h e n reusing pads, always reinstall the brake pads in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
Do not reuse drained brake flued.
Always use Genuine Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
Coat the piston, piston seal, and caliper bore w i t h clean brake fluid.
Replace all rubber parts w i t h new ones.
After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
19-4
Sedan:
^3Mm:S\\
licone
grease
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f m , 2 5 Ibfft)
BRAKE HOSE
10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f m , 2 5 I b f f t )
/SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
BLEED SCREW
9 N m (0.9 k g f m , 6.5 I b f f t )
CALIPER BODY
CAM BOOT
Replace.
S L E E V E PISTON
BEARING A
ADJUSTING SPRING B
SPRING COVER
CIRCLIP
PISTON A S S E M B L Y
BRAKE PADS
OUTER PAD SHIM
CALIPER BRACKET
10 m m F L A N G E B O L T S
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f m , 2 8 I b f f t )
PIN B O O T
(cont'd)
19-5
: Silicone grease
GREASE!
10 x 1.25 mm
43 N m
(4.4 k g f - m , 3 2
: Rubber grease
BANJO BOLT
3 4 N m (3.5 k g f - m , 2 5 I b f f t )
, SEALING WASHERS
Replace.
Ibfft)
BLEED SCREW
9 N m (0.9 k g f - m , 6.5 I b f f t )
PISTON SEAL
Replace.
CAM BOOT
Replace.
PISTON BOOT
Replace.
PARKING L E V E R /
CAM ASSEMBLY
RETURN
SPRING
PAD SPRING
% GREASES!
CALIPER BOLTS
8 x 1.0 m m
2 5 N m (2.5 k g f - m , 19 I b f f t )
BOOT CLIP
Replace.
PIN A
PIN B O O T S
Replace.
BRAKE PADS
RETAINER
PIN B O O T S
SILICONE
GREASE
CALIPER
BRACKET
FLANGE BOLTS
10 x 1.25 m m
5 5 N - m (5.6 k g f - m , 41 I b f f t )
PIN
19-6
Brakes
ABS Components ('98-00 Models)
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
19-8
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
19-9
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Index
19-10
Circuit D i a g r a m
19-12
DTC Troubleshooting
A B S Indicator Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g
19-14
...................
..............
19-18
19-21
19-22
NOTE: Refer to the 1998 - 2 0 0 1 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for the items not
s h o w n in this section.
Ground numbers of pump motor ground and ABS control unit ground were changed;
-
ABS Components
Component Location Index
/UNDER-HOOD ARSRELAY BOX
(PUMP MOTOR RELAY)
Inspection, page 22-52
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
/UNDER-HOOD ABS RELAY BOX
(FAIL-SAFE RELAY)
Inspection, page 22-52
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
/UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
/PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
19-8
DATA LINK
C O N N E C T O R (16P)
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L S E N S O R
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-70
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-71
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-70
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-71
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
Detection item
Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body g r o u n d / s h o r t to power)
DTC: 12
R i g h t - f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 13
DTC: 14
L e f t - f r o n t w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 15
DTC: 16
R i g h t - r e a r w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 17
Left-rear w h e e l s e n s o r ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d / s h o r t t o p o w e r )
DTC: 18
Left-rear w h e e l s e n s o r (electrical n o i s e / i n t e r m i t t e n t i n t e r r u p t i o n )
DTC: 21
Right-front pulser
DTC: 22
Left-front pulser
DTC: 23
Right-rear pulser
DTC: 24
Left-rear p u l s e r
DTC: 31
R i g h t - f r o n t inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 32
DTC: 33
L e f t - f r o n t inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 34
DTC: 35
R i g h t - r e a r inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 36
DTC: 37
L e f t - r e a r inlet s o l e n o i d
DTC: 38
Left-rear o u t l e t s o l e n o i d
DTC: 41
Right-front w h e e l lock
DTC: 42
L e f t - f r o n t w h e e l lock
DTC: 43
R i g h t - r e a r w h e e l lock
DTC: 44
L e f t - r e a r w h e e l lock
DTC: 51
M o t o r lock
DTC: 52
DTC: 53
DTC: 54
M o t o r s t u c k OFF
M o t o r stuck O N
Fail-safe relay
DTC: 61
L o w ignition voltage
DTC: 62
DTC: 71
DTC: 81
C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) d i a g n o s i s , a n d R O M / R A M d i a g n o s i s
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-52)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-53)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-52)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-53)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-52)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-53)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-52)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-53)
Refer t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1
(see p a g e 19-54)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-54)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-54)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-54)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-55)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-58)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-58)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-58)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-58)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-59)
(see p a g e 19-14)
(see p a g e 19-16)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-63)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-65)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-65)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-66)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
(see p a g e 19-66)
Note
Accord Service Manual
A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
Accord Service Manual
A c c o r d Service Manual
19-9
ABS Components
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
Diagnostic procedure
19-10
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
7P CONNECTOR ( number)
A"
1
a^\a/
ir
/ l l 7
18
10
11112
J s
A"
MODULATOR UNIT
CONNECTOR
( O number)
15
r-i
| I
i o ' n :12 13 i 4 , i 5 i i e ; i 7
18 19 20
GAUGE A S S E M B L R Y CONNECTORS
22P CONNECTOR ( O number)
o
.i'i2y/;/i6!>oy
7(8
PUMP MOTOR
CONNECTOR
( number)
19! 20 21122
8 j 9 10Jll|XJl2
19-12
14 15 16
TVBSl
ABS C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S
CONNECTOR a (22P)
FRONT/REAR
CONNECTOR B
JU.
p 5 3 ,
Terminal side o f
male t e r m i n a l s
(12P)
, n,
Wire side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-13
ABS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
D T C 52: Motor Stuck O F F
1. Check the ABS MOTOR (30 A) fuse in the underhood fuse/relay box, and reinstall the fuse if it is OK,
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
'
I
I
+B
(WHT)
II
I
J
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE
T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the fuse
4
+B
(WHT)
I
[
[|
3
|
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
blown?
JUMPER WIRE
T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the fuse
blown?
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 6.
NO Replace the p u m p motor relay.
N O - G o to step 3.
3. Check the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box, and
reinstall the fuse if it is OK.
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 11.
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO
operate?
Go to step 7.
19-14
I MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
PMR (YEL/RED)
JUMPER
WIRE
(V)
+B
2lxTi
(WHT)
T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
13. Measure the voltage between the ABS control unit
connector terminal B12 and body ground.
Y E S - G o to step 10.
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
I
1
. _r-j
PMR
,
M O T O R G N D (BLK)
(YEL/RED)
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
Is there battery
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Is there battery
voltage?
voltage?
Y E S - G o to step 14.
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood ABS relay box and the ABS control unit.
(cont'd)
19-15
ABS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
14. Remove the j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the p u m p m o t o r
relay connector.
operate?
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
I
I T "
1
y ,
PMR
(YEL/RED)
Is the fuse OK ?
Y E S Remove the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO -Replacethe fuse, and recheck.B
W i r e side of female terminals
voltage?
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 1 2 / 14 15 /
(YJ
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx.
10 V?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
NO Repair open in the wire between the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box and the
ABS control u n i t . B
5. Reinstall the ABS MTR CHK (7.5 A) fuse in the
passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box.
19-16
(12P)
u r n
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
L1 t
u "
PMR
J
(YEL/RED)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx.
10 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
Is there
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
continuity?
M O T O R G N D (BLK)
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx.
10 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
NO Repair open in the wire between the p u m p
motor and body ground (G203).B
19-17
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON(II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
Does the ABS indicator
come on?
N O - G o to step 2.
1 2 3
8 9 10 11
4 5 6 7
12 / 14 15 16
WALP (BLU/WHT)
indicator
come on?
Go to step 3.
W i r e side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Go to step 10.
come on?
G o t o step 6.
1 2
11 12
6 7 8 9 10
X/4 /5 16
X
XXX19 20 21 22
JUMPER
WIRE
G N D (BLK)
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 7.
W i r e side of female terminals
NO
come on?
19-18
Is the fuse OK ?
YES
IG2 (YEL/BLK)
G o t o step 14.
__n
NO
12
4
14
t1 _
6 7 8 9 10 11
16 17 18 19 20 21 22
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (22P)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
G N D 3 (BLK)
X
JUMPER
WIRE
-TL-
17
4 / 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 14 / 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
I
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - Go to step 17.
go
A B S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (12P)
off?
JUMPER
WIRE
WALP (BLU/WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
go
off?
(cont'd)
19-19
ABS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
18. Connect the gauge assembly 16P connector
terminal No. 10 to body g r o u n d w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y 16P C O N N E C T O R
2.
1 2 3 "'>-<.' 4 5 6 7
14 15 16
8 9 10 11
12
X X
JUMPER
WIRE
WALP (BLU/WHT)
go
off?
19-20
Removal
1. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B) and the pump motor connector (A).
2. Disconnect the brake lines, then remove the modulator unit (C).
Installation
3. Install the modulator unit, then connect the brake lines. Tighten the flare nuts to 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 lbf-ft).
4. Connect the modulator unit connector and the pump motor connector.
5. Bleed the brake system, starting with the front wheels.
6. Start the engine, and check that the A B S indicator goes off.
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the A B S indicator does not come on.
19-21
ABS Components
ABS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.
2. Disconnect the ABS control unit connectors.
19-22
Brakes
#
19-24
19-25
19-30
19-31
19-32
19-46
19-48
19-76
19-78
19-80
19-81
19-82
19-82
19-83
ABS/TCS Components
Component Location index
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L S E N S O R
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-82
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 19-83
TCS SWITCH
T e s t , p a g e 19-81
M O D U L A T O R UNIT
Removal and Installation,
p a g e 19-80
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (16P)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-82
19-24
Self-diagnosis
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine
starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis/the
ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Kickback
The pump motor operates w h e n the ABS is functioning,
and the fluid in the reservoir is forced out to the master
cylinder, causing kickback at the brake pedal.
Pump Motor
When a problem is detected and the ABS or TCS
indicator comes on, there are cases w h e n the
indicator stays on until the ignition switch is turned
OFF, and cases w h e n the indicator goes off
automatically w h e n the system returns to normal. For
ABS DTCs 61 and 62, the indicator goes off
automatically when the system returns to normal. For
all other codes, the indicator stays on until the
ignition switch is turned OFF.
For ABS DTCs 12, 14, 16, 18, 2 1 , 22, 23, 24, 5 1 , 52 and
53, the ABS indicator goes off w h e n the vehicle is
driven again and the system is OK after the ignition
switch is turned f r o m OFF to ON (II). However, if the
DTC is cleared, the CPU resets and the indicator goes
off right after the engine is started if the system is OK.
(cont'd)
19-25
ABS/TCS Components
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
How to Troubleshoot A B S and T C S DTCs
The troubleshooting flowchart procedures assume that
the cause of the problem is still present and the ABS
and/or TCS indicator is still on. Following the f l o w c h a r t
w h e n the ABS and/or TCS indicator does not come on
can result in incorrect diagnosis.
The connector illustrations show the female terminal
connectors w i t h a single outline and the male terminal
connectors w i t h a double outline.
1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n
the problem occured, and try to reproduce the
same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
w h e n the ABS and/or TCS indicator came on, such
as during ABS control, after ABS control, w h e n
vehicle speed was at a certain speed, etc.
19-26
E x a m p l e of D T C 1 5
Short blinks
(five t i m e s )
L o n g blink
ON
1 n n n n r
OFF
'
U U U U U
E x a m p l e of D T C 2 2
L o n g blinks (two times)
Short blinks
(two t i m e s )
OFF
*'
(cont'd)
19-27
ABS/TCS Components
General Troubleshooting information (cont'd)
3. Press the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) while keeping the
brake pedal pressed.
5. After the ABS indicator goes off, release the brake
pedal.
ON
ABS
indicator
OFF
d
DepressedBrake
pedal
R e l e a s e d --
I g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II)
a: 2 sec.
b: 4 s e c .
19-28
c : 0.3 s e c .
d: within 3 s e c .
I
r
H o w to Clear T C S DTCs
Honda PGM Tester M e t h o d :
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the Honda
PGM Tester (A) to the 16P Data Link Connector
(DLC) (B) behind the driver's kick panel.
ABS
S t a n d a r d Indication Pattern
ON
Continues O N
r-
T C S Indicator
OFF
I
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h O N (II)
A b n o r m a l Indication Pattern
blinks repeatedly
ON
T C S Indicator
OFF
a : 0.3 s e c .
I g n i t i o n S w i t c h O N (II)
19-29
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting Index
ABS DTCs
DTC
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
23
24
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
51
52
53
54
61
62
71
81
Detection I t e m
Right-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
Right-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Left-front wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
Left-front wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Right-rear wheel sensor (open/short to body ground/short to power)
Right-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Left-rear wheel sensor (open/short t o body ground/short to power)
Left-rear wheel sensor (electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
Right-front pulser
Left-front pulser
Right-rear pulser
Left-rear pulser
Right-front inlet solenoid
Right-front outlet solenoid
Left-front inlet solenoid
Left-front outlet solenoid
Right-rear inlet solenoid
Right-rear outlet solenoid
Left-rear inlet solenoid
Left-rear outlet solenoid
Right-front wheel lock
Left-front wheel lock
Right-rear wheel lock
Left-rear wheel lock
Motor lock
Motor stuck OFF
Motor stuck ON
ABS Fail-safe relay
Low ignition voltage
High ignition voltage
Different diameter tire
Central Processing Unit (CPU) diagnosis, and ROM/RAM diagnosis
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
aMote
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-48)
page 19-49)
page 19-50)
page 19-50)
page 19-50)
page 19-50)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-51)
page 19-54)
page 19-54)
page 19-54)
page 19-54)
page 19-55)
page 19-55)
page 19-57)
page 19-59)
page 19-61)
page 19-61)
page 19-62)
page 19-62)
T C S DTCs
DTC
24
25
26
27
28
31
32
34
36
61
81
Detection Item
RF TCS NO solenoid
RF TCS NC solenoid
LF TCS NO solenoid
LF TCS NC solenoid
TCS relay
Engine retard c o m m a n d (PFINH) signal
Engine speed (NEP) signal
Reference voltage (VREF) signal
Throttle position sensor output (THLOUT) signal
A/T shift position (ATSFTP) signal
Continuous TCS operation
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
Note
page 19-63)
page 19-63)
page 19-63)
page 19-63)
page 19-66)
page 19-69)
page 19-71)
page 19-72)
page 19-73)
page 19-74)
page 19-75)
19-30
Diagnostic procedure
ABS indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-76)
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page
19-76)
The vehicle is OK at this time (see page 19-25)
19-31
ABS/TCS Components
System Description
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (26P)
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (26P)
n
2
1
GND1 N C L
n
3
NOL
15
NCR
16
NOR
X
4
ABS
8
FLW
6
SCS
18
TCS1
n
10
11
FRW FRW
(-)
(-)
21
20
RLW
MCK
(+)
22
{+)
24
RRW RRW
(+)
(-)
n
12
13
STOP IG2
25
FSR
26
DLC
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
Terminal
number
W i r e color
BLK
YEL/GRN
GRY
BLU/WHT
ABS
BRN
BRN
GRN/BLU
10
GRN
11
GRN/BLK
12
WHT/BLK
FLW(-)
(Front-left w h e e l
neqative)
FLW( + )
(Front-left w h e e l
positive)
FRW(
)
(Front-right wheel
neqative)
FRWH-)
(Front-right wheel
positive)
STOP
13
YEL/BLK
GND1
( G r o u n d 1)
NCL
( N o r m a l l y c l o s e d left)
NOL
( N o r m a l l y o p e n left)
IG2
( I g n i t i o n 2)
Description
Terminal
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II))
Ground
1-GND
D r i v e s left T C S n o r m a l l y
closed solenoid valve
D r i v e s left T C S n o r m a l l y
open solenoid valve
2-GND
Drives A B S indicator
(Turns the indicator drive
transistor to O N , then
t u r n s off the indicator)
Detects service check
c o n n e c t o r signal (Use f o r
DTC i n d i c a t i o n )
Detects left-front w h e e l
sensor signal
4-GND
ABS
indicator
6-GND
SCS C i r c u i t
Detects right-front w h e e l
sensor signal
B e l o w 0.3 V
TCS
Indicator
3-GND
8-9
Wheel
OFF
Battery
Voltage
B e l o w 0. 3 V
ON
(Disconnect
16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
ON
OFF
4 - 6 V
B e l o w 1.0 V
Shorted
Opened
B e l o w 0.3 V
Approx. 5 V
T u r n w h e e l at
1 turn/second
10-11
AC:
0. 053 V o r
above
(Reference)
Oscilloscope:
0.15 V p - p o r
above
Stopped
0.25 V 1.15V
Battery
Voltage
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltaqe
B e l o w 0.3 V
12-GND
Brake p e d a l
Pressed
13-GND
Ignition switch
Released
O N (II)
S t a r t (III)
19-32
Voltage
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
Description
LT B L U
NCR
(Normally closed riqht)
NOR
(Normally opened
right)
18
RED/WHT
TCS1
20
GRN
MCK
( M o t o r check)
Terminal
number
Wire color
15
RED/GRN
16
21
LT B L U
22
GRY
23
GRN/YEL
24
BLU/YEL
25
YEL/GRN
26
LT B L U
R L W (+)
(Rear-left w h e e l
positive)
RLW(-)
(Rear-left w h e e l
positive)
RRW( + )
(Rear-right w h e e l
positive)
RRW(-)
(Rear-right w h e e l
neqative)
FSR
(Fail-safe relay)
DLC
(Data link c o n n e c t o r )
Terminal
15-GND
16-GND
18-GND
TCS indicator
20-GND
Pump motor
Detects left-rear w h e e l
sensor signal
21-22
Detects r i g h t - r e a r w h e e l
sensor signal
23-24
D r i v e s A B S fail-safe relay
( A B S f a i l - s a f e relay is
t u r n e d OFF t o s h u t off t h e
power source to the
solenoid and p u m p
m o t o r relay w h e n a
p r o b l e m occurs.)
Communicates with the
Honda P G M Tester
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II)}
OFF
TCS indicator
25-GND
ON
(Disconnect
16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
With engine
running, and
i n d i c a t o r OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Remove MCK fuse
T u r n w h e e l at
Wheel
1 turn/second
ABS
(SCS c i r c u i t
m u s t be open)
Voltage
Battery
Voltaqe
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltage
Approx. 2 V
Battery
Voltaqe
B e l o w 0.3 V
A p p r o x . 10 V
AC:
0. 053V o r
above
(Reference)
Oscilloscope:
0.15 V p - p o r
above
Stopped
0.25 V 1.15 V
Warning
Normal
B e l o w 0.3 V
A p p r o x . 11V
(cont'd)
19-33
ABS/TCS Components
System Description (cont'd)
A B S / T C S Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (16P)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
1
FP
TDR
2
VREF
OUT
10
PF
INH
TCS
SW
11
NEP
AT
SFTP
14
15
16
13
T C S R P A R K PMR T C S 2
Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
Terminal
number
Wire color
PNK
ORN/GRN
ORN/WHT
TCS S W
(TCS s w i t c h )
LTGRN
YEL/GRN
10
BLU
ATSFTP
(AT shift position)
THLOUT
(Throttle out)
PFINH
(Powertrain to frame
inhibition)
FPTDR
( F r a m e to p o w e r t r a i n
torque d o w n request)
VREF
(Voltage reference)
NEP
(Enqine speed pulse)
TCSR
(TCS relay)
Description
Terminal
Outputs e n g i n e retard
request signal
1-GND
2-GND
Detects A / T s h i f t p o s i t i o n
signal
Detects t h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n
sensor signal
Detects T C S o p e r a t i o n
permission signal
7-GND
Operating
4-GND
TCS
switch
10-GND
TCS switch
pressed
OFF (TCS i n d i c a t o r
is O N )
Shift the transmission to E ,
t h e n start t h e e n g i n e .
Throttle
Fully closed
valve
Fully o p e n e d
Permission (normal)
Detects e n g i n e s p e e d
signal
D r i v e s T C S r e l a y (TCS
relay is t u r n e d OFF t o
shut off the p o w e r source
to the TCS solenoid and
p u m p m o t o r relay w h e n a
problem occurs)
Detects p a r k i n g b r a k e
switch signal
11-GND
I n h i b i t i o n (the c o o l a n t
t e m p e r a t u r e is 0C or b e l o w )
Failure (TCS a n d / o r P C M has
failed)
Engine idling
9-GND
11
BLU
13
GRN/YEL
14
GRN/RED
PARK
(Parking)
15
YEL/RED
PMR
( P u m p m o t o r relay)
Drives p u m p m o t o r relay
15-GND
16
RED/WHT
TCS2
16-GND
19-34
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II))
TCS
Not operating
Voltage
A p p r o x . 2.5 V
(5V, d u t y 50)
A p p r o x . 5V
A p p r o x . 5V
Battery
Voltaqe
0 V
Approx. 4 V
A p p r o x . 0.5V
A p p r o x . 4.8V
A p p l o x . 2.5V
(5V, d u t y 50)
Approx. 5 V
Applox. 0 V
Approx. 6 V
13-GND
TCS (SCS
circuit
m u s t be
opened)
Warning
Normal
B e l o w 0.3 V
A p p r o x . 11 V
14-GND
With
engine
running,
parking
brake
ABS
indicator
Pulled
Released
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltage
Tcs
OFF]
Pump
motor
ON
OFF
indicator
ON
ON
OFF
B e l o w 1.0 V
Battery
Voltage
B e l o w 0.3 V
Battery
Voltaqe
Approx. 2 V
2
LG
8
7
RRGND3 IN
3
RROUT
9
FLIN
4
FLOUT
10
RLIN
6
5
RL~ FROUT OUT
11
12
FRIN GND2
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Terminal
number
W i r e color
BRN/BLK
YEL/WHT
YEL/BLU
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
BLK
RED/WHT
RED/BLU
10
RED/GRN
11
RED/BLK
12
BLK
Terminal sign
(Terminal name)
LG
(Loqic q r o u n d )
RR-OUT
(Rear-riqht outlet)
FL-OUT
(Front-left outlet)
RL-OUT
(Rear-left o u t l e t )
FR-OUT
(Front-right outlet)
GND3
( G r o u n d 3)
RR-IN
( R e a r - r i g h t inlet)
FL-IN
( F r o n t - l e f t inlet)
RL-IN
(Rear-left inlet)
FR-IN
( F r o n t - r i g h t inlet)
GND2
( G r o u n d 2)
Description
Terminal
G r o u n d for logic circuit
2-GND
3-GND
Ground
7-GND
D r i v e s r i g h t - r e a r inlet
solenoid valve
Drives left-front inlet
solenoid valve
D r i v e s left-rear inlet
solenoid valve
Drives right-front inlet
solenoid valve
8-GND
Ground
Measurement
Conditions
(Ignition s w i t c h O N (II))
Voltage
B e l o w 0.3 V
ABS indicator
OFF
Battery
Voltage
ON
(Disconnect
16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
B e l o w 0.3 V
4-GND
5-GND
6-GND
B e l o w 0.3 V
ABS indicator
OFF
Battery
Voltage
ON
(Disconnect
16P c o n n e c t o r
to turn
indicator on)
B e l o w 0.3 V
9-GND
10-GND
11-GND
12-GND
B e l o w 0.3 V
(cont'd)
19-35
ABS/TCS Components
System Description (cont'd)
Outline
This system consists of the ABS/TCS control unit, the m o d u l a t o r unit, f o u r w h e e l sensors, and the PCM. The system integrates the A B S (Antil o c k Brake S y s t e m ) a n d t h e T C S ( T r a c t i o n C o n t r o l S y s t e m ) a n d c o n t r o l s b o t h s y s t e m s u s i n g t h e b r a k e s .
A B S control
ABS/TCS
I m p r o v e s a c c e l e r a t i n g ability f r o m a standstill on slipperly road surfaces.
T C S control
I m p r o v e s t r a c t i o n w h e n o n e drive w h e e l is o n a slippery road surface.
19-36
ABS Features
W h e n t h e b r a k e p e d a l is p r e s s e d w h i l e d r i v i n g , t h e w h e e l s can lock b e f o r e t h e v e h i c l e c o m e s t o a s t o p . In s u c h an e v e n t , t h e m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y o f
t h e v e h i c l e is r e d u c e d if t h e f r o n t w h e e l s are l o c k e d , a n d t h e s t a b i l i t y o f t h e v e h i c l e is r e d u c e d if t h e rear w h e e l s a r e l o c k e d , c r e a t i n g a n
e x t r e m e l y u n s t a b l e c o n d i t i o n . T h e A B S p r e c i s e l y c o n t r o l s t h e s l i p rate o f t h e w h e e l s t o e n s u r e m a x i m u m g r i p f o r c e f r o m t h e t i r e s , a n d it t h e r e b y
e n s u r e s m a n e u v e r a b i l i t y a n d s t a b i l i t y of t h e v e h i c l e .
T h e A B S c a l c u l a t e s t h e slip rate o f t h e w h e e l s b a s e d o n t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d a n d t h e w h e e l s p e e d , t h e n it c o n t r o l s t h e b r a k e f l u i d p r e s s u r e t o a t t a i n
t h e t a r g e t s l i p rate.
Grip F o r c e of Tire a n d R o a d S u r f a c e
COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
TARGET SLIP RATE
SLIP RATE
TCS Features
T h e T C S p r o v i d e s l o w s p e e d t r a c t i o n . W h e n a d r i v e w h e e l loses t r a c t i o n o n a s l i p p e r l y r o a d s u r f a c e a n d s t a r t s t o s p i n , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
s e n d s a b r a k e s i g n a l t o t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t , w h i c h a p p l i e s brake p r e s s u r e t o s l o w t h e s p i n n i n g w h e e l . A t t h a t t i m e , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
s e n d s an e n g i n e r e t a r d s i g n a l t o t h e P C M t o p r e v e n t d a m a g e t o t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n .
(cont'd)
19-37
ABS/TCS Components
System Description (cont'd)
ABS Main Control
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s t h e w h e e l s p e e d b a s e d o n t h e w h e e l s e n s o r s i g n a l it r e c e i v e d , t h e n it c a l c u l a t e s t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d b a s e d o n
t h e d e t e c t e d w h e e l s p e e d . T h e c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d d u r i n g d e c e l e r a t i o n b a s e d o n t h e rate o f d e c e l e r a t i o n .
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t c a l c u l a t e s t h e s l i p r a t e o f e a c h w h e e l , a n d it t r a n s m i t s t h e c o n t r o l s i g n a l t o t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t s o l e n o i d v a l v e w h e n
t h e s l i p r a t e is h i g h .
T h e pressure r e d u c t i o n c o n t r o l has 3 m o d e s : p r e s s u r e i n t e n s i f y i n g , p r e s s u r e r e t a i n i n g , a n d pressure r e d u c i n g .
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT
Detect
Vehicle S p e e d
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
|
Wheel Speed |
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
Wheel Speed
\ \
J J
\
J
Detect
Slip Rate
3>
ABS
Control
Select L o w
Speed Wheel
RIGHT-FRONT
1
Detect
W H E E L S E N S O R f ~ f ^ Wheel Speed
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR
Reference
Slip Rate
Detect
Wheel Speed
Drive
.
Solenoid [
^
|
RIGHT-REAR
SOLENOID
Drive
Solenoid
LEFT-REAR
SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
SOLENOID
RIGHT-FRONT
Detect
Slip Rate
ABS
Control
Drive
Solenoid
Detect
Slip Rate
ABS
Control
Drive
1
Solenoid
L
:
I LEFT-FRONT
SOLENOID
T C S Main Control
The ABS/TCS control unit controls t h e TCS based o n signal inputs f r o m the throttle position sensor, engine speed sensor, shift position sensor,
a n d t h e w h e e l s e n s o r s . In a d d i t i o n , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t s e n d s a n e n g i n e r e t a r d r e q u e s t s i g n a l t o t h e P C M if n e c e s s a r y . T h e A B S / T C S
c o n t r o l u n i t uses t h e m o d u l a t o r u n i t t o c o n t r o l t h e T C S . T h e pressure i n t e n s i f y i n g control has three m o d e s : pressure i n t e n s i f y i n g , pressure
retaining, and pressure reducing.
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT
THROTTLE
ANGLE SENSOR
Calucufate
traction torque
Calculate control
condition signal
slip rate
Calculate amount
of right-front
wheel control
Drive
solenoid
RIGHT-FRONT
SOLENOID
Calculate amount
of left-front
wheel control
Drive
solenoid
LEFT-FRONT
SOLENOID
Calculate control
target value
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
wheel speed
LEFT-REAR
WHEEL S E N S O R ~ ~ |
Detect
wheel speed
RIGHT-FRONT
WHEEL S E N S O R
Detect
wheel speed
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR
Detect
wheel speed
19-38
Calculate
vehicle speed
Calculate drive
wheel speed
avarage
Calculate
deviation
Calculate drive
wheel speed
difference
Calculate
deviation
ABS Self-Diagnosis
The A B S / T C S control unit is equipped with a main CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
9
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the A B S / T C S control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
ABS Self-diagnosis Table
Diagnostic Trouble
Detection Item
Code (DTC)
21-24
Pulser
31-38
41-44
Wheel lock
51
M o t o r lock
52
Detection Timing
Initial
Regular
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
Fail-safe Mode
AO
AO, LO
AO, LO
o
o
AO, LO
M o t o r stuck OFF
AO, LO
53
M o t o r stuck ON
AO, LO
54
Fail-safe relay
61
L o w ignition voltage
62
71
81
S1
AO, LO
S1
BO
BO
S1
S1
T C S Indicator
Regular operation
Operation Mode
Operation in n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n
Description
OFF
OFF
Fail-safe mode-S1
The ABS/TCS control unit t u r n s the system off (ABS fail-safe relay off) w h e n the
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Fail-safe mode-LO
Fail-safe mode-BO
The ABS/TCS control unit w i l l t u r n the s y s t e m off if ignition voltage drops, and
w i l l t u r n it on again w h e n ignition voltage returns t o n o r m a l .
(cont'd)
19-39
ABS/TCS Components
System Description (cont'd)
T C S Self-diagnosis
The ABS/TCS control unit is equipped w i t h a m a i n CPU and a sub CPU. Each CPU checks the other for problems.
The CPUs check the circuit of the system.
Self-diagnosis can be classified into 2 categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Performed right after the engine starts and until the ABS or TCS indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Performed right after the initial diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the ABS/TCS control unit shifts to fail-safe mode.
Detection Item
Diagnostic Trouble
Detection Timing
Code(DTC)
Fail-safe Mode
Initial
Regular
Diagnosis
Diagnosis
(J)
S1
28
TCS
r>
31
E n g i n e r e t a r d c o m m a n d (PFINH) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y
A2
32
A2
34
^%
A2
36
24-27
relay
S1
ground)
to
A2
body ground)
61
A/T s h i f t p o s i t i o n ( A T S F T P ) s i g n a l ( o p e n / s h o r t t o b o d y g r o u n d )
81
A2
A2
A B S Indicator
T C S Indicator
Regular operation
Operation Mode
Operation in normal condition
OFF
OFF
Fail-safe m o d e - S 1
T h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t t u r n s t h e s y s t e m o f f (fail-safe r e l a y o f f ) w h e n t h e
ON
ON
OFF
ON
If t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a m a l f u c t i o n w h i l e t h e T C S i s o p e r a t i n g , i t
w i l l t u r n o f f t h e m a l f u n c t i o n i n g c o m p o n e n t , a n d c o n t i n u e t o m o d u l a t e t h e rest o f
t h e T C S s y s t e m u n t i l c o m p l e t i n g t h e T C S o p e r a t i o n . A t that t i m e , t h e T C S
system will beturned off.
TCS
deactivate
mode
If t h e f r o n t b r a k e p a d t e m p e r a t u r e r i s e e x c e s s i v e l y , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t
OFF
s t o p s t h e T C S s y s t e m a n d it t u r n s t h e T C S i n d i c a t o r o n . W h e n t h e b r a k e p a d
temperature lowers, t h eABS/TCS control unit turns offthe T C S indicator a n d
t e m p e r a t u r e rises
restarts t h eT C S system.
TCS OFF m o d e
excessively.
O N o r OFF
If t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t d e t e c t s a p r o b l e m w i t h t h e P G M - F I
(ON: W h e n t h e
c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit.
A B S s y s t e m is
T h e A B S s y s t e m is faulty.
Comes ON when
the f r o n t b r a k e p a d
ON
faulty)
T h e T C S s y s t e m is OFF.
If t h e s e c o n d i t i o n s r e t u r n t o n o r m a l , t h e A B S / T C S c o n t r o l u n i t r e s t a r t s t h e T C S
system.
19-40
^ABSl
M o d u l a t o r Unit
T h e m o d u l a t o r unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, outlet solenoid valve, TCS n o r m a l l y o p e n (NO) solenoid valve, TCS n o r m a l l y closed
(NC) s o l e n o i d v a l v e , r e s e r v o i r , p u m p , p u m p m o t o r , a n d t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r .
T h e m o d u l a t o r c o n t r o l s t h e c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e d i r e c t l y . It is a c i r c u l a t i n g - t y p e m o d u l a t o r b e c a u s e t h e brake f l u i d c i r c u l a t e s t h r o u g h t h e
caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder.
T h e h y d r a u l i c c o n t r o l has t h r e e m o d e s : p r e s s u r e i n t e n s i f y i n g , p r e s s u r e r e t a i n i n g , a n d p r e s s u r e r e d u c i n g .
T h e h y d r a u l i c c i r c u i t is an i n d e p e n d e n t f o u r c h a n n e l t y p e , o n e c h a n n e l f o r e a c h w h e e l .
ABS Control
Pressure intensifying mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e c l o s e d , i n l e t v a l v e o p e n , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d .
M a s t e r c y l i n d e r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t t o t h e c a l i p e r .
Pump Motor
W h e n s t a r t i n g t h e p r e s s u r e r e d u c i n g m o d e , t h e p u m p m o t o r is O N . W h e n s t o p p i n g A B S o p e r a t i o n , t h e p u m p m o t o r is OFF.
T h e r e s e r v o i r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t b y t h e p u m p , t h o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o t h e m a s t e r c y l i n d e r .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
\N
I"""" IN
W[
j 3
V\{
DAMP
CHAM
1PING
MBER
33
33'
St
IPCV]
MODULATOR UNIT
~|~
TCS
NO
a g
^ ^Tc's'N'c' *'''*""*""*'
TCSNC^^T^"^^
[jgA/-|EZCI>
w| 111' [a Y vfflTta *
DAMPING
CHAMBER WBB
gj 11 1 ' IvV
PUMP
J B
DAMPING | J
CHAMBER r * H u T ^ ^
I O U T
(~>
1
II ( ^ p u M P ^ y y j " 1 [I [X]
wj'
111 Ixi
(03
(cont'd)
19-41
ABS/TCS Components
System Description (cont'd)
Pressure reducing mode
T C S N O v a l v e o p e n , T C S NC v a l v e c l o s e d , i n l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , o u t l e t v a l v e o p e n .
Caliper fluid f l o w s t h r o u g h the outlet valve t o the reservoir.
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
}w
[T]/v
wC
a TTTW
<y
E C
OUT J !
UU I
DAMPING 9 H L
CHAMBER WUK
NO
IN
WHT
j 3
DAMPING
CHAMBER
MOTOR
'^PUMpWJ
1 1
UU I
n 1
CO)
T C S Control
Pressure intensifying mode
T C S N O v a l v e c l o s e d , T C S NC v a l v e o p e n , i n l e t v a l v e o p e n , o u t l e t v a l v e c l o s e d , p u m p m o t o r O N .
T h e r e s e r v o i r a n d m a s t e r c y l i n d e r f l u i d is p u m p e d o u t b y t h e p u m p , t h r o u g h t h e d a m p i n g c h a m b e r , t o t h e f r o n t c a l i p e r .
MASTER CYLINDER
MODULATOR UNIT
J 3
I
IN
LZ
UMP
IMBM^M^H
flich
Ill
3a
I BB^ ^PUWIP
RESERVOIRL
CcO
19-42
MODULATOR UNIT
3
I
IN
y
m
^ J
DAMPINGpump
|HU
x^wQ
<
lAfM|DAMPII' G EC.,--*. ^ w r -
M n T n R
EZ] II |
(
=4= P U M P ^ ^ I ^ ^ ^
izj 111 JTIM
0 T * * T | CHAMBER H T l
WTTHi]
IVIUKJK
HMcHAMBER
)pUMP
1
^^)^^
ft"
'
" 1 [I
r
|X1
v\^TF!^
J RESERVOIR
MODULATOR UNIT
Ik /vc
}N
v\<| 111" in
MOTOR
EO
-QJ^PUMP^^
J*
(cont'd)
19-43
ABS/TCS Components
System Description (cont'd)
Wheel Sensor
T h e w h e e l s e n s o r s are the m a g n e t i c contactless type. A s the g e a r p u l s e r teeth rotate past the w h e e l s e n s o r ' s magnetic coil, A C current is
g e n e r a t e d . T h e A C f r e q u e n c y c h a n g e s in a c c o r d a n c e with the w h e e l s p e e d . T h e A B S / T C S control unit detects the w h e e l s e n s o r signal
f r e q u e n c y a n d thereby detects the w h e e l s p e e d .
GEAR PULSER
at HIGH SPEED
WHEEL SENSOR
at LOW SPEED
VEHICLE SPEED
REFERENCE VEHICLE SPEED
WHEEL SPEED
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE
ON
OFF
INLET
VALVE
ON
OFF
MOTOR
ON
OFF
W h e n the w h e e l speed d r o p s sharply b e l o w the vehicle speed, the outlet valve opens m o m e n t a r i l y to reduce the caliper fluid pressure. T h e
p u m p m o t o r s t a r t s at t h i s t i m e . A s t h e w h e e l s p e e d is r e s t o r e d , t h e i n l e t v a l v e o p e n s m o m e n t a r i l y t o i n c r e a s e t h e c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e .
19-44
W h e e l S p e e d a n d M o d u l a t o r control ( T C S )
DRIVE W H E E L S P E E D
SPEED
BRAKE
PRESSURE
OUTLET
VALVE
INLET
VALVE
TCS NC VALVE
TCS NO VALVE
MOTOR
W h e n t h e f r o n t w h e e l s p e e d rises s h a r p l y a b o v e t h e v e h i c l e s p e e d , t h e T C S NC v a l v e o p e n s , t h e TCS N O v a l v e c l o s e s , a n d t h e p u m p m o t o r
starts t o i n t e n s i f y t h e f r o n t c a l i p e r f l u i d p r e s s u r e . W h e n t h e w h e e l s p e e d d r o p s , t h e f r o n t inlet v a l v e c l o s e s m o m e n t a r i t y t o r a t a i n t h e f r o n t
caliper fluid pressure. W h e n the w h e e l speed drops further, the f r o n t outlet valve opens m o m e n t a r i t y t o reduce the f r o n t caliper fluid pressure.
19-45
ABS/TCS Components
Circuit Diagram
D E I V E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S
3
7
8|
iI
/113
C O N N E C T O R M (20P)
C O N N E C T O R B (7P)
C O N N E C T O R A (18P)
A/
/|17
I2
1 2
C O N N E C T O R I (16P)
8|
I1
9 10 11 / | 1 3 1 4 | /
1 2
16|17 18
1
3 t=!
10 11(12
14 15
1 2
11 12
19 -46
///
>^
9 10
18 19 20 21 2 2
1 2
8
1 2 3 4 F=l
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4
FAIL S A F E R E L A Y /
T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
9 10 111X112
CRUISE CONTROL/
T C S SWITCH 8P C O N N E C T O R S
C O N N E C T O R C (16P)
C O N N E C T O R J (18P)
BRAKE SWITCH
CONNECTOR
P A S S E N G E R ' S U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y BOX C O N N E C T O R S
C O N N E C T O R B (18P)
10 11 12 13 14|15 16 17 18 19 20
4|5|6|7
F=1._ 2
5(6 7
7
4
.rnzfai,
i II 1
4
,.,171
1 ? |/1/I5|6|7l
14 15 16
A B S P U M P MOTOR
R|_AY 5P C O N N E C T O R
16 1/ M11|12|13|14|/|
/1l9l20|2ll22|/l/
A B S / T C S CONTROL UNIT
+B
-o
8
04-WHT/GRN
13
O - BBRN/BLK
R N / B L K - i
-GRN/RED
12
(DAYTIME RUNNING
0--BLK |
l l
I /
pulled
~
BLU/WHT
WHEEL SENSOR
-GRN/BLU
BRN
- L T BLU GRY
-BLK
-BLK
-BLK'
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R S
C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
n
15 16
9 10 11 12 13
10 11 L / | 1 3 14
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
18
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 2
25 26 2 7
28 29 30 31
C O N N E C T O R C(12P)
16
FRONT/REAR
JlF=tfL
9 10 11 12
10
11
23
24
13
32
19-47
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting
A B S D T C 11,13,15.17: Wheel Sensor (Open/
S h o r t to Body G r o u n d / S h o r t to Power)
11
13
15
17
DTC
(Right-front)
(Left-front)
(Right-rear)
(Left-rear)
Appropriate Terminal
A 1 1 : FRW (+)
A9: FLW (+)
A23: RRW (+)
A 2 1 : RLW (+)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
11
13
15
17
Appropriate Terminal
A11 : FRW (+)
A9 : FLW (+)
A23 : RRW (+)
A 2 1 : RLW (+)
DTC
(Right-front)
(Left-front)
(Right-rear)
(Left-rear)
FLW (+)
(GRN/BLU)
n
it
FRW (+)
(GRN/BLK)
RLW (+)
(LT BLU)
RRW (+)
(GRN/YEL)
RLW (+)
(LT BLU)
<g)
6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4
/ 15 16 18 / 20 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4
6
8 9 10 11 12 13
15 16
18
20
2 2 23 24 25 26
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
FLW (+)
(GRN/BLU)
FRW (+)
(GRN/BLK)
(g>
RRW (+)
(GRN/YEL)
(g
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
N O - G o to step 6.
Is there 2 V or
more?
continuity?
19-48
Appropriate Terminal
( + )Side
(-)Side
A11 :FRW( + ) A10:FRW(~)
A9:FLW( + )
A8:FLW( - )
A23: RRW
A24; RRW
(+ )
<-)
A21 :RLW( + ) A22:RLW(~)
11 (Right-front)
13 (Left-front)
15 (Right-rear)
17 (Left-rear)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
GRN/BLU
BRN \
-XL-
3 4
15 16
GRN/BLK
10 11 12 13
720 218 229 23
24 25 26
_JT_
-XL-
1 2
GRN
6
18
-~ir-
LT B L U /
GRY
BLU/YEL
GRN/YEL
Is the resistance
between
450-2,000
Q ?
DTC
12
14
16
18
Are they installed
Y E S - G o to step 2.
NO Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel
sensor or pulser
2. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector A
(26P).
3. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
wheel sensor ( + ) and ( ) circuit terminals (see
table).
Go to step 7.
DTC
14 (Left-front)
Appropriate Terminal
( ) Side
( + )Side
A10:FRW
A11 : FRW
( + )
(-)
A9 : FLW
A 8 : FLW
16 (Right-rear)
A23 : RRW
18 (Left-rear)
(+ )
A21 : RLW
12 (Right-front)
(+ )
Is the resistance
between
450-2,000
Q ?
( + >
(-)
A 2 4 : RRW
(-)
A22 : RLW
(-)
(cont'd)
19-49
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between the appropriate
wheel sensor < + ) circuit terminal and other w h e e l
sensor ( + ) circuit terminals (see table).
DTC
12
14
16
18
Is there
Appropriate
Terminal
A11 :
FRW
(+ )
A9 :
FLW( + )
Other Terminal
A9:
FLW( + )
A23:
RRW
(+)
A21 :
RLW( + )
A11 :
FRW
(+ )
A11 :
FRW
(+ )
A11 :
FRW( + )
A23:
RRW
(+ )
A23:
RRW
(+ )
A9 :
FLW( + )
A9: FLW
(+ )
A21 :
RLW
( :)
A21 :
RLW
( ;)
A21 ;
RLW
(+ )
A23:
RRW( + )
continuity?
A B S D T C 21,22,23,24:
1. Clear the DTC.
DTCs
Y E S - G o to step 3.
N O - T h e system is OK at this t i m e . B
3. Check the appropriate pulser gear for a chipped
tooth (see table).
DTC
21
22
23
24
Is the pulser
Pulser
Appropriate Pulser
Right-front
Left-front
Right-rear
Left-rear
OK ?
19-50
Solenoid
6. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS/
TCS control unit connector C (12P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table).
indicated?
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
^:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RUN
RL-OUT
Appropriate Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C(12P)
YEL/BLU
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
Appropriate Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
RE
ED
D // W
WH
HT
T
R
RED/BLK
/
RED/BLU
continuity?
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
//
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
RE
ED
D // W
WH
HT
T
R
'
m
(12P)
YEL/BLU
//
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R C
*
R
N O - G o to step 7.
7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
RED/BLK
Q
RED/BLU
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
(cont'd)
19-51
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Connect the appropriate modulator unit 24P
connector solenoid circuit terminal to body g r o u n d
w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e (see table).
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
A p p r o p r i a t e Terminal
No. 11
No. 19
No. 14
No. 22
No. 13
No. 21
No. 12
No. 20
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
RED/GRN
RED/BLK
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
Appropriate Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
YEL/BLU
RED/WHT
/RED/BLU
YEL/WHT
/YEL/GRN
/YEL/BLK
16
1 /
2 3 4 5 6
7 8i 9 10 11 12
ir-j
IXlii|i2li3|uX7l
19120|21|22|/1/
/ f \
Y E L / BB LL K
K
J/
RED/WHT
YEL/BLU
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
RED/BLU
YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 10.
IMO Repair open in the appropriate solenoid
circuit w i r e between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator unit.
10. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the modulator unit
24P connector.
11. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
19-52
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
Appropriate Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
T C S Solenoid
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
Appropriate Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/
71
10 I 11 1 2 ]
i . n
/YEL/BLK
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
RED/BLU
RED/WHT
YEL/WHT
/1
/YEL/BLK
10 11
GRY
5
6
3 4
15 16
18
1 2
RED/WHT
RED/WHT
//
*
R
RED/BLK
G
-fl
20121
10 11 12 13
22 23 _24
25 26
_j
RED/BLU
W i r e s i d e o f female t e r m i n a l s
RED/GRN
LT BLU
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is the resistance
OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 14.
Is there
continuity?
N O - G o to step 16.
(cont'd)
19-53
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate
ABS/TCS control unit connector C (12P) t e r m i n a l
and all other ABS and TCS solenoid circuit
terminals (see table).
drag?
Appropriate Terminal
C11
C6
C9
C4
C8
C3
C10
C5
DTC
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
T C S Solenoid
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
N O - G o to step 2.
2. Check the installation of the appropriate wheel
sensor (see table).
DTC
41
42
43
44
Is it
correct?
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
YEL/BLU
/YEL/GRN
YEL/WHT
/YEL/BLK
77
\ ,7 J jS.ll,,,J J
LR-
2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
RED/WHT
W.
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
RED/BLU
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
YEL/GRN
GRY
J -
1 2 3 4 / 6 / 8 9 10 11 12 13
/ 15 16 / 18 / 20 21J22 23 24 25 26
-tr\
/ \
RED/GRN
ir
LT BLU
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-54
OK?
Y E S - G o to step 3.
YES Replace the modulator u n i t . B
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
+B
(WHT)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is the fuse
blown?
(cont'd)
19-55
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e for a
m o m e n t , and check the fuse.
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P
CONNECTOR
111121131141/1
L/|19|20| 21 \22\/\/
16 117 (
IMA
MOTOR
(WHT/BLU)
+ B
(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
Is the fuse
blown?
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
N O - G o to step 5.
5. Check the p u m p motor relay in the under-hood
ABS relay box. Refter to the '98 01 Accord Service
Manual (P/N 61S8008) (see page 22-52).
Vlllll2J13lUl/r
7113120[21122|/1/
MOTOR GND (BLK)
Is the relay OK ?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 6.
N O - R e p l a c e the p u m p motor relay.
6. Connect the p u m p motor relay 5P connector
terminal No. 4 to No. 5 w i t h a j u m p e r wire for a
moment.
Does the pump motor
operate?
Y E S - G o t o step 11.
P U M P M O T O R R E L A Y 5P C O N N E C T O R
N O - G o to step 7.
7. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
JUMPER WIRE
+ B (WHT)
W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals
19-56
^BS
-J-2;"S4_,
1 2
4
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
operate?
PMR (YEL/RED)
N O - G o to step 2.
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S Leave the fuse removed, and go to step 3.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the underhood ABS relay box and the ABS/TCS control unit.
PASSENGER'S UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR f (16P)
MCK (GRN)
1
1 2 3 F=J 4 5 6 7
14 15
8 9 10 11|12
i. i
it*.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1 2
4
13 14 15|16
9 10 11
PMR (YEL/RED)
Is there approx.
10 V?
Y E S - G o to step 5.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
19-57
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Disconnect the modulator unit 24P connector.
7. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 and
body g r o u n d .
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
5 |6 7
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 /
19 20 21 22
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
NO Replace the p u m p motor.
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 2
run?
/ /
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
__n_
Is there approx.
1 2
9 j 10
i
10 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
/ /
13 14 15 16i
I
PMR (YEL/RED)
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the underhood ABS relay box and the p u m p motor.
8. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
24P connector terminal No. 1 and No. 16.
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
MOTOR (WHT/BLU)
1 ?
16
1 /
/|5|6 7 8
|/|11|12|13|14L/|
19 20 21 22
//
M O T O R G N D (BLK)
Is there approx.
10 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the p u m p
motor and body g r o u n d (G203).
19-58
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there
continuity?
A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
Is the fuse OK ?
+B
Y E S - G o t o step 2.
NO Replace the fuse, and recheck
JUMPER WIRE
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
(WHT/GRN)
blow?
W i r e side of female terminals
G o t o step 3.
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
/VI
51 6 7 | 8 /
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 / / 1 9 20 21 2 2 / /
1 2
Is the relay OK ?
NO
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
+ B (WHT/GRN)
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO -Repair open in the wire between the underhood fuse/relay box and the ABS fail-safe relay. I
(cont'd)
19-59
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between the modulator unit
24P connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
N O - G o to step 13.
13. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control
unit connector A (26P) terminal A25 and body
ground.
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
SOLENOID (BRN/BLK)
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
/|5|6 7|8|/
|/|11|12|13|14|/|
16 1 /
19 20 21 2 2 / /
1 ?
15
16
6
18
20
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Is there battery
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
voltage?
Is there
continuity?
N O - G o to step 10.
N O - G o to step 14.
10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
A (26P).
A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
GND
n
15
16
6
18
20
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
Is there
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
voltage?
19-60
(BLK)
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 15.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the ABS
fail-safe relay and body ground, or a loose or poor
connection at body ground (G202).H
1. Clearthe DTC.
A B S F A I L - S A F E R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
mi
G N D (BLK)
come on?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
FSR (YEL/GRN)
NO
JUMPER WIRE
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
indicated?
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
15
16
6
18
20
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
26
FSR (YEL/GRN)
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
19-61
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
A B S DTC 71: Different D i a m e t e r Tire
19-62
7VBS
indicated?
24:
25:
26:
27:
NCL (YEL/GRN)
24:
25:
26;
27:
Appropriate Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
Appropriate Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
6
1 2 3 4
8 9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15 16
18
/
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
ID
(H;
W i r e side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
N O L (GRY)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
10 11 12 13
21 22 23 24 25 26
16
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
X X
N O R (LT BLU)
f l
24:
25:
26:
27:
Appropriate Terminal
No 5
No. 6
No. 8
No. 7
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
Is there
continuity?
NCR (RED/GRN)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
NOL (GRY)
1
1 / 1 / 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 /
16
1 /
M11|12|13114|7T
/1191201211221/17
JUMPER
WIRE
(cont'd)
19-63
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S /
TCS control unit connector A (26P) solenoid circuit
terminal and body ground (see table).
24:
25:
26:
27:
A p p r o p r i a t e Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
TCS DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
12. Remove the TCS relay, and connect the TCS relay
4P connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
NOTE: Wire colors of TCS relay 4P connector; BLU,
RED/BLU, BRN/BLK, GRN/YEL.
T C S R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
TCS
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
NOL (GRY)
JUMPER
WIRE
NCL (YEL/GRN)
10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 2 4 25 26
16
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
(a) (p)
N O R (LT B L U )
(oxo)
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 10.
NO Repair open in the appropriate TCS solenoid
circuit wire between the ABS/TCS control unit and
the modulator u n i t . H
10. Remove the j u m p e r wires f r o m the modulator unit
24P connector.
11. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
19-64
24:
25:
26:
27:
Appropriate Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
T C S DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
Appropriate Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
A B S Solenoid
24:
25:
26:
27:
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
NOL (GRY)
NCL (YEL/GRN)
10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15 16
NCR
(RED/
GRN)
N O R (LT B L U )
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
GRY
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there resistance
_n_
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 14.
NO Replace the modulator unit.H
14. Disconnect the modulator unit connector, and
remove the jumper w i r e f r o m the TCS relay 4P
connector terminal.
_n_
_n_
_n_
6
8 9 10 11 12 13
3 4
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
15 16
18
RED/GRN
-ur
HUT
LT BLU
Wire side of female terminals
7
7
/YEL/GRN
/YEL/BLK
9 10 11 12
7/W
RED/WHT /
RED/BLU
\ RED/BLK
RED/GRN
Is there
continuity?
(cont'd)
19-65
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
16. Connect the modulator unit 24P connector.
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate A B S /
T C S control unit connector A (26P) terminal and all
other A B S and T C S solenoid circuit terminals (see
table).
TCS DTC
NOR
NCR
NOL
NCL
Appropriate Terminal
A16
A15
A3
A2
A B S Solenoid
24:
25:
26:
27:
FR-IN
FR-OUT
FL-IN
FL-OUT
RR-IN
RR-OUT
RL-IN
RL-OUT
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
YEL/GRN
GRY
_n_
16
15 i
j-j
blow?
in
1 2
T C S D T C 28: T C S Relay
9 10 11 12 13
18
20 21 2 2 2 3 24 25 26
RED/GRN
LT B L U
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
CONNECTOR
YEL/BLU
YEL/WHT
/YEL/GRN
UZ/'
7
/YEL/BLK
B (BLU)
.._n_i
4 5 6
9 10 11 12
RED/WHT
RED/BLU
RED/BLK
RED/GRN
Is there battery
Y E S - G o to step 5.
19-66
voltage?
NO Repair open in the wire between the underhood fuse/relay box and the TCS relay.
/|5|6
|/111|12|13|14|/1
16 1 /
19 20 21 22
1 ?
+ B (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
//
T C S SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
TCS SOLENOID
(RED/BLU)
Is there battery
M O D U L A T O R UNIT 24P C O N N E C T O R
MXl5l6l7l8lXl
M1111211311417T"
19l20i2li22l/l/
TCS SOLENOID (RED/BLU)
voltage?
N O - G o t o step 10.
10. Disconnect the ABS/TCS control unit connector B
(16P).
11. Measure the voltage between terminal B13 and
body ground.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
Is there battery
YES
voltage?
4
7
1 2
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
G o t o step 8.
Is there battery
voltage?
(cont'd)
19-67
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
12. Check for continuity between the ABS/TCS control
unit connector B (16P) terminal B13 and body
ground.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
- T L .
-JUS
7 7
1 2
4
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
1
!J
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery
Is there
voltage?
continuity?
Y E S - G o to step 17.
+B
(WHT/GRN)
TCSR
(GRN/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
SOLENOID
(BRN/BLK)
19-68
ABS
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
4
1 2
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
TCSR (GRN/YEL)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
10
23
32
11
24
PFINH (BLU)
Is there battery
voltage?
continuity?
(cont'd)
19-69
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A13 and body g r o u n d .
NOTE; Use the 10 V range or similar range in an
analog tester.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
8 9
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
PFINH
10
23
32
1 2
4
7 Y
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
11
24
i | r-
PFINH (BLU)
(BLU)
5V
5V
Approx. 2.5VApprox. 2.5VOV
OV
'
19-70
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
1 2 3 4
8 9
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 2 9 30 31
25 26 27
10
23
32
11
24
NEP(BLU)
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 2 9 30 31
11
24
W i r e side of female terminals
NEP(BLU)
Is there
continuity?
Approx. 6V
NO Go to step 3.
3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).
4. Start the engine, warm it up to normal operating
temperature, and let it idle.
Is there approx. 6 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 6.
NO Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and r e c h e c k .
(cont'd)
19-71
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. With the engine still idling, measure the voltage
between the ABS/TCS control unit connector
B (16P) terminal B11 and body ground w i t h the
analog voltmeter again.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
4
7 7
1 2
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
i . j
NEP (BLU)
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
VREF (ORN/GRN)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
32
11
24
(8)
12V
Approx.
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
6V-
OV
Is there
continuity?
Is there approx. 6 V?
YES The system is OK at this time. If the problem
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
N O - Repair open in the w i r e between the PCM and
the ABS/TCS control u n i t . H
19-72
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
VREF (ORN/GRN)
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
10
23
32
11
24
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx. 5 V?
8 9 10
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
32
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
11
24
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
Y E S - G o to step 6.
NOCheck for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck.
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
continuity?
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
VREF (ORN/GRN)
4
1 2
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
N O - G o to step 3.
3. Connect the PCM connector A (32P).
4. Start the engine.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES The system is OK at this time. If the problem
recurs, replace the ABS/TCS control unit.
NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ABS/TCS control unit H
(cont'd)
19-73
ABS/TCS Components
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
5. Measure the voltage between the PCM connector A
(32P) terminal A31 and body ground w i t h the
throttle fully opened and fully closed. There should
be a s m o o t h transition f r o m approx. 0.5 V and 4.5 V.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
10
23
32
8 9
5 6 7
1 2 3 4
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
28 29 30 31
25 26 27
11
24
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
ATSFTP
(LT G R N )
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is the voltage as
YES
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
8 9
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
11
24
specified?
G o t o step 6.
4
1 2
7
13 14 i 15
16
9 10 11
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
G o t o step 3.
THLOUT (YEL/GRN)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-74
10
23
32
C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
1 2 3 4
8 9
5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
25 26 27
28 29 30 31
10
23
32
11
24
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
5V
Approx. 4V -
Is there approx. 4 V?
Y E S - G o t o step 7.
NO Check for loose PCM connectors. If necessary,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. H
7. With an analog voltmeter set to the 10 V or similar
range, measure the voltage between the ABS/TCS
control unit connector B (16P) terminal B7 and body
ground.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
4
1 2
13 14 15 16
9 10 11
ATSFTP
(LT G R N )
OV
Is there approx. 4 V?
Y E S Check for loose ABS/TCS control unit
connectors. If necessary, substitute a known-good
ABS/TCS control unit, and recheck.
NO Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the ABS/TCS control unit.H
19-75
ABS/TCS Components
ABS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the ABS
indicator.
Does the ABS indicator come on?
1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9 10 111X112
14 15 16
ABS (BLU/WHT)
N O - G o to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF then ON (II) again.
Does the brake system indicator come on?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
NO Repair open in the indicator power source
circuit.
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly.
Open circuit inside the fuse box.
Is there
continuity?
1 2
11 12
6 7 8 9 10
/ 4 5
/ / / 16|XI/ 18 19 20 21 22
GND (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
19-76
OK?
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
Y E S - G o t o step 14.
J U M P E R WIRE
1
14. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
A (26P) terminal A1 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r
wire.
ABS (BLU/WHT)
15 16
6
18
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
10
20
16
12 13
22 23 24 25 26
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
go
off?
Go to step 18.
go
off?
G A U G E A S S E M B L Y C O N N E C T O R C (16P)
1 2 3
8 9 10 11
12
4 5 6 7
14 15 16
ABS (BLU/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L C O N N E C T O R A (26P)
IG2 (YEL/BLK)
n
1
n
3
15 16
18
n
rt
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
~uL
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
go
off?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 17.
NO Repair open in the wire between the R/C
MIRROR (7.5 A) fuse and the ABS/TCS control
unit.H
19-77
ABS/TCS Components
TCS Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and watch the TCS indicator.
Does the TCS indicator
come on?
N O - G o to step 2.
1 2 / 4
X
9 10 11
13 14 15 16
indicator
ii
TCS2
(RED/WHT)
come on?
JUMPER WIRE
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
N O - R e p a i r open in the indicator power source
circuit.
Blown BACK UP LIGHT (7.5 A) fuse.
Open in the wire between the BACK UP LIGHT
(7.5 A) fuse and the gauge assembly.
Open circuit inside the fuse box.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
come on?
Y E S - G o t o step 6.
3. Turn the engine OFF, and check the TCS indicator
bulb in the gauge assembly.
Is the bulb
OK?
6. Connect the ABS/TCS control unit connector
C (12P) terminal C2 and body ground w i t h a jumper
wire.
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
N O - R e p l a c e the TCS indicator bulb.
A B S / T C S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (12P)
1 2
11 12 /
4 5
/ /
16 X i X
LG (BRN/BLK)
JUMPER
WIRE
/
7
10 11 12
6 7 8 9 10
18 19 20 21 22
T C S (RED/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
come on?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
N O - R e p l a c e the gauge assembly.
19-78
come on?
Is the fuse OK ?
11. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).
Y E S - G o t o step 8.
Does the TCS indicator
go
off?
IG2 ( Y E L / B L K )
n
"X
15 16
6
18
9 10 11 12 13
20 21 22 23 24 25 26
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 9.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay box and ABS/TCS control
unit.B
19-79
ABS/TCS Components
Modulator Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
Take care not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
To prevent the brake fluid f r o m f l o w i n g , plug and cover the hose ends and joints w i t h a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
1. Push the modulator unit connector lock (C), and t u r n the connector lever (D).
2. Disconnect the modulator unit connector (B).
3. Disconnect the brake pipes, then remove the m o d u l a t o r unit (A).
Installation
1. Install the modulator unit in the reverse order of removal.
2. Bleed the brake system, starting w i t h the front wheels.
3. Start the engine, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator go off.
4. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS indicator and the TCS indicator do not come on.
19-80
A B S
1
4
u
IG2
(BLK/YEL)
2
5
TCS SW
(ORN/WHT)
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-81
ABS/TCS Components
ABS/TCS Control Unit Replacement
1. Remove the passenger's side kick panel.
Rear
19-82
Rear
19-83
S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If b o d y m a i n t e n a n c e is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs,
Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual,
P/N 61S8008. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items w i l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
done by and authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).
Do not b u m p the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h yellow color coding. Related components are located in the
steering c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-01 models) and around the floor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
Body
Seats
Front Seat Removal and Installation
-4-way Power-Sedan
20-2
Front S e a t D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y
-4-way Power-Sedan
20-3
20-4
20-5
Bumper
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement
20-6
Hood
Replacement
20-7
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement-Coupe
20-8
Emblem Replacement-Sedan
20-8
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement
20-9
F r a m e Repair Chart
20-12
2001 model:
The following item has been added on Sedan or Coupe V6 model.
-
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation - 4-1 ay Power - Sedan
'01 model;
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations and precautions and
procedures in the SRS section before performing
repairs or service. Refer to '98-01 ACCORD Service
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23-28).
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write d o w n the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
2. Disconnect the negative cable f r o m the battery, and
wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Remove the seat track end covers (A), and remove
the bolts securing the front seat (B). W h e n prying
w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h protective
tape to prevent damage. Take care not to scratch
the body or tear the seat covers.
Fastener Locations
To body. To body.
: Bolt, 4
> : Clip, 1
20-2
BACK PANEL
SEAT-BACK
HOOKS
PIVOT WASHER
PIVOT N U T
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
W I R E TIE
SEAT CUSHION
FRONTCOVER
CENTER COVER
10 x 1.25 m m
47 N m
(4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )
RECLINE COVER
SEAT LINKAGE
10 x 1.25 m m
47 N m (4.8 k g f m , 35 I b f f t )
CAPS
SWITCH KNOBS
20-3
Seats
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly - 4-Way Power - Sedan
'01 m o d e l :
NOTE:
Put on gloves to protect y o u r hands.
To remove the slide motor and slide gearbox, slide the f r o n t seat backward fully.
Disassemble the linkage as s h o w n .
Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items:
Before installing the slide motor and slide gearbox, align portion (A) as s h o w n to align both slide gearbox positions.
Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding and pivot portions of the linkage.
Check operation of the recline and slide adjusters.
20-4
20-5
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Spoiler Replacement - Coupe
'01 m o d e l :
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
Remove the rear bumper spoiler as shown.
Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal, and replace any damaged clips.
Fastener Locations
20-6
: Bolt, 2
[> : Clip, 2
Hood
Replacement
1. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (A) from
the windshield washer nozzles (B), and release the
windshield washer tube f r o m the clips (C).
C
Fastener Locations
: Bolt, 4
fntaED
^
6 x 1.0 m m
|
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , |
7.2 I b f f t )
I
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
20-7
Exterior Trim
Emblem Replacement - Coupe
A p p l y the e m b l e m where s h o w n .
NOTE:
NOTE:
V6 EMBLEM
ACCORD EMBLEM
T R U N K LID
Unit: m m
(in.!
ACCORD
EMBLEM
U n i t : m m (in.)
Edge of the
rear b u m p e r .
/ (
o
7
.9
N
t?
10 (0.39)
13(0.51)
V6 EMBLEM
Edge of the
trunk lid.
20-8
Edge of the
rear b u m p e r .
Frame
Sob-frame Replacement
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
REAR B E A M
(cont'd)
20-9
Frame
Sub-frame Replacement (cont'd)
After loosening the sub-frame mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m with new ones.
SUB-FRAME
20-10
20-11
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top V i e w
U n i t ; m m (in.)
0: Inner d i a m e t e r
POINT h
POINT g
POINT e
POINT I
<
UJ
>
20-12
POINT rt
POINT w
2145 (84.45)
2236 (88.03)
2365 (93.11)
2750 (108.3)
2899 (114.1)
297TTlT7)
2998 (118.0)
3008 (118.4)
3200 (126.0)
3622 (142.6)
(cont'd)
20-13
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side V i e w
0 1 1 . 5 (0.45)
SECTION B B
20-14
SECTION A A
SECTION DD
S U P P L E M E N T A L R E S T R A I N T S Y S T E M ( S R S ) (If H V A C m a i n t e n a n c e is required)
The Accord Sedan/Coupe (V6) SRS Includes a driver's airbag located in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag
located in the dashboard above the glove box, and side airbags ('00-01 models) located in the front seat-backs.
Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in the '98-01 Accord Sedan/Coupe (L4) Service Manual,
P/N 61S8008. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components.
Servicing, disassembling or replacing these items w i l l require special precautions and tools, and should therefore be
done by and authorized Honda dealer.
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).
Do not b u m p the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the
steering c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-01 models) and around the floor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
Air Conditioning
Special T o o l s
C o m p o n e n t Location
Index
A / C Refrigerant Oil
Replacement
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting
Index
Circuit Diagram ....................
C o n d e n s e r Fan Circuit
Troubleshooting ...............
Radiator and C o n d e n s e r F a n s
C o m m o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
Heater Valve Cable
Adjustment
Compressor Replacement
('98-00 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check
('98-00 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Overhaul
('98-00 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Relief Valve
Replacement
('98-00 model)
Compressor Replacement
('01 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Check
('01 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Overhaul
('01 model)
C o m p r e s s o r Relief Valve
Replacement
('01 model) ........................
C o n d e n s e r R e p l a c e m e n t .....
21-2
21-3
21-6
21-7
21-8
21-10
21-12
21-13
21-14
21-16
21-17
21-18
21-19
21-21
21-22
21-23
21-24
Component Location
Index
General Troubleshooting
Information
DTC Troubleshooting
Index
Symptom Troubleshooting
Index
System Description
Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting
ECT Sensor Circuit
Troubleshooting
Climate Control Power and
Ground Circuits
Troubleshooting
Recirculation Control Motor
Circuit Troubleshooting ...
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Troubleshooting
In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement and Test
Outside Air Temperature
Sensor Replacement
21- 26
21- 28
21- 29
21--30
21--31
21--32
21--34
21--50
21 -51
21 -52
21 -53
21 -55
21 -56
Sunlight Sensor Replacement
21 -57
and Test
21 -58
Power Transistor Test
Climate Control Unit Remova I
21 -58
and Installation
Climate Control Unit
Disassembly and
21 -59
Reassembly
Refer to the 1998-2001 Accord Service Manual (P/N 61S8008) for items not shown in this section.
Tool N u m b e r
07SAZ-001000A
Description
Backprobe Set
I
21-2
Qty
2
in
Air Conditioning
Component Location Index
\
I
/
/
/
EVAPORATOR
R e m o v a l a n d Installation, page 21-46
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-47
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
CONDENSER
Replacement, page 21-24
RECEIVER/DRYER
COMPRESSOR
('98-00 m o d e l s )
Replacement, page 21-14
Clutch Check, page 21-16
C l u t c h O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-17
Relief Valve R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-18
COMPRESSOR
('01 m o d e l )
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-19
Clutch Check, page 21-21
Clutch O v e r h a u l , p a g e 21-22
Relief Valve R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-23
(cont'd)
21-3
Air Conditioning
Component Location Index (cont'd)
21-4
BLOWER RESISTOR
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-20
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-20
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
21
Air Conditioning
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement
CO
(D
(D
(7)
(D
(D
(3D
21-6
Diagnostic procedure
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page
21-14)
Blower Motor Circuit
Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page
21-15)
Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the underhood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202 and G401
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
21-7
Air Conditioning
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.6 (15A)
No.42 (50A)
No. 13 (7.5 A)
No.54 (40A)
No.41 (100A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
GRN
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
BLU/YEL
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
RED
BLK
YEL/BLK
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
- GRN -
XL
BLU/BLK
G202
GRN
RADIATOR
XX
FAN
SWITCH A
/Closed : Above\
\199F(93 C) /
FAN C
(_
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
CONDENSER
FAN
MOTOR
BLK
WHT/GRN
1
-LL
G201
21-8
G101
G201
RADIATOR
FAN
SWITCH B
/Closed: AboveN
l225F (107C)/
^t-Hj27)-
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH
2
1
BLU/RED
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
<
RED
Air Conditioning
Condenser Fan Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 58 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the
driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses
OK ?
C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
Y E S - G o t o step 2.
NO - Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.
JUMPER
WIRE
2. Remove the condenser fan relay f r o m the underhood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 21-52).
BLU/YEL
is the relay OK ?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
Does the condenser
fan run?
N O - G o t o step 9.
5. Disconnect the jumper wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1
2
4
1
2
4
Is there battery
voltage?
YEL/WHT
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
NO Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box. I
Is there battery
voltage?
21-10
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
I YEL/WHT
Is there
Is there
battery
continuity?
voltage?
C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
1
BLU/YEL
'BLU/YEL
C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 12.
NO Repair open in the wire between the
condenser fan relay and the condenser fan.B
21-11
Air Conditioning
Radiator and Condenser Fans Common Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 57 (20 A) and No. 58 (20 A) fuses in
the under-hood fuse/relay box, and the No. 3 (7.5 A)
fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses
OK ?
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
Y E S - G o t o step 2.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
GRN
12 13 14 15
25 26 27
17
18 19 20
28 29
30
21
10
23
24
32
Is there battery
YEL/WHT
voltage?
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO Perform the radiator fan control module input
tests (see page 10-20).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Reinstall the condenser fan relay.
7. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
21-12
jam
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (C).
B
5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
B
21-13
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('98-00 model)
1. If the compressor is marginally operable, run the
engine at idle speed, and let the air conditioning
work for a few minutes, then shut the engine off.
2. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the radio,
then write down the frequencies for the radio's
preset buttons.
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
8x1.25 mm
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f m , 16 I b f f t )
-6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 I b f f t )
21-14.
on
9. Remove the bolts, the suction service valve (A) and
the O-ring (B) from the compressor.
2 5 . 5 N - m (2.6 k g f - m , 18.8 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
44 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3 I b f f t )
21-15
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Check ('98-00 model)
1. Check the plated parts of the pressure plate for
color changes, peeling or other damage. If there is
damage, replace the clutch set (see page 21-17).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set w i t h a
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-17).
21-16
.A
(cont'd)
21-17
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('98-00
model) (cont'd)
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
Install the field coil with the wire side facing
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the compressor.
Clean the pulley and compressor sliding surfaces
with contact cleaner or other non-petroleum
solvent.
Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's
reassembled.
Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
B
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
valve.
6. Evacuate the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 21-55).
7. Charge the system, refer to the '98-01 Accord
Service Manual (see page 21-56), and test its
performance, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 21-44).
21-18
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
21-19
Air Conditioning
Compressor Replacement ('01 model) (cont'd)
9. If necessary, remove the m o u n t i n g bolts and the
compressor brecket.
10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 k g f m , 3 3
21-20
Ibfft)
12V
21-21
Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch Overhaul ('01 model)
Special Tool Required
A/C clutch holder, Robinair 10204, Kent-Moore J37872,
or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939,
commercially available
21-22
A
1 3 . 2 N m (1.35 k g f - m , 9 . 7 6 I b f f t )
21-23
Air Conditioning
Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
charging station, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service
Manual (see page 21-54).
2. Remove the coolant reservoir, but do not
disconnect the reservoir hose from the coolant
reservoir and the radiator.
21-24
21-25
Climate Control
Component Location Index
A / C PRESSURE SWITCH
RADIATOR FAN
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-56
T e s t , p a g e 21-56
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY,
RADIATOR FAN RELAY,
CONDENSER FAN RELAY,
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
( L o c a t e d in t h e u n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
T e s t , p a g e 22-52
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
21-26
CONDENSER FAN
E
HEATER VALVE CABLE
A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 21-13
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-57
Test, p a g e 21-57
HEATER UNIT/CORE
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-28
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
BLOWER UNIT
Replacement, page 21-26
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
BLOWER UNIT C O M P O N E N T S
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-27
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-22
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-22
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y
Test, p a g e 22-52
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-58
D U S T AND P O L L E N FILTER
Replacement, page 21-25
n t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
EVAPORATOR
R e m o v a l a n d Installation, page 21-46
"n t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
EVAPORATOR COMPONENTS
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-47
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-20
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-20
in t h e '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT
R e m o v a l and Installation, page 21-58
Disassembly and Reassembly, page 21-59
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-55
Test, page 21-55
21
Climate Control
General Troubleshooting Information
How to Retrieve a DTC
The climate control unit has a self-diagnosis function.
Running t h e Self-diagnosis Function
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
T E M P E R A T U R E C O N T R O L DIAL
A / C O N
T E M P E R A T U R E INDICATOR
Q H F U L L
A/C OFF U U
MODE
AUTO
r
AUTO
AUTO BUTTON
OFF
J
J \I
qf^l
))
OFF BUTTON
21-28
DTC
(Temperature
Indicator
segment)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Page
Detection Item
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
page
21-34)
21-35)
21-35)
21-37)
21-37)
21-38)
21-39)
21-40)
21-41)
21-41)
21-42)
21-43)
21-44)
21-45)
21-29
Climate Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom
|
Diagnostic procedure
|
Also check for
ECT Sensor Circuit Troubleshooting
Cleanliness and tightness of all
The blower motor does not run
(see page 21-50)
connectors
immediately even through the
engine is fully warmed up
NOTE: The temperature control
dial or button must be set
between 64F (18C) and 90F
(32C)
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit
Blown fuse No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's
Recirculation control doors do
Troubleshooting (see page 21-52)
under-dash fuse/relay box
not change between Fresh and
Cleanliness and tightness of all
Recirculate.
connectors
Condenser Fan Circuit
Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the underCondenser fan does not run at
Troubleshooting (see page 21-10)
hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
all (but radiator fan runs with
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
the A/C on).
box
Poor ground at G201
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Radiator and Condenser Fans
Blown fuse No. 57 (20A) and No. 58
Both fans do not run w i t h the
C o m m o n Circuit Troubleshooting
(20A) in the under-hood fuse/relay box,
A/C on.
(see page 21-12)
and No. 3 (7.5A) in the driver's underdash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G201
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
Compressor Clutch Circuit
Blown fuse No. 58 (20A) in the underCompressor clutch does not
Troubleshooting, refer to the '98-01
hood fuse/relay box, and No. 3 (7.5A)
engage.
Accord Service Manual (see page
in the driver's under-dash fuse/relay
21-39)
box
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit
Cleanliness and tightness of all
A/C system does not come on
Troubleshooting (see page 21-53)
connectors
(both fans and compressor).
Climate Control Power and Ground
Blown fuse No. 54 (40A) in the underBoth heater and A/C do not
Circuits Troubleshooting (see page
hood fuse/relay box, No. 3 (7.5A) in
work.
21-51)
the driver's under-dash fuse/relay box,
and No. 13 (7.5A) in the passenger's
under-dash fuse/relay box
Poor ground at G202 and G401
Cleanliness and tightness of all
connectors
21-30
System Description
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R S
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
20P C O N N E C T O R
8P C O N N E C T O R
CXI
B
4
r1
\
3
8
1
11
2
12
13
14
5
15
10
16
17
18
19
20
r1
Wire color
BLK/YEL
WHT/YEL
RED/WHT
BLU/ORN
ORN/BLK
BLU/RED
BRN/YEL
BLK
Signal
IG2 (Power)
+ B (Power)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
BLOWER MOTOR HIGH RELAY
POWER TRANSISTOR
BLOWER FEEDBACK
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
GROUND
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
Wire color
PNK/BLK
YEL/GRN
GRN/RED
GRN/WHT
BLU/BLK
BLU/WHT
RED/YEL
RED/BLK
RED/WHT
RED
YEL/GRN
WHT/RED
GRY
BRN
BRN/WHT
YEL/RED
BLU/GRN
LT GRN/BLK
GRN/YEL
GRN/BLK
Signal
AIR MIX POTENTIAL
A/C PRESSURE SWITCH
FRESH
RECIRCULATE
MODE DEF
MODE VENT
AIR MIX HOT
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH or TAILLIGHT RELAY
AIR MIX COOL
MULTIPLEX CONTROL UNIT (DRIVER'S)
SENSOR C O M M O N GROUND
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
AIR MIX POTENTIAL + 5 V
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MODE 4
MODE 3
MODE 2
MODE 1
'
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
21-31
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
/ I G I OX
- W H T + 0 BAT )
\IG2 O y -
No.42 (50A)
No.41 (100 A)
&
No.6(15A)
BLK/YEL
No.3 (7.5A)
YEL
BLK/YEL
BLK/YEL
No.54 (40A)
No.56 (40A)
No.58 (20A)
No.57 (20A)
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
GRN
GRN
I-
BLU/BLK
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
RED
BLU/YEL
BLK
YEL/BLK
-6RNCOMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
GRN
G202
> ]
RADIATOR / f *
FAN
SWITCH A
/Closed : Above*
\199 F(93C) /
S
" @
ECTX
R E D / W H T
S G
CONDENSER
FAN
MOTOR
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
PCM
t \ RADIATOR
i ) FAN
SWITCH B
I
/Closed: Above\
.225F(107 C)/
BLK
"
2
1
G201
21-32
BLU/RED
G101
G201
BLK
1
G401
VS
A/C
PRESSURE
SWITCH
2 / C \ 1
-L^^L
YEL/GRN
YEL/BLK
BLU/RED
BLK/YEL
-^T}-VW^#4-
WHT/YEL
--{2}-VW W-
A : IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E
SENSOR
B : O U T S I D E AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C : SUNLIGHT S E N S O R
D:EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YEL/GRN
S5V
S-COM
>AMD-P
>M-COOL
21
OM-HOT
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
AIR M X
CONTROL
MOTOR
J M-VENT
S-COM Q-
JM-DEF
!>MODE1
)MODE2
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
TAILLIGHT
RELAY
MODE
CONTROL
MOTOR
>MODE3
)MODE4
MULTIPLEX
C O N T R O L UNIT
(DRIVER'S)
REC
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL
MOTOR
|G2'
: BP C O N N E C T O R
: 20P C O N N E C T O R
BLK/YEL
G401
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC indicator light A: A n open in the in-car
temperature s e n s o r circuit
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-55).
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/RED
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
YEL/RED
h
1
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the climate
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor B
5. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
1 terminal of the in-car temperature sensor 2P
connector.
RESISTANCE
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1
50
10
68
20
86
30
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
104F
40 C
YEL/GRN
TEMPERATURE
I YEL/GRN
shown
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
continuity?
21-34
Is the resistance
on the graph?
shown
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
YEL/RED
RESISTANCE
kQ
Is there
continuity?
14
-10
32
0
50
10
68
20
86
30
104 F
40 C
TEMPERATURE
shown
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
N O - Replace the outside air temperature s e n s o r .
3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
(cont'd)
21-35
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between the No. 15 terminal of
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
1 terminal of the outside air temperature sensor 2P
connector.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
1
11 12
3
13
4
14
15
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
10
20
11 12 13 14
10
15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN/WHT
YEL/GRN
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there
YES
continuity?
Go to step 5.
Is there
continuity?
21-36
Is the resistance
on the
shown
graph?
Y E S - G o t o step 3.
NO Replace the outside air temperature sensor, I I
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
WHT/RED
1
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
10
11 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
I BRN/WHT
Is there
continuity?
YES - G o t o step 4.
NO - Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the sunlight sensor.
Is there
continuity?
(cont'd)
21-37
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
2 terminal of the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
i YEL/GRN
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
YEL/GRN
11
12
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
WHT/RED
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
NO - Repair open in the w i r e between the climate
control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.
5. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2 P connector.
Is there
continuity?
sensor
OK?
5. Reconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
sensor
OK?
21-38
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
1
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
11 12
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
9 ^0
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
BRN
BRN
U
40
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - Goto step 5.
30
RESISTANCE
20
10
50
1 0
68
20
86
30
F
C
TEMPERATURE
Is the resistance
on the
within
the specifications
shown
graph?
Y E S - G o t o step3.
NO Replace the evaporator temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
(cont'd)
21-39
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
5, Check for continuity between the No. 11 terminal of
the climate control unit 20P connector and the No.
1 terminal of the evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
11 12
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Is the resistance
on the graph?
shown
YEL/GRN
YES
G o t o step 3.
YEL/GRN
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there
continuity?
11
12
13
14
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
BRN
Is there continuity?
Y E S -Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor.
NO -Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control u n i t . B
21-40
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
RED/
YEL
RED/WHT
PNK/BLK
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
PNK/BLK
9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
YEL/GRN
RED/YEL
GRY
RED/WHT
10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 | 20
GRY
YEL/
GRN
Is there
continuity?
PNK/BLK
RED/WHT
RED/YEL
LO
GRY
NO
G o t o step 4.
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
Is there
continuity?
(cont'd)
21-41
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the s a m e
terminals for voltage.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 20P
CONNECTOR
11
12 13
14
15 16
10
17
18 19
20
Go to step 2.
Is there any
voltage?
move
21-42
BLU/BLK
| ^ |
BLU/WHT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GRN/
BLK
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
YEL/
GRN
BLU/GRN
LT G R N / B L K
Is there any
GRN/
BLK
GRN/YEL
(U) (Q)
Is there
;o)
(D
(h
(0)
continuity?
voltage?
(cont'd)
21-43
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check for
continuity between f o l l o w i n g terminals of the
climate control unit 20P connector and the m o d e
control motor 7P connector.
7P:
20P:
No. 1
No. 5
No. 2
No. 6
No. 7
No. 11
No. 3
No. 17
No. 4
No. 18
No. 5
No. 19
No. 6
No. 20
OK?
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of female
BLU/BLK
YEL/GRN
terminals
I^BLU/WHT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
move
M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e
Is there
terminals
continuity?
21-44
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
run?
_Q_
Y E S - G o t o step 2.
N O - G o to step 15.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then disconnect the
power transistor 5P connector.
BLU/RED
tJ
BLK
JUMPER WIRE
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
3
4
speed?
5
BLK
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
NO Check for an open in the wire between the
power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G401.
(cont'd)
21-45
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Check for continuity between the No. 5 terminal of
the climate control unit 8P connector and the No. 3
terminal of the power transistor 5P connector.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 8P C O N N E C T O R
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T 8P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
f^l
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
2
5
1
r1
3
8
BLU/RED
ORN/BLK
ORN/BLK
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there
Is there
continuity?
continuity?
Y E S G o t o step 12.
YES
G o t o step 10.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 8P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
/ -
1
5
4
rl
6 rJ 7
l
...
1
4
3
8
3
8
r1
BLU/RED
ORN/BLK
continuity?
continuity?
N O - G o to step 11.
21-46
5
r1
Is there
Is there
G o t o step 13.
ra
Is the power
transistor
OK?
20. Remove the blower motor high relay, and test it,
refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual (see page
22-52).
Is the relay
YES
OK?
Go to step 2 1 .
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and check the No. 56
(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, and
No. 3 (7.5 A) fuse in the driver's under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Are the fuses
OK ?
X L
YES
NO
G o t o step 16.
BLU/RED
JUMPER
WIRE
B L O W E R M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
BLU/RED
run?
Y E S - G o t o step 23.
NO -Repair open in the wire between the blower
motor high relay and the blower motor.
23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
run?
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Go to step 3 1 .
(cont'd)
21-47
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
26. Measure the voltage between the No. 1 terminal of
the blower motor high relay 5P connector and body
ground.
B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y
5P C O N N E C T O R
/
0
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 8P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals
3
5
1
4
BLU/ORN
Is there battery
BLU/ORN
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 27.
NO Repair open in the w i r e between the blower
motor high relay and the No. 3 fuse in the driver's
under-dash fuse/relay b o x . H
B L O W E R M O T O R HIGH R E L A Y
5P C O N N E C T O R
BLK
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 29.
N O - Check for an open in the wire between the
blower motor high relay and body g r o u n d . If the
w i r e is OK, check for poor g r o u n d at G401
21-48
Is there
continuity?
B L O W E R MOTOR 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of female terminals
YEL/BLK
Is there battery
YES
NO
Is there battery
voltage?
Go to step 37.
Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.
voltage?
37. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
NO
35. Remove the blower motor relay f r o m the underhood fuse/relay box, and test it, refer to the '98-01
Accord Service Manual (see page 22-52).
Is the relay
BLK/YEL
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 36.
NO Replace the blower motor relay.
Is there battery
YES
voltage?
G o t o step 39.
(cont'd)
21-49
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
39. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
40. Check for continuity between the No. 2 t e r m i n a l of
the blower motor relay 4P socket and body g r o u n d .
B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
^ []
BLK
indicator
Go to step 2.
1
3
Is there
continuity?
Is there approximately
RED/WHT
volts?
r1
21-50
OK ?
Y E S G o t o step 2.
WHT/YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 7.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
BLK/YEL
Is there battery
voltage?
M l IWl
4^5
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
6 L
J1 7
-v
3
8
BLK
continuity?
21-51
Climate Control
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 3 (7.5A) fuse in the driver's underdash fuse/relay box.
Is the fuses
OK ?
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
Y E S - G o t o step 2.
GRN/WHT
GRN/RED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Is there
BLK/YEL
continuity?
Goto step 9.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
Is there battery
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
voltage?
Y E S - G o t o step 5.
GRN/WHT
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
control
motor
voltage?
OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 7.
N O - G o t o step 11.
21-52
A / C P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
GRN/WHT
GRN/RED
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
BLU/RED
9)
GRN/RED
U
GRN/WHT
Is there approximately
volts?
W i r e s i d e o f f e m a l e terminals
Is there
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
continuity?
NO
G o t o step 10.
A / C PRESSURE SWITCH
doors
Is there
continuity?
Y E S - G o t o step 6.
NO - G o t o step 11.
(cont'd)
21-53
Air Conditioning
A/C Pressure Switch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Reconnect the A/C pressure switch 2P connector.
7. Disconnect the climate control unit 20P connector.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
/
12
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
13
14
15
25
26
27
17
18
19
20
28
29
30
21
10
23
24
BLU/RED
YEL/GRN
r>^
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Is there approximately
volts?
volts?
within
specifications?
21-54
Climate Control
In-car Temperature Sensor
Replacement
J
1
RESISTANCE
(kPJ
TEMPERATURE
21-55
Climate Control
Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Replacement
1. Disconnect the 2P connector from the outside air
temperature sensor. Release the lock, and remove
the outside air temperature sensor.
RESISTANCE
(kPJ
104 F
4 0 C
TEMPERATURE
21-56
WHT/RED
YEL/GRN
21-57
Climate Control
Power Transistor Test
POWER TRANSISTOR
1
4
B
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of
removal. After installation, operate the control unit
controls to see whether it works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnosis function to comfirm that
there are no problems in the system (see page 2 1 28).
21-58
21-59
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
collision, all SRS service w o r k must be performed by an authorized Honda dealer.
Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the frontal airbags (and/or side airbags on some '00-01 models).
Do not b u m p the SRS unit, Otherwise, the system may fail in case of a collision, or the airbags may deploy w h e n the
ignition switch is ON (II).
SRS electrical w i r i n g harnesses are indicated w i t h y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the
steering c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the
front seats ('00-01 models) and around the floor ('00-01 models). Do not use electrical test equipment on these
circuits.
Body Electrical
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Connectors and Harnesses
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Power Distribution
Ground Distribution
Battery
Relays
Power Relay T e s t
22-2
22-4
22-23
22-26
22-29
22-30
22-31
* Gauges
Gauge Bulb R e p l a c e m e n t
Circuit Diagram
22-32
22-33
22-38
22-40
Circuit D i a g r a m
22-41
Audio Unit C o n n e c t o r R e p l a c e m e n t
22-42
22-42
22-43
Test
22-43
22-44
Circuit D i a g r a m
22-45
Motor T e s t
22-46
Switch Test/Replacement
22-47
Seat Heaters-Canada
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
22-48
Circuit D i a g r a m
22-49
01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8007, for the items not shown in this section.
S E A T H E A T E R R E L A Y (Canada)
('98-00 m o d e l s )
[Wire colors: B L K / Y E L , B L K ,
LWHT/BLK and W H T / G R N
TCS RELAY
('01 m o d e l )
[Wire colors; G R N / Y E L ,
i B R N / B L K , R E D / B L U and
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 1
HEADLIGHT
RELAY 2
HARM RFI AV
HORN RELAY
BLU
MULTI-RELAY
BOX
CONDENSER
FAN
RELAY
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY
RELAY
ELD UNIT
ABS FAIL-SAFE RELAY
fWire colors: Y E L / G R N , B L K ,
L B R N / B L K and W H T / G R N
ABS PUMP MOTOR RELAY
f Wire colors: Y E L / R E D ,
^BRN/BLK, W H T / B L U and WHT
I
22-2
INTERMITTENT
WIPER RELAY
Wire colors: G R N / B L K ,
WHT, BLK, G R N / R E D ,
and B L U / W H T
Dashboard
CONTROL MODULE
ABS C O N T R O L UNIT
('98-00 m o d e l s )
ABS/TCS CONTROL UNIT
('01 m o d e l )
22-
T1,T2and( + )
T3
G1and (-)
T4
G2
C103 t h r o u g h C108
T101 and T102
G101 a n d G 1 0 2
G201 t h r o u g h G205
G301 a n d G 3 0 2
Dashboard
Location
O t h e r s (Floor, Door,
T r u n k , a n d Roof)
(see p a g e 22-5)
(see p a g e 22-5)
(see p a g e 22-5)
(see p a g e 22-6)
C201 t h r o u g h C204
(see p a g e 22-12)
C103andC104
C301 a n d C302
C 3 0 1 , C 4 0 1 a n d C402
G401
C201 t h r o u g h C 2 0 3 a n d
C403
C 2 0 4 , C302 a n d C401
G501 and G502
(see p a g e 22-14)
Left s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s
Rear w i r e h a r n e s s
(see p a g e 22-16)
(see p a g e 22-16)
C501 t h r o u g h C505 a n d
C582
G503 and G504
C501 a n d
C551 t h r o u g h C557
G551 a n d G 5 5 2
C581 t h r o u g h C586 a n d
C851
G581
C 5 5 4 a n d C601
G601
C502
M o o n r o o f wire harness
D r i v e r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e h a r n e s s
C551
P a s s e n g e r ' s p o w e r seat w i r e
h a r n e s s ('01 S e d a n )
Driver's door w i r e harness
C701
C631 a n d C632
Left rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s
C553
R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s
C581
C404
SRS m a i n harness
C503
22-4
Notes
C851
(see p a g e 22-18)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-24)
(see p a g e 22-20)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-28)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-30)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-30)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-31)
(see p a g e 22-22)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-32)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-34)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
A c c o r d Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-36)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-37)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-38)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-38)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-39)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-42)
Refer t o t h e '98-01
Accord Service Manual
(see p a g e 22-42)
Ref
1
2
Cavities
Location
Right s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Battery
Connects t o
Under-hood fuse/relay box
Starter m o t o r
Battery positive terminal
Notes
Ref
6
5
Cavities
Location
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Transmission housing
Body g r o u n d via battery
g r o u n d cables
Battery negative terminal
Notes
Battery
Ref
8
7
Cavities
Location
M i d d l e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Valve cover
Body g r o u n d via engine
g r o u n d cable
Notes
Cavities
Location
Left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Transmission housing
Body g r o u n d via engine
g r o u n d cable
Notes
Ref
4
3
22-5
Cavities
4
2
2
10
4
16
41
2
2
1
39
45
40
2
6
35
18
14
13
32
3
3
3
2
3
29
38
7
9
12
6
8
10
2
19
20
21
11
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
25
31
16
4
25
33
36
34
31
44
30
37
1
5
23
2
1
2
2
1
4
1
3
2
1
14
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
C104
24
10
22
17
3
43
26
20
8
Connector or Terminal
Alternator
A/T clutch pressure control valve A
A / T clutch p r e s s u r e control v a l v e B
T r a n s m i s s i o n range s w i t c h (A/T g e a r
position switch)
CKP sensor
Countershaft speed sensor
Coolant temperature gauge sending
unit
E n g i n e coolant t e m p e r a t u r e ( E C T )
sensor
Radiator fan s w i t c h B
E x h a u s t g a s recircuration ( E G R )
control s o l e n o i d v a l v e
Idle air c o n t r o l (IAC) v a l v e
Ignition coil
Ignition control m o d u l e (ICM)
Intake air t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) s e n s o r
Lock-up control s o l e n o i d v a l v e and
shift control s o l e n o i d v a l v e A
Mainshaft s p e e d s e n s o r
M A P sensor
No. 1 fuel injector
No. 2 fuel injector
No. 3 fuel injector
No. 4 fuel injector
No. 5 fuel injector
No. 6 fuel injector
Oil pressure s w i t c h
PCM connector B
PCM connector C
PCM connector D
Primary heated o x y g e n sensor
(Primary H02S)
Radiator fan switch A
Second clutch pressure switch
Shift control solenoid valve B
Shift control solenoid valve C
Starter solenoid
TDC sensor
Third clutch pressure switch
T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (TP) s e n s o r
VTEC pressure switch
VTEC s o l e n o i d v a l v e
C103
22-6
Right
Right
Right
Right
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
Location
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
Connects to
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
Notes
(cont'd)
22-7
22-8
Ref
46
28
29
15
Cavities
4
2
2
10
4
16
41
2
2
2
40
Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
36
14
33
3
2
3
30
39
7
10
13
49
45
43
8
9
11
48
44
42
2
19
20
21
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
25
31
16
Right
Right
Right
Right
side
side
side
side
of
of
of
of
Location
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
Connects to
Notes
(cont'd)
22-9
('00-01
models) (cont'd)
Connector or Terminal
Primary H02S
Radiator fan switch A
Radiator fan switch B
Secondary clutch switch pressure
switch
Shift control solenoid valve B
Shift control solenoid valve C
Starter solenoid
TDC sensor
Third clutch pressure switch
T h r o t t l e p o s i t i o n (TP) s e n s o r
VTEC p r e s s u r e s w i t c h
VTEC solenoid valve
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
T101
T102
G101
(Junction
(Junction
(Junction
(Junction
G102
22-10
connector)
connector)
connector)
connector)
Ref
12
26
51
34
Cavities
4
2
2
1
37
35
32
50
31
38
1
5
24
2
2
1
4
1
3
2
1
14
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
Right
25
10
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
22
17
18
23
3
47
27
20
8
14
20
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Under-hood fuse/relay box
Alternator
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Location
M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
side
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
engine
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
compartment
Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
C o n n e c t s to
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
B o d y g r o u n d via e n g i n e w i r e
harness
Body g r o u n d via engine wire
harness
Notes
22-11
Cavities
12
22
4
10
2
4
2
26
16
12
23
1
2
2
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
18
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
19
24
33
39
32
34
29
7
18
2
2
2
3
2
2
1
4
4
M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Behind right headlight
Behind right of front b u m p e r
Behind right headlight
Behind right headlight
Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
27
41
7
8
2
4
4
16
Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
R i g h t s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
10
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
11
18
38
37
13
2
2
16
C202
14
C203
15
C204
16
22
G201
35
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
G202
17
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
G203
36
G204
43
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
G205
44
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l
ABS control unit connector A
ABS control unit connector B
A B S fail-safe relay
ABS modulator unit
ABS pump motor
A B S p u m p m o t o r relay
ABS right front wheel sensor
ABS/TCS control unit connector A
ABS/TCS control unit connector B
ABS/TCS control unit connector C
ABS/TCS modulator unit
A/C compressor clutch
A/C pressure switch
Condenser fan motor
Cruise control actuator
Diode (Lighting)
ELD u n i t
H i g h b e a m cut relay
Left h o r n
O u t s i d e air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r D (see p a g e 22-25)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r C (see p a g e 22-25)
P o w e r s t e e r i n g p r e s s u r e (PSP) s w i t c h
Radiator fan m o t o r
Right front parking light
Right front side marker light
Right headlight (High beam)
Right headlight (Low beam)
Right horn
Seat heater relay
Secondary heated oxygen sensor
(Secondary H02S)
Security h o o d switch
Taillight relay
TCS relay
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector
D (see p a g e 22-23)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector
C (see p a g e 22-23)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector
B (see p a g e 22-23)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector
A (see p a g e 22-23)
W a s h e r level s w i t c h
Windshild washer motor
C201
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
I
* 1:
* 2;
'98-00 m o d e l s
'01 m o d e l
22-12
Location
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Behind condenser fan motor
Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Inside u n d e r - h o o d fuse/relay box
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Behind m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
B e h i n d m i d d l e of f r o n t b u m p e r
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Connects to
Notes
* 1
* 1
-x- -|
* 1
*2
*2
*2
*2
Canada
Canada
* 1
*2
Canada
Dashboard w i r e harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard w i r e harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard wire harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard wire harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
B o d y g r o u n d Via r i g h t e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
22-13
Ref
16
6
Cavities
2
1
Location
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
B r a k e f l u i d level s w i t c h c o n n e c t o r B
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
12
20
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
11
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
2
2
6
2
( /
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r E (see p a g e 22-24)
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r C (see p a g e 22-24)
Engine m o u n t control solenoid valve
EVAP purge control solenoid valve
Intermittent w i p e r relay
Left f r o n t p a r k i n g l i g h t
Left f r o n t s i d e m a r k e r l i g h t
Left h e a d l i g h t ( H i g h b e a m )
Left h e a d l i g h t ( L o w b e a m )
Seat heater relay
Test tachometer connector
Windshield wiper motor
C103
20
17
21
19
13
1
8
2
14
Left s i d e o f
Left s i d e o f
Left s i d e o f
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
B e h i n d left
Left s i d e o f
Left r e a r o f
Left s i d e o f
C104
15
10
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
C301
20
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C302
10
16
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
G301
18
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
G302
Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
'01 m o d e l
22-14
3
13
2
2
4
2
5
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
headlight
of front b u m p e r
headlight
headlight
kick p a n e l
engine compartment
engine compartment
engine compartment
C o n n e c t s to
Notes
*
E n g i n e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-6)
E n g i n e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-6)
Dashboard w i r e harness B
(see p a g e 22-16)
Dashboard w i r e harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
B o d y g r o u n d v i a left e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
B o d y g r o u n d via left e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
22-15
Cavities
4
4
14
16
14
20
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
22
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
11
10
8
7
9
6
7
5
2
7
8
20
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e of d a s h
In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r s
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C401
15
22
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C402
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C402
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
G401
17
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l
Brake s w i t c h
C a b l e reel
C o m b i n a i o n light switch
Data link c o n n e c t o r (DLC)
Daytime r u n n i n g lights control unit
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r 0 (see p a g e 22-24)
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r P (see p a g e 22-24)
Driver's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r Q (see p a g e 22-24)
Ignition switch
Immobilizer control unit
Intermittent dwell time controller
PGM-FI m a i n relay
Windshield wiper/washer switch
C301
Location
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
Connects to
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
Dashboard wire harness A
(see p a g e 22-18)
Security system w i r e harness
(Optional)
Security system w i r e harness
(Optional)
Body g r o u n d via d a s h b o a r d
w i r e harness B
D A S H B O A R D W I R E H A R N E S S B (left b r a n c h )
22-16
Notes
Canada
USA
Cavities
7
2
4
20
8
2
22
7
7
16
16
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
10
16
5
6
4
8
7
16
Under
Under
Under
Under
C202
14
C203
13
U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h
C403
U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h
Connector or Terminal
Air mix control m o t o r
Blower motor
B l o w e r m o t o r h i g h relay
Climate control unit connector A
Climate control unit connector B
Evaporator t e m p e r a t u r e sensor
Heater c o n t r o l p a n e l
Heater f a n s w i t c h
Mode control motor
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r J (see p a g e 22-25)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r K (see p a g e 22-25)
Power transistor
Radiator fan control m o d u l e
Recirculation control m o t o r
C201
Location
U n d e r right side of dash
Under right side of dash
U n d e r r i g h t side o f d a s h
U n d e r m i d d l e of d a s h
U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
U n d e r m i d d l e of dash
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
r i g h t side
m i d d l e of
m i d d l e of
r i g h t side
of dash
dash
dash
of dash
Connects to
Notes
AUTO A/C
AUTO A/C
AUTO A/C
MAN. A/C
MAN. A/C
AUTO A/C
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-12)
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-12)
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t
w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-12)
Security system w i r e harness
(Optional)
22-17
Connector or T e r m i n a l
Accessory socket
A / T gear position console light/parking
pin switch
A u d i o unit
Clock
C r u i s e c o n t r o l unit
Cruise main switch
Cruise main / T C S switch
Driver's seat heater s w i t c h
Driver's u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r 1 (see page 22-24)
Driver's u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r K (see page 22-24)
Gauge assembly connector A
Gauge assembly connector B
Gauge assembly connector C
G l o v e box light
Hazard w a r n i n g switch
In-car temperature s e n s o r
Left tweeter
M o o n r o o f switch
Multiplex control unit (driver's)
connector B
Multiplex control unit (passenger's)
connector B
Parking brake switch
Ref
29
32
Cavities
2
4
17
16
37
7
7
31
2
20
5
14
5
8
6
18
Behind
Middle
seats
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
18
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
11
10
12
27
14
38
9
8
5
14
22
16
2
10
2
2
6
22
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
Behind
23
22
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
36
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r s w i t c h
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r H (see p a g e 22-25)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r 1 (see p a g e 22-25)
PCM connector A
Right tweeter
Shift lock solenoid
30
21
6
18
M i d d l e of floor between f r o n t
seats
Behind m i d d l e of dash
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
22
18
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
28
20
34
32
2
2
Sunlight sensor
SRS m e m o r y erase signal (MES)
SRS unit
C204
15
4
33
26
2
2
8
22
Behind
Behind
Middle
seats
Behind
Behind
Middle
Behind
C302
39
16
B e h i n d left s i d e o f d a s h
C401
40
22
B e h i n d left s i d e of d a s h
C501
42
18
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
C502
Behind i n s t r u m e n t panel
C503
13
C503
13
C503
13
C504
41
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
C505
35
Middle of floor
C582
25
16
B e h i n d r i g h t s i d e of d a s h
22-18
C o n n e c t s to
audio unit
middle of dash
left s i d e o f d a s h
instrument panel
i n s t r u m e n t panel
m i d d l e of dash
left kick p a n e l
Notes
*1
*2
gauges
gauges
gauges
glove box
m i d d l e of dash
left s i d e o f d a s h
i n s t r u m e n t panel
instrument panel
left kick p a n e l
middle of dash
instrument panel
of floor between front
m i d d l e of dash
left kick p a n e l
of f l o o r
right side of dash
*2
*3
Right engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-12)
Left e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-14)
D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s B (see
p a g e 22-16)
Left s i d e w i r e h a r e n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 22-24)
M o o n r o o f w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
(see p a g e 22-30)
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e '9801 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e ' 9 8 01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e '9801 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
Security system w i r e harness
(Optional)
SRS f l o o r h a r n e s s , refer t o t h e ' 9 8 01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see
p a g e 22-39)
R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e
22-21)
* 1
'00 Sedan
'00 C o u p e
USA
'00 Sedan
with side
airbags
'00 C o u p e
C582
Ref
25
G501
18
G502
19
G503
B e h i n d left kick p a n e l
G504
24
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l
*1:
* 2:
* 3:
Cavities
6
Location
Behind right side of dash
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Connects to
R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-20)
Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
Body g r o u n d via dashboard
wire harness A
Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
Body g r o u n d via dashboard
w i r e harness A
Notes
*2
'98-00 m o d e l s
'01 m o d e l
'00-01 S e d a n , '01 C o u p e
22-19
Cavities
2
2
1
3
3
4
2
20
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
15
17
14
18
1
1
2
2
1
10
G582
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
G583
G584
C701
10
G851
12
G581
10
Connector or Terminal
A B S r i g h t rear w h e e l s e n s o r
Front passenger's side airbag inflator
Passenger's door switch
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat b e l t s w i t c h
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r
Passenger's side impact sensor
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay b o x
c o n n e c t o r A (see p a g e 22-25)
Passenger's under-dash fuse/relay box
c o n n e c t o r G (see p a g e 22-25)
Right rear d o o r s w i t c h
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r
R i g h t s i d e seat b e l t t e n s i o n e r
W i n d o w antenna coil connector A
C581
*
*
*
*
1:
2:
3:
4:
' 0 0 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
'98-99 m o d e l
' 0 0 m o d e l w i t h seat h e a t e r
'01 m o d e l
22-20
Location
U n d e r r i g h t s i d e o f rear seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Right B-pillar
U n d e r passenger's seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
U n d e r passenger's seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Connects to
Notes
*4
*1
*2
*3
*4
Canada
#4
R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s ,
refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 2237)
Dashboard wire harness A ,
refer t o t h e '98-01 A c c o r d
S e r v i c e M a n u a l (see p a g e 22lo;
SRS m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e
M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-39)
S R S m a i n h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e
M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-39)
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat w i r e h a r n e s s
(see p a g e 22-22).
O P D S w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e
M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-42)
B o d y g r o u n d v i a r i g h t side
wire harness
*4
#4
* 4
*2
#4
Cavities
2
1
3
3
4
2
2
20
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
17
18
7
2
1
16
C582
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
C583
C584
C585 ( C o n n e c t s t o C586)
C586 ( C o n n e c t s t o C585)
C851
4
8
11
1
1
4
Connector or Terminal
A B S r i g h t rear w h e e l s e n s o r
P a s s e n g e r ' s door s w i t c h
P a s s e n g e r ' s s e a t belt s w i t c h
P a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r
Passenger's s e a t h e a t e r
Passenger's s i d e a i r b a g i n f l a t o r
Passenger's side i m p a c t sensor
P a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r A (see page 22-25)
P a s s e n g e r ' s u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box
c o n n e c t o r G (see page 22-25)
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r
W i n d o w antenna coil connector A
C582
G581
*
*
*
*
*
*
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Location
U n d e r r i g h t side of rear seat
R i g h t B-pillar
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Under passenger's seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
B e h i n d r i g h t kick p a n e l
Connects to
* 1
*2
*3
*5
Canada
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Notes
O P D S w i r e h a r n e s s , refer t o
t h e '98-01 A c c o r d S e r v i c e
M a n u a l (see p a g e 22-42)
B o d y g r o u n d via r i g h t s i d e
wire harness
* 4
*5
*6
*6
*6
*6
*6
'00-01 m o d e l w i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
'98-99 m o d e l s
'00-01 m o d e l w i t h seat h e a t e r
'00 m o d e l
'01 m o d e l
'00-01 m o d e l s
22-21
22-22
Ref
4
Cavities
6
Location
R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
7
5
1
6
3
3
4
2
2
10
U n d e r passenger's seat
U n d e r passenger's seat
U n d e r passenger's seat
U n d e r p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Connects to
R i g h t s i d e w i r e h a r n e s s (see
p a g e 22-20)
Notes
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Ref
15
3
14
11
13
1
12
9
4
10
7
8
2
6
5
Socket
A
A/C compressor clutch relay
B
Blower motor relay
C
Condenser fan relay
D
Diode
ELD unit
Horn relay
Headlight relay 1
Headlight relay 2
Radiator fan relay
T1
T101
Terminal
18
4
7
4
3
4
16
2
3
4
4
4
4
Connects t o
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Not used
22-23
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector t Fuse/Relay Box index (cont'd)
Driver's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Ref
11
Terminal
10
14
C
D
Diode
Diode
E
F
10
7
1
2
4
9
20
6
18
H
1
J
K
L
M
5
13
12
14
23
15
6
18
2
18
Socket
24
22
0
P
Q
R
Reverse relay
S
Starter cut relay
T
Turn signal/hazard relay
U
21
16
17
26
19
27
18
24
20
25
20
7
22
1
4
1
4
1
4
1
22-24
Connects t o
Left side w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
Left side w i r e harness, refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual
(see page 22-24)
Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-14)
Not used
Terminal
20
4
4
18
3
20
G
H
I
J
K
Multiplex control unit connector
6
18
12
17
13
11
3
18
18
16
16
24
14
16
4
4
Socket
A
Accessory relay
B
C
D
Diode
Diode
Diode
E
Connects to
Right side wire harness (see page 22-20)
Roof wire harness (see page 22-20)
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-12)
Not used
16
15
14
22-25
Power Distribution
Fuse t o Components Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse
Number
41
42
43
44
45
Amps
Wire color
100A
50A
20A
WHT
RED/GRN
20A
RED/YEL
46
47
15A
20A
WHT/GRN
WHT/YEL
Fuse/relay
box socket
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
20A
15A
30A
40A
20A
40A
40A
40A
40A
20A
20A
59
20A
22-26
BODY
Amps
15A
2
3
10A
7.5A
Wire Color
RED/WHT
RED/BLU (or GRN)
BLK/WHT (or GRN)
BLK/YEL
7.5A
YEL/BLK
5
6
7.5 A
15A
7.5A
YEL/GRN
7.5A
7.5A
YEL/BLK
Fuse/relay box socket
YEL
10
11
12
7.5A
15A
30A
13
7.5A
BLU/ORN
(cont'd)
22-27
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Passenger's Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Amps
30 A
20 A
20A
20 A
20A
10 A
20 A
Wire Color
GRN
RED
RED
BLU
WHT/RED
RED/BLU
WHT/YEL
8
9
20 A
20 A
10
10 A
(Sedan)
15 A
(Coupe)
BLU/BLK
WHT/GRN
WHT/RED
RED/GRN
11
12
13
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
22-28
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
GRN
GRN/WHT
WHT/BLK
Ground Distribution
Ground t o Components Index
NOTE: All ground wires are BLK unless otherwise noted.
Ground
G1
G2
G101
and
G102
('00-01
models)
G201
G202
G203
G204
G205
G301
G302
G401
G501
G502
G503
G504
G551
G552
G581
G601
G801
22-29
Battery
Battery Test
22-30
Relays
Power Relay Test
Identify the relay, then do the test listed for i t
Normally-open t y p e A:
Relay
TCS relay
Test
Normally-open type A
22-31
Gauges
Gauge Bulb Replacement
Bulb Location
ABS INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
HIGH B E A M
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
\
INDICATOR
I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )
\
L I G H T (1.26 W )
I M M O B I L I Z E R I N D I C A T O R L I G H T (1.26 W )
W A S H E R L E V E L INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W)
(Canada)
DRL INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
(Canada)
T C S INDICATOR
L I G H T (1.26 W )
('01 m o d e l )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHTS
(3.78 W )
G A U G E LIGHT
(3.78 W )
22-32
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26 W )
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LIGHT
(1.26 W )
BODY
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
0-BLK
No.6
C (15A)
j
}
No.9
(7-5A)
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
BLU/RED
G401
G302
(cont'd)
22-33
Gauges
Circuit Diagram {cont'd)
PCM
BLU
/From
\
previous
\page
WHT/YEL
B21
/From
BLU
YEL
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
B11
previous
\page
/
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT)
GAUGE
FUEL
GAUGE
SPEEDOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
DRIVE CIRCUIT
TACHOMETER
TACHOMETER
DRIVE CIRCUIT
C2
C11
B3
(SCS)
BLU/WHT
YEL-GRN
YEL/BLU
v
PCM
FUEL
GAUGE
UNIT
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDING
UNIT
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
(ECT)
SENDING UNIT
PCM
('00-01 models)
BLK
1
G552
('98-99 models)
22-34
B13
(RXD)
B14
(TXD)
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
or TAILLIGHT
RELAY
{Canada;
(cont'd)
22-35
Gauges
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD
RELAY
LEFT
RIGHT
GRN/BLU
GRN/YEL
GRN/BLU
GRN/YEL
JL
LEFT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
RIGHT
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHTS
SRS UNIT
BLU
GRN/BLU
FUEL
GAUGE
SENDING
UNIT
1
G552
22-36
BODY
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT
(Driver's)
v
RED/WHT
GAUGE ASSEMBLY
SEAT BELT
REMINDER
LIGHT
(LED)
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP (MIL)
(1.26W)
CRUISE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
LOW
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(LED)
SIDE AIRBAG
INDICATOR
LIGHT
(1.26W)
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
B6
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
RED/BLU
GRN/ORN
BLU/BLK
YEL/RED
PCM
RED/BLU
('00-01 models)
YEL/RED
DRIVER'S
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
(OH : Unbuckled '
VOFF: Buckled
,
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
/ O N : Engine stopped '
\ O F F : Engine running ,
BLK
G551
22-37
( + ) - B L K *
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A)
N o . 4 2 (50A)
BAT
I TRUNK
LATCH
J SWITCH
BLK
G601
22-38
BODY
fl
; Coupe
WHT/YEL
WHT'BLK
WHT/BLK
WHT/BLK
MULTIPLEX CONTROL
UNIT (Driver's)
PCM
CRUISE CONTROL UNIT
ABS CONTROL UNIT
TRAILER LIGHTING
CONNECTOR
6[1]
0 WHT/BLK '
WHT/BLK
d)
HIGH MOUNT
BRAKE LIGHT
(21W)
BLK
-5"
G601
G551
22-39
TWEETERS
Replacement, page 22-125
n the '98-01 A c c o r d Service M a n u a l
RADIO R E M O T E SWITCH
Test, page 22-38
REAR SPEAKERS
Replacement, page 22-125
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
22-40
WINDOW ANTENNA
Test, page 22-126
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
Repair, page 22-126
in t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l
Circuit Diagram
DRIVER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
No.41 (100A)
No.42 (50A)
-
BLK
No.54 (40A)
VOL.
H VOL.
DOWN [ UP
()
g (A)
' BAT
T O f
ACC>
N 0 . 8 (7.5A)
WHT/BLK
YEL/BLK
Q
I
g
iI I
0501
22
Wire
WHT/RED
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
14*
15
16
17
18
19
20
Qj
foj
(Si
> o
Position
OFF
AUDIO/CH
(SEEK)
Resistance
Approx. 3.6 k Q
Approx. 780 Q
Approx. 360 Q
(VOL
UP)
(VOL DOWN)
3 "4 "5
6 7 8 " 9 10
11 12 13 1415 16 17 18
22-42
Approx. 100 0
Test
Turn on the spotlight.
BATTERY
(+)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
G581
22-43
Power Seat
Component Location Index
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable):
N O T E : R e f e r t o t h e ' 9 8 - 0 1 A c c o r d S e r v i c e M a n u a l , P/N 6 1 S 8 0 0 6 , f o r t h e d r i v e r ' s p o w e r s e a t .
22-44
(4^*
No.55 (40A)
BLK
YEL/GRN
No.3
(20A)
No.5
(20A)
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
WHT/RED
B1
B3
O
FORWARD
B4
BLK
BACKWARD
A2
A4
BLU
BLU/YEL
SLIDE
MOTOR
BACKWARD
FOR- '
WARD
B5
B2
B6
YEL
YEL/GRN
BLK
RECLINE
MOTOR
JOL
G581
G581
Power Seat
Motor Test
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjutable):
Terminal
B5
B6
Forward
Backward
A2
A4
Forward
Backward
Position
\^
Slide motor;
\^
Terminal
Position
\^
22-46
Switch Test/Replacement
Passenger's Power Seat (4-way Adjustable);
1. Remove the adjustment switch cover (A) from the
passenger's seat by removing the 2 screws (B), and
pulling off the adjustment switch knobs (C).
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Position
SLIDE
SWITCH
RECLINE
SWITCH
FOR
WARD
BACK
WARD
FOR
WARD
BACK
WARD
-o
-o
o
o
o
o
22-47
22-48
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 41 (100 A)
No.42 (50A)
BLK
No.59 (20A)
TH : THERMOSTAT
TON ; Below 9 3 F ( 3 4 C ) 1
l O F F : Above 1 0 9 F
BR : BREAKER
(43C)J
SEAT HEATER RELAY
f O N : Below 8 6 F ( 3 0 C ) 1
[OFF: Above 1 2 2 F (50C)J
HI . High
LO : Low
COMBINATION
LIGHT SWITCH
COMBINATION LIGHT
SWITCH (DX, LX)
(DX, LX)
TAILLIGHT
RELAY (EX)
WHT/BLK
RED/BLK
MULTIPLEX
CONTROL UNIT
(Driver's)
DRIVER'S SEAT
HEATER
SEAT HEATER
1
G202 ("98-00 models)
22-49
Restraints
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
S R S Unit Identification
D T C Troubleshooting Index
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index ..........
23-2
. 23-3
23-4
SRS
SRS Unit Identification
'98 Model
MAKER
IDENTIFICATION M A R K
KEIHIN
M2
SRS UNIT
I
23-2
Detection Item
Open in driver's airbag inflator
Increased resistance in driver's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in driver's
airbag inflator
Short to power in driver's airbag inflator
Short to ground in driver's airbag inflator
Open in passenger's airbag inflator
Increased resistance in passenger's airbag inflator
Short to another wire or decreased resistance in
passenger's airbag inflator
Short to power in passenger's airbag inflator
Short to ground in passenger's airbag inflator
Internal failure of SRS unit
Notes
(see page 23-74)*
(see page 23-74)*
(see page 23-76)*
(see
(see
(see
(see
(see
page
page
page
page
page
23-78)*
23-80)*
23-82)*
23-82)*
23-83)*
23-3
SRS
Symptom Troubleshooting index
'98 Model
Diagnostic procedure
SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
refer to '98-01 Accord Service
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23264)* .
SRS Indicator Light Troubleshooting,
The SRS indicator light stays on
refer to '98-01 Accord Service
after the ignition switch is turned on
Manual, P/N 61S8008 (see page 23(II).
264)* .
* T. Refer to the '98-01 Accord Service Manual, P/N 61S8008.
Symptom
SRS indicator light doesn't come on.
23-4
N O T E : Refer t o t h e f o l l o w i n g list t o l o o k u p
D T C s , s y m p t o m s , f u s e s , connectors, wire
h a r n e s s e s , specifications, m a i n t e n a n c e
s c h e d u l e s , a n d g e n e r a l service
information:
D T C T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Indexes
ABS/TCS Components
Automatic Climate Control
Automatic Transaxle
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s
SRS
19-9
21-29
14-7
11-3
23-3
S y m p t o m T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Indexes
A/C
21-7
A B S / T C S C o m p o n e n t s .................. 1 9 - 1 0 , 3 1
Automatic Climate Control ................. 21-30
Automatic Transaxle
14-8
Cruise C o n t r o l S y s t e m
4-43
Fan C o n t r o l s
10-15
Fuel and E m i s s i o n s
11-6
SRS
.....23-4
Steering
17-4
Fuse/Relay Indexes
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Clutch Relay ............ 22-23
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan Relay
22-23
B l o w e r M o t o r Relay
22-23
ELD (Electrical L o a d D e t e c t o r )
22-23
H e a d l i g h t Relay
,
22-23
Horn Relay
22-23
P o w e r Distribution
22-26
R a d i a t o r Fan Relay
22-23
U n d e r - d a s h Fuse/Relay B o x , D r i v e r ' s .... 2224
U n d e r - d a s h F u s e / R e l a y Box, P a s s e n g e r ' s ..
22-25
U n d e r - h o o d Fuse/Relay B o x
22-23
Connector and W i r e Harness Indexes
C o m p o n e n t C o n n e c t o r s (to harness) ... 22-5
G r o u n d s (to c o m p o n e n t s )
22-29
In-line C o n n e c t o r s (to harness)
22-4
Specifications section
Section 2
Maintenance section
Section 3
Section 1
A/C Compressor
Replacement
A / C Compressor Clutch
Inspection
Overhaul
A / C C o m p r e s s o r Relief V a l v e
Replacement
A / C Condenser
Replacement
10-2
10-8
10-13
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan C i r c u i t
Troubleshooting
21-10
A / C Pressure S w i t c h Circuit
Troubleshooting
21-53
A/T Assembly
Removal
Installation
14-114
14-121
14-173
A / T Countershaft 3 r d Gear
Replacement
14-173
A / T Differential
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x .............. 14-201
A / T Gear Position Indicator
Replacement
14-144
14-104
A / T Mainshaft Assembly
D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14169
Installation
14-192
A / T Secondary Shaft Assembly
D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14176
Inspection
14-177
Installation
14-192
A
A/C
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
A / C C o n d e n s e r Fan A s s e m b l y
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Test
Replacement
21-3
21-8
21-14,19
.....21-16,21
2 1 - 1 7 , 22
ABS/TCS Components
C o m p o n e n t Location Index ............. 19-8, 24
Circuit D i a g r a m
19-12,46
Description
19-32
ABS-TCS Control Unit
How-to Information
Replacement
19-25
19-82
19-80
Accumulator Body
D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14166
Air Cleaner E l e m e n t
Replacement
11-97
Alternator
C o m p o n e n t Location Index ................... 4-25
Replacement
4-31
Overhaul
4-35
Alternator-compressor Belt
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
A/C Compressor
,
Charging System
Inspection/Replacement
Charging System
Alternator-compressor Belt A u t o tensioner
Inspection/Replacement
4-25
4-25
4-31
4-33
ATF
Inspection
Replacement
14-112
14-113
ATF Cooler
Repair
14-127
10-2
14-128
ATF Pump
Inspection
14-163
Audio Unit
Replacement
22-42
Audio/Entertainment
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit D i a g r a m
22-40
22-41
A / T Shift Cable
Replacement
Adjustment
14-133
14-136
21-26
21-31
.21-32
A / T Shift Lever
Removal
Installation
Disassembly/Reassembly
14-129
14-130
14-132
A u t o m a t i c Transaxle
Description
Test
14-18
14-101
19-22
21-18, 23
ABS Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting
19-18, 76
21-24
ABS Modulator Unit
Removal/Installation
19-21
(cont'd)
Coolant
Replacement
Battery
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Charging System
Test
Wiring System
4-25
-
..........21-58
19-4
B r a k e Pads
Inspection/Replacement
19-2
.....4-50
B u m p e r S p o i l e r , Rear
Replacement
20-6
10-2
10-5
10-5
c
Camshaft
Inspection
Installation
Coolant Reservoir
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
10-2
14-175
6-40
6-50
4-25
4-26
4-27
14-195
CKP ( C r a n k s h a f t P o s i t i o n ) S e n s o r
Replacement
6-56
21-51
21-28
21-58
21-59
7-3
7-3
7-10
4-50
Cruise C o n t r o l C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
Troubleshooting
4-45
Cruise Control M a i n S w i t c h
Test/Replacement
4-48
4-41
4-42
4-46
6-36
Charging System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Troubleshooting
4-54
22-30
Brake Calipers
Overhaul
10-10
Cruise C o n t r o l A c t u a t o r Cable
Adjustment
7-3
7-7
Crankshaft
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Inspection
Removal
Installation
Crankshaft M a i n Bearings
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Replacement
Crankshaft Oil Seal, Pulley End
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Installation
14-110
7-3
7-7, 14
7-12
7-24
7-3
7-8
7-3
7-29
D
Differential Carrier Bearing O u t e r Races, A
IT
Replacement
14-204
Differential Carrier Bearings, A / T
Replacement
Inspection
14-202
14-205
Differential Carrier, A / T
Replacement
14-202
14-203
14-201
Distributor
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Replacement
Disassembly/Reassembly
4-14
4-19
4-20
Drive Plate
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Removal/Installation
7-3
7-6
DTCs
(See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x )
6-17
D4 Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting
7-3
4-51
4-52
14-93
Front Driveshaft A s s e m b l y
Resassembly
16-3
ECT S e n s o r
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Front S e a t s
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
22-44
22-45
ECT S e n s o r C i r c u i t
Troubleshooting
EGR Valve
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Emblems
Replacement
End Cover, A / T
Removal
Engine Assembly
Removal
Installation
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
10-2
21-50
10-2
20-8
14-151
5-2
5-11
7-3
E n g i n e Block E n d C o v e r
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
7-3
E n g i n e Block, B a r e
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Inspection
Repair
7-3
7-15
7-17
E n g i n e M o u n t Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
4-55
E n g i n e M o u n t Control S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit D i a g r a m
Troubleshooting
4-55
4-56
4-57
E V A P Control S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x .............. 11-103
E x h a u s t Manifold
Removal/Installation
9-3
E x h a u s t Manifold G a s k e t
Replacement
9-3
E x h a u s t Pipe
Replacement
Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s
Description
Circuit Diagram
11-7
11-30, 39
Fuel G a u g e
Test
11-94
11-50
Fuel Injectors
Replacement
11-80, 82
Fuel L i n e s a n d H o s e s
Inspection
Fuel P r e s s u r e Regulator
Replacement
11-91
I C M (Ignition C o n t r o l Module)
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Input Test
4-14
4-21
Idle C o n t r o l S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x ................. 11-85
Adjustment
11-86
Ignition Coil(s)
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Test
Troubleshooting
4-14
4-22
4-23
Ignition S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit D i a g r a m
Inspection
4-14, 15
4-16, 17
4-18
Ignition W i r e s
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Test/Inspection
4-14
4-22
In-car T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Replacement
Test
21-55
21-55
Intake Air S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
11-95
11-92, 93
Fuel S u p p l y S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
11-87
11-88
11-89
Fuses
(See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s Index)
G
Gauges
Circuit D i a g r a m
Intake Manifold
Removal/Installation
.22-33
G e n e r a l Information
(See s e c t i o n 1)
Interlock S y s t e m
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit D i a g r a m
Intermediate Shaft A s s e m b l y
Disassembly
Removal
Resassembly
Installation
H
Heater H o s e s a n d Pipes
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
10-2
Heater V a l v e
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
10-2
K e y Interlock S o l e n o i d
Test
Heater V a l v e C a b l e
Adjustment
10-20
Homelink R e m o t e Control S y s t e m
Circuit D i a g r a m
Test
Fan Controls
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit D i a g r a m
10-14
10-16
Hood
Replacement
Frame
Repair C h a r t
IA (Intake Air) B y p a s s C o n t r o l V a l v e
Test
11-101
9-2
14-145
14-146
16-14
16-14
16-16
16-18
9-4
Final Driven G e a r , A / T
Replacement
14-202
20-12
H 0 2 S , Primary
Replacement
H 0 2 S , Secondary
Replacement
21-13
22-43
22-43
K e y Interlock S y s t e m Circuit
Troubleshooting
14-149
14-99
20-7
L o c k - u p Control S o l e n o i d V a l v e
Test
14-103
11-84
L o w Fuel Indicator
Replacement
22-32
11-84
(cont'd)
8-3
8-4
Park Pin S w i t c h
Test
PCM
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
PCV Valve
Test
Main Valve Body
Removal
Repair
Resassembly
Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly
14-157
14-159
14-160
.... 14-
161
Installation
14-190
Piston Pins
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
14-150
4 55
11-102
7-3
Piston Rings
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Replacement
7-3
7-22
Pistons
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Removal
Replacement
7-3
7-12
7-18
14-171
Power S e a t Linkage
Disassembly/Reassembly
Mainshaft S p e e d Sensor
Replacement
14-110
Maintenance
(See s e c t i o n 3)
Multiplex C o n t r o l Unit, Driver's
Input Test
14-147
o
Oil Filter
Replacement
Oil P a n
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y
Lubrication System
8-5
.....7-3
7-3
Oil P r e s s u r e S w i t c h
Test
L o w E n g i n e Oil I n d i c a t o r C o m p o n e n t s .
8-4
Lubrication System
8-4
Oil P u m p , E n g i n e
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
E n g i n e Block A s s e m b l y
Lubrication System
Overhaul
Lubrication System
Oil, E n g i n e
Replacement
O u t s i d e Air T e m p e r a t u r e S e n s o r
Replacement
Test
....7-3
7-3
8-7
8-5
21-56
21-56
P
Park L e v e r Position S t o p
Inspection/Adjustment
P o w e r S t e e r i n g Fluid R e s e r v o i r
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
14-153
20-4
10-17
Radiator F a n S w i t c h
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Test
10-2
10 21
Radiator F a n S w i t c h Circuit
Troubleshooting
10-19
Radiator H o s e s a n d Pipes
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
10-2
Radio R e m o t e S w i t c h
Test
22-42
21 52
Refrigerant Oil
Replacement
21-6
Regulator V a l v e B o d y
D i s a s s e m b l y / l n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14164
22-46
22-47
17-3
Rocker Arm A s s e m b l y
Removal
Disassembly/Reassembly
6-36
6-37
Rocker A r m s
Test
Inspection
6-10
6-38
17-12
17-3
17-7,8
17-13
17-14
P o w e r S t e e r i n g P u m p Belt
Inspection/Adjustment
17-10
_
Radiator
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Test
Replacement
Radiator F a n Circuit
Troubleshooting
10-2
10-8
10-13
10-2
10-7
10-2
10-8
10-13
S a f e t y Indicator S y s t e m
Circuit D i a g r a m
22-38
Seat Heaters
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
22-48
C i r c u i t D i a g r a m .................................... 22-49
S e a t W i r e H a r n e s s , Driver's ..
Installation
20-5
S e a t , Front
Removal/Installation
Disassembly/Reassembly
20-2
20-3
14-168
S e c o n d a r y S h a f t Idler G e a r B e a r i n g
Replacement....................................... 14-179
Servo Body
D i s a s s e m b l y / I n s p e c t i o n / R e a s s e m b l y .... 14165
Shift C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d V a l v e s
Replacement
Test
14-107
14-107
Shift Lock S o l e n o i d
Test
Replacement
14-149
14-150
14-96
Spark Plugs
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Inspection
4-14
4-24
Specifications
(See s e c t i o n 2)
Starter
Test
4-7
Replacement
4-8
O v e r h a u l ................................................... 4-9
Starter Solenoid
Test
4-3
..4-4
4-5
Steering
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Troubleshooting
Inspection
17-3
17-6
17-9
Steering Column
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
17-3
Steering Gearbox
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Overhaul
17-3
17-20
Steering Lock
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
T i m i n g Belt
Inspection
Removal
Installation
Wire Harnesses
(See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x )
Wiring S y s t e m
Relay a n d C o n t r o l U n i t L o c a t i o n s ..... 22-2, 3
11-98
1
6-18
6-19
6-22
14-154
14-192
Transmission Range S w i t c h
Test
Replacement
14-140
14-141
14-180
14-183
14-185
Valve Guides
Inspection
Replacement
6-44
6-45
Valve Seals
Removal
6-43
Valve Seats
Repair
6-47
17-3
Valve Springs
Removal
Sub-frames
Replacement
6-43
20-9
Sunlight Sensor
Replacement
Test
21-57
..21-57
Valves
Adjustment
Removal
Inspection
Installation
6-13
6-43
6-44
6-49
VTEC Lost M o t i o n A s s e m b l i e s / S p r i n g s
Inspection
6-39
6-9
19-78
22-31
19-81
TDC Sensors
Replacement
6-55
Thermostat
Test
Replacement
10-9
10-12
2 n d Clutch Pressure S w i t c h
Replacement
17-19
Steering Wheel
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Troubleshooting
(See f i r s t p a g e o f t h i s I n d e x )
17-3
S t e e r i n g Rack G u i d e
Adjustment
TCS S w i t c h
Test
Throttle Cable
Adjustment
11-96
11-99
11-100
4-6
Starting System
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Circuit Diagram
Troubleshooting
T C S Relay
Test
Throttle Body
Test
Removal/Installation
Disassembly/Reassembly
w
Water Pump
C o m p o n e n t Location Index
Inspection
Replacement
10-2
10-9
10-10
19-82
19-83
14-111
14-111
14-170, 183
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES
NOTES